Adventure Travel | TravelAwaits https://www.travelawaits.com/category/types-of-travel/adventure/ Our mission is to serve the 50+ traveler who's ready to cross a few items off their bucket list. Tue, 23 May 2023 19:48:29 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.2 https://upload.travelawaits.com/ta/uploads/2021/04/TA.favicon.white_.260-150x150.png Adventure Travel | TravelAwaits https://www.travelawaits.com/category/types-of-travel/adventure/ 32 32 4 Unique Adventures I Had Exploring The Equator In Quito, Ecuador https://www.travelawaits.com/2876521/things-to-do-quito-ecuador-equator/ Wed, 24 May 2023 23:15:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2876521 Quito, Ecuador
Heide Brandes

Exploring the equator in Quito, Ecuador, provides an opportunity to experience amazing natural and cultural landmarks, including the dividing line between the Northern and Southern Hemispheres. Located 9,350 feet above sea level in the Central Andes Mountains, Quito is known for its rich history and culture, and its presence at the equator and in the Andes means a slew of unique experiences.

If you’ve got a few days to explore Quito, visiting the equator line and the two museums and monuments dedicated to it is worth a long morning or afternoon. Even better, it’s still close to other must-see excursions in the city. 

Here are the five unique adventures I had exploring the equator in Quito, Ecuador.

Our visit to the equator line in Quito was part of a hosted trip with Kontiki Expeditions — all opinions are my own.

false equator spot, Mitad Del Mundo, Ecuador
Before the actual equatorial line was found closer to The Museu Inti Nan, Quito built a massive monument, museum, and replica colonial village at the “false” spot to memorialize the equator at Mitad del Mundo.
Photo credit: Heide Brandes

1. Mitad Del Mundo

The “False” Equator

I know this may sound confusing, but bear with me: The location of the equator was originally set by a French geodesic expedition team led by Charles-Marie de La Condamie in 1736. The team spent 8 years surveying and studying the area, but their location of the equatorial line was off by about 200 meters, though the pre-Colombian Quito people were spot on, archeological evidence proves.

Before the actual equatorial line was found closer to The Museu Inti Nan (The Intiñan Museum — more on it below), Quito built a massive monument, museum, and a replica Colonial village at the “false” spot to memorialize the equator. Mitad del Mundo is a 100-foot-tall monument with a giant yellow line dividing the hemispheres, making it a popular spot for photos.

Mitad del Mundo also includes a small but well-curated museum about the ecosystem, indigenous culture, and history of Ecuador, as well as a village of shops, food vendors, and craftsmen. It’s a great place for an introduction to the equator and to Ecuador itself. If you happen to visit on the weekend or during special holidays, the central plaza at the Mitad del Mundo hosts concerts, special entertainment, and cultural events for tourists.

Pro Tip: If you aren’t taking a guided tour, then getting to Mitad del Mundo by bus is another option. Regular buses depart from Quito’s northern Ofelia bus station to Mitad del Mundo throughout the day and stop right outside the equator monument.

egg balancing at the equator
The equator causes funny things to happen, like loss of muscle strength when you stand on the line of the equator or the ability to balance an egg on a nail.
Photo credit: Heide Brandes

2. Intiñan Site Museum 

The Real Fun Begins

Located right next to Mitad del Mundo is The Intiñan Museum, which has its own marker and is closer to the right spot. This is where the real fun at the equator begins. Be sure to take the guided tour around the museum. The guides share a wealth of knowledge about the equator and then lead you in some hands-on equator tricks, such as trying to walk a straight line with your eyes closed, demonstrating the loss of muscle strength when you stand on the line of the equator, and balancing an egg on a nail. 

You can even see a demonstration of how water swirls in opposite directions on either side of the equator (known as the Coriolis Effect).

Fun Fact: Things like weight and balance are different on the actual equator. According to our guide, I officially weigh 1 kilogram (2.2 pounds) less while standing on the equator line than I do anywhere else on Earth.

Heide at the equator, Mitad del Mundo, and The Intiñan Musuem
The Mitad del Mundo and The Intiñan Museum have their own marker and are closer to the right location of the equator in Ecuador.
Photo credit: Heide Brandes

Again, you’ll have plenty of opportunities to take photos while straddling the equatorial line, and while the whole experience is a little cheesy, it was fun and interesting. If you’re drawn to the slightly macabre, you can learn to make a shrunken head with step-for-step instructions at the museum. But it is also full of other less-squirm-inducing educational delights, including a display of totems at Totemic Forest and an art gallery of local artists.

Before you leave, you’ll also receive a personalized certificate declaring how you stepped across the equator at Mitad del Mundo.

Pro Tip: Although amusing and fun, science so far has not backed up any of the claims about the guides’ tricks they demonstrate on the equator. In fact, the Coriolis Effect has no effect on the direction of draining water in household drains anywhere and you can likely balance an egg on a nail head anywhere with enough patience, so take the “scientific” demonstrations with a grain of salt.

Khoura Chocolate Artesanal
Try some of the famous cacao and chocolate at Khoura Chocolate Artesanal.
Photo credit: Heide Brandes

3. Khoura Chocolate Artesanal

Support Small Cacao Farmers

No trip to Ecuador is complete without indulging in the famed cacao culture and curated chocolate industry. Cacao production is an important sector of Ecuador’s economy and culture, with historical roots tracing back to pre-Colonial times.

With an ideal climate, rich soil, and over 300 years of tradition, Ecuador’s cacao production is predominantly done as a traditional, small-scale operation with farmers using simple agricultural methods. The country’s unique varieties of cacao makes the cacao beans from Ecuador highly sought after by the global chocolate industry.

Located just a 4-minute drive from Mitad del Mundo is one of those small, family-owned cacao and chocolate factories. Khoura Chocolate Artesanal supports small cacao farmers by producing artisan dark chocolate and other cacao products — roasting and preparing chocolates in a wide variety of flavors on site at its small, friendly factory.

Pop in for a tour that covers how Khoura creates its unique chocolates (try the dark banana chocolate bar!), a tasting of different qualities of cacao and different flavors of the chocolate produced, and a treat of rich, dark, heady hot chocolate at the end.

Leave plenty of room in your bags so you can come home with tons of rich, rare Ecuadorian chocolate to enjoy or give as souvenirs.

Fun Fact: One of the heritage cacao beans you can try is the Nacional — the rarest, most highly prized cacao bean in the world. Until 2009, the Nacional bean was thought to be functionally extinct. Today, The Heirloom Cacao Preservation Fund and other farmers and activists are working to bring back the population of pure Nacional trees.

Basilica del Voto Nacional
The city’s largest cathedral is the Basilica del Voto Nacional, a grand neo-Gothic basilica that towers over the surrounding Old Town.
Photo credit: Heide Brandes

4. Old Town Quito

The Historic Center Of Quito

With a population of over 2 million people, Quito has a unique atmosphere created by the presence of pre-Colombian, Colonial, and modern architecture and many parks, churches, museums, and other landmarks, so it has become a great tourist destination.

One of the best areas to take in the historic architecture and history is the historic center of Quito, nicknamed “Old Town.” Partly because of this area, Quito was the first city declared a UNESCO World Heritage Site.

Begin your journey at Plaza de la Independencia, a popular square lined with a number of historic buildings including the Casa de La Cultura Ecuatoriana and the impressive Presidential Palace.

Basilica Del Voto Nacional

The city’s largest cathedral is the Basilica del Voto Nacional, a grand neo-Gothic basilica that towers over the surrounding Old Town and is visible from most of the city.

The Basilica del Voto Nacional is a wonder of gothic architecture, but surprisingly, it’s among the newest and still unfinished architectural wonders of the city. The plans to build the cathedral began in 1890, with construction beginning in 1892. More than 100 years later, construction work on the Basilica del Voto Nacional continues, making it the largest gothic cathedral in Latin America. The cathedral has bronze doors, soaring towers with stunning views of the city, and gargoyles inspired by the animals of Ecuador, including iguanas, tortoises, and armadillos.

San Francisco Church (known as the Iglesia y Convento de St. Francis)
When visiting Old Town, the San Francisco Church (known as the Iglesia y Convento de St. Francis) is also worth a visit.
Photo credit: Heide Brandes

Pro Tip: The cathedral isn’t the only impossibly beautiful church in Old Town. Also worth a visit are San Francisco Church (known as the Iglesia y Convento de St. Francis) and the gold-enshrined La Compania de Jesus. All these historic structures offer tours, but be aware that they may be closed or access-limited due to weddings or other events.

La Ronda And Barrio El Carmen

La Ronda is one of Quito’s most colorful and vibrant streets, full of picturesque Colonial buildings and shops, and Barrio El Carmen is an old neighborhood full of cobblestone streets and lovely colorful houses that are the perfect representation of Colonial architecture. Both are fun places to take in the vibe of Old Town Quito.

Pro Tip: If you’re up for some shopping, know that many local craftsmen line the streets selling everything from handmade wood carvings to vast landscape paintings.

Casa Del Alabado

If you want a deep dive into Quito’s indigenous and pre-Colombian history, then the Casa del Alabado (“House of Praise”), located in a gorgeous 17th-century Colonial mansion, is one of the best museums to visit. With more than 5,000 pieces of pre-Colombian pottery, tools, artwork, and weaponry, the museum contains eight rooms of more than 500 artifacts on permanent display.

This museum covers archeological information about the pre-Colombian population’s ways of worship, ceremony, history, art skills, and connections with nature. Be aware that the museum is open from Wednesday–Sunday and entrance is by reservation only.

Pro Tips: If you’re walking in Old Town, be aware of some steep hills that will literally take your breath away, especially in such high altitudes. A guided tour is also recommended for the sheer amount of history and knowledge they possess. We used Link Experiences, which was a fantastically organized and helpful service. Also, ask your doctor about a prescription for acetazolamide, which is used to prevent and treat high-altitude sickness.

]]>
I Just Did The Polar Plunge In Antarctica — Here’s Why I Can’t Wait To Do It Again https://www.travelawaits.com/2881312/i-just-did-the-polar-plunge-in-antarctica/ Wed, 10 May 2023 23:08:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2881312 Orne Harbor in Antarctica
Lyle Kilgore

I’m not a big fan of the cold, and I cringe deep in my soul at the idea of immersing myself in ice-cold water. The fact that I was shivering in nothing but a bikini and socks on the shores of a bay in Antarctica came as much of a surprise to me as to anyone else. With my arms wrapped around my goosebumped flesh, I looked at my travel partner, Lyle, who had the same worried look on his face.

“Are we really going to do this?” I asked. “How can we not? We’re in Antarctica!” he said enthusiastically, even though his expression was anything but enthusiastic.

With that, we took a deep breath and ran towards the arctic waters. The initial shock of frigid waters didn’t hit me immediately until I held my breath and plunged into water colder than anything I had ever felt. I think I lasted all of three seconds before squealing with shock and veering off toward the shore and my dry clothes.

We had just done our first Polar Plunge, and our first time was in the bay at Deception Island, Antarctica. As they say, if you’re gonna go, go big! The Polar Plunge was the ice cube on top of the frozen cake, and here’s why I can’t wait to do it again.

Note: The writer was a hosted guest of Hurtigruten Expeditions. All opinions are her own.

Wildlife watching aboard Hurtigruten Expeditions' Antarctica cruise
Wildlife watching aboard Hurtigruten Expeditions’ Antarctica cruise
Photo credit: Lyle Kilgore

1. Where I Went And Why

When you have the chance to knock off the last of the seven continents off your list and journey to a land sheathed in mystery and adventure, you jump at the chance. I had always dreamed of seeing Antarctica — made famous by legendary explorers such as Roald Amundsen, Sir Ernest Shackleton, and Sir Edmund Hillary.

Lyle and I embarked on the Hurtigruten Expeditions 12-day Highlights of Antarctica cruise. It ventured from Buenos Aires, Argentina, and the southern Argentina port of Ushuaia, before embarking on the MS Fridtjof Nansen, recently voted the safest and most sustainable cruise ship in the world.

After a rough and tumble 2 days crossing 600 miles of the notorious Drake Passage to reach the tip of the peninsula of Antarctica, we immediately started exploring. Because Hurtigruten Expeditions focuses on sustainability, science, and small-ship experiences, many of our expeditions were accompanied by working scientists on board.

A chinstrap penguin peeks out from behind a rock at Orne Harbor in Antarctica
A chinstrap penguin peeks out from behind a rock at Orne Harbor in Antarctica
Photo credit: Lyle Kilgore

2. Adventure And Excursions

Wildlife And Icy Views

Like a line of red and yellow ants, we weaved up the side of a snowy mountain on a hike to a chinstrap penguin colony at Orne Harbor; our first steps on the actual continent of Antarctica. The pathway was slippery and required hiking poles, but the views of the vast land and seas from atop the mountain were staggering. Jaunty little chinstrap penguins waddled, protected fuzzy gray chicks, and honked at each other.

Earlier that day, we went kayaking, watching icebergs calve and flip while penguins lept gracefully through the waters. Another day, we visited several penguin colonies. And on other days, we explored old Antarctica homesteads and took inflatable Zodiacs to get up close and personal with whales. Seals lounged on the ice like big gray potatoes while arctic birds like petrels and albatross soared above. While Antarctica seems desolate and intimidating, it is surprisingly full of life, and each day was a thrilling foray into discovery.

Be Flexible

Each day held potential for hiking, kayaking, Zodiac excursions, or wildlife viewing. However, the itinerary is at the mercy of the weather, so it’s best to expect delays, cancellations of activities, and hiccups along the way.

Citizen science program Hurtigruten cruises
Citizen science programs, like the NASA GLOBE Observer program, are a major part of Hurtigruten cruises.
Photo credit: Heide Brandes

3. Learning About Antarctica

Education And Environment

The Antarctica cruise wasn’t all fun and games, though we had plenty of those. Climate researchers, students, and experts in their field, our Expedition Team led lectures about Antarctica on topics ranging from icebergs, history, ornithology, whale numbers, and phytoplankton as well as photography and stargazing.

These experts were our guides on landings, hikes, and expedition boat cruising. I was one of the lucky “lottery” winners to accompany a scientist on a Zodiac expedition to attempt to take a skin sample from a mother humpback whale and her calf while also collecting water samples to track the DNA of what creatures passed through the waters.

Other programs on board Hurtigruten’s MS Nansen included a class on how to use the GLOBE Observer app, a citizen-science app that lets you record cloud coverage anywhere you are to complement NASA satellite observations; the global Happy Whale program that lets cruisers identify individual marine mammals; Aurorasaurus, the first citizen science project that collects sightings of the northern and southern lights; and eBird, which allows guests to record seabird distribution, among others.

A colony of chinstrap penguins gather on rocks during one of the many landings
A colony of chinstrap penguins gather on rocks during one of the many landings
Photo credit: Lyle Kilgore

4. What I Liked, What I Didn’t

My favorite activities on Hurtigruten Expeditions’ Antarctica cruise were the outdoor explorations. The guides were thoroughly trained in guiding and safety, and even when a nearby iceberg flipped over in front of us while kayaking, we never felt unsafe. 

The leisurely days crossing the Drake Passage, and after the day’s activities, were filled with lectures, science lab activities, games, and more. The onboard lounge and bar with its massive windows was a perfect place to relax, sip on an Irish whisky, and watch for whales.

As guests, everyone is given a polar expedition jacket to keep, which is probably the best jacket I’ve owned. Guests are also loaned rubber landing boots, floatation devices, and special cards that track when you get on and off the ship. Safety is a big priority.

Bring Snacks

One thing I didn’t like about the cruise was the limitation of available snacks, though, I think it’s part of Hurtigruten’s efforts to reduce waste. The three restaurants on board have set hours of operation, so if you miss the window, you go hungry. We took to-go boxes of snackable items from the buffet to munch when we felt snacky.

Fun Fact: Hurtigruten Expeditions is the first cruise line to implement SpaceX’s broadband service Starlink across all ships. Today, the company now offers high-speed, low-latency connectivity across its entire fleet, and it worked fantastically for me while I was on board.

Polar Plunge in Antarctica
If you do a Polar Plunge in Antarctica, be prepared for the shock of icy waters… but it’s worth the risk.
Photo credit: Peter Wilson

5. How You Can Do An Arctic Polar Plunge Too

Our last day in Antarctica was on Deception Island, a horseshoe-shaped active volcano. The sun was finally shining as we hiked for 2–3 hours around the rim of the volcano, which was dormant but incredibly windy. You’ll have to be able to take pretty steep inclines over rocky terrain for this hike, but the views of the bay and the ship below are well worth the huffing and puffing.

At the end of the hike, the Hurtigruten crew was ready with towels and guides to lead brave souls into the icy waters for the Polar Plunge. Frankly, I was surprised that the majority of guests from young to old braved this extreme activity, but we did. 

Be prepared by bringing an extra set of dry clothes and dry socks, as well as a hat for wet hair and gloves. You’ll have to wear socks into the water because the sand can burn your feet (it is still volcanically active), but the water was a balmy 31 degrees Fahrenheit. Back at the ship, guests who braved the ordeal all received a personalized certificate.

But the bonding that night over dinner and drinks was the best as we all recounted our icy dip and shared photos and videos.

What You’ll Need

Pack plenty of layers, preferably with an inner woolen layer. You’ll need waterproof or water-resistant pants for the excursions, two water-resistant pairs of gloves, a warm hat, a backpack for excursions, motion sickness pills, warm quick-dry jackets, polarized sunglasses, and a swimsuit. While on board, the dress code is casual, so think denim, wool, t-shirts (underneath), GoreTex, and fleece (wool).

I found having a casual pair of slip-on shoes or tennis shoes for the ship was comfy and helpful.

Also, medical travel insurance with emergency evacuation is required. 

Guests on Hurtigruten Expeditions' MS Fridtjof Nansen gather for an afternoon of whale watching.
Guests on Hurtigruten Expeditions’ MS Fridtjof Nansen gather for an afternoon of whale watching.
Photo credit: Heide Brandes

Hurtigruten Expeditions

The optional Polar Plunge was one of the last adventures offered on Hurtigruten Expeditions’ Antarctica cruise. Throughout the week, we explored the world’s most southern continent — an intimidatingly beautiful land encased in millennia of ice and snow — and embarked on adventures ranging from snow hikes, scientific excursions, kayaking among icebergs, and hiking with penguins. And while I hate the cold and being cold, the cruise was among the most impactful experiences of any destination I’ve been to.

Related Reading:

]]>
How To Visit Venezuela’s Beautiful Angel Falls https://www.travelawaits.com/2480960/venezuela-angel-falls-how-to-visit/ Wed, 14 Dec 2022 21:01:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2480960/venezuela-angel-falls-how-to-visit/ stunning Angel Falls in soft morning light
Alice Nerr / Shutterstock.com

If you haven’t heard of Venezuela’s Angel Falls, just picture a real-life Indiana Jones adventure deep in the jungles of South America, and you’ll be off to a good start. Buried deep in the heart of the southeastern jungles of Venezuela is a natural marvel so phenomenal that it has to be seen to be believed. Angel Falls, the highest waterfall in the world, explodes from the top of a pink-hued mesa thousands of feet above an emerald-colored jungle and plummets dramatically into a churning pool of water below. The waterfall, located within Canaima National Park, is impressive in its own right, but what makes it even more special is that it takes passion and determination to get there.

Named not for the celestial being, but for Jimmy Angel, an American bush pilot who crashed his airplane atop the sandstone-capped mesa in the 1930s, Angel Falls has always been a mysterious and mesmerizing place. The mesa, Auyantepui, is buried in lush wilderness with no road access. The only way to see the falls today is from the air, by boat trip up the river through Devil’s Canyon, or by a short hike to the viewpoint of the falls.

It is the trip of a lifetime. However, as with most things that are once-in-a-lifetime, it requires a bit of extra legwork to make happen. Still, for those with the drive to see this natural marvel, the experience is absolutely worth the work.

TRAVEL ADVISORY: The U.S. State Department has Venezuela listed as Level 4: Do Not Travel. We strongly advise that you read their report before considering a trip to Venezuela at this time.

Angel Falls in Venezuela.
Angel Falls can be found in Canaima National Park.
Photo credit: Lukas Uher / Shutterstock.com

Where Is Angel Falls?

Angel Falls (Salto Ángel in Spanish) is located within Canaima National Park in the Gran Sabana region of Bolívar state. Spanning more than 11,500 square miles in the wilderness of southern Venezuela, the park is a UNESCO World Heritage site and one of the most impressive places in the world. The majority of Canaima is covered with table mountain formations with breathtaking cliffs and beautiful, arching waterfalls, including Angel Falls, which, at 3,000 feet, is the world’s highest waterfall.

Canaima National Park sits on the southeastern border of Venezuela near Guyana (another destination that is definitely worth a Google search!) and Brazil. It is difficult to reach, but its remoteness is part of what makes it so attractive.

Fun Fact: Before it was known as Angel Falls, indigenous Pemon people called it Kerepakupai Merú or Parekupa Vena. In the Pemon language, Kerepakupai Merú means “waterfall of the deepest place,” while Parakupá Vená means “the fall from the highest point.”

A canoe approaches Angel Falls.
Angel Falls cannot be reached by car.
Photo credit: Douglas Olivares / Shutterstock.com

How Do You Get To Angel Falls?

First, it’s important to note that it is not possible to reach Angel Falls by car, since there are no roads in the area. The most popular way to visit the Falls is by flying to the town of Canaima, Venezuela. There are no direct flights to Canaima from Caracas, Venezuela you must first fly to Ciudad Bolívar, Venezuela, or Puerto Ordaz, Venezuela.

Angel Falls Package Tours

Purchasing a package tour that includes the trek to the falls, as well as accommodations, flights, and meals, is the easiest and most cost-effective way to see the natural marvel. Most visitors who visit Canaima do so through these package tours. The tours that include airfare are the most convenient for travelers, since flights tend to sell out far in advance.

Angel-Eco Tours

Booking your tour in advance is key and there are many tour companies to choose from. One that consistently receives good reviews is Angel-Eco Tours, which offers a three-day, two-night Canaima National Park experience. The tour includes assistance getting to and from Canaima from Caracas. On the first two days, visitors tour other sights in the area, and on the third day, they depart for the falls in a motorized canoe from Ucaima Port. The tour features moderate hikes to nearby lookout points. If you’re looking for something more adventurous and challenging, Angel-Eco Tours also offers a nine-day trek that includes Angel Falls and a visit to Roraima, Brazil.

Osprey Expeditions

Osprey Expeditions is another highly rated tour operator that offers treks to Angel Falls and other popular vantage points along the way. The company also assists with airport transfers to and from Canaima.

Hotel Package

Another way to visit the falls is to go through a lodge. Wakü Lodge is one of the better boutique lodges in the region and offers customized packages for visiting Angel Falls. Many of these packages include airfare to and from Puerto Ordaz.

Flyover Tour

You can also book a flyover tour of the falls if the boat ride is too much of a time commitment.

Aerial view of Angel Falls.
Angel Falls as seen from above
Photo credit: Petrakov / Shutterstock.com

When Is The Best Time To Visit?

Again, we advise you to read the U.S. State Department’s advisory on traveling to Venezuela at this time.

The busiest months of the year to visit Angel Falls are July, August, November, December, and January. This is when prices go up considerably, and you’ll be competing for the picturesque views with other visitors. Visitors who want to make a flyover tour can schedule them year-round, but if you’d like to visit on foot, you must arrive during the rainy season, from June through November. This is because the park has to ensure that the Carrao River level is high enough for the water to make it all the way to the falls. During the dry season between January and May, there aren’t any organized trips to the area, but the park is still accessible.

View from directly under Angel Falls.
View from the base of Angel Falls
Photo credit: Aleh Mikalaichyk / Shutterstock.com

What Will You See At Angel Falls?

The height of the falls is reason enough to add them to your bucket list. Picture a plummet that is 16 times higher than Niagara Falls! Already you’re starting with something incredible. Beyond that, the Venezuelan waterfall sits in the heart of the wilderness, with no road access, making the adventure to get to it the trip of a lifetime. Buried in the misty, jade-hued jungle, Angel Falls explodes onto the scene, plunging from the mountain above. Most of the visitors to the falls get their first glimpse of them on the short trek from the river that brings all the boat tours in. You’ll emerge from the bush to see bright blue skies; majestic, rose-colored cliffs; and the impressive cascade gushing down the sheer rock face into the verdant valley below.

Auyantepui Table in Venezuela.
Auyantepui Table
Photo credit: Paolo Costa / Shutterstock.com

Where Should You Stay?

Wakü Lodge

Wakü Lodge is one of the most popular places to stay near Canaima National Park; it’s located near the lagoon offering views of the area’s seven waterfalls. There are 19 rooms, one suite, and each room has its own balcony. Wakü Lodge’s tour packages include flights to and from Canaima, lodging, sightseeing, expeditions, and all meals. Visitors can choose a full-day expedition to Angel Falls or an overnight option.

Campamento Canaima

Campamento Canaima is another option for visitors to the park with 120 rooms in stand-alone cottages overlooking the lagoon. The cottages come in doubles, triples, and quads, all with daily room service, hot water, private bathrooms, and spectacular views. A bar and lounge round out the facilities. The hotel offers day trips to the falls as well as flyover tours.

Jungle Rudy’s Ucaima Camp

Jungle Rudy’s Ucaima Camp is yet another lodge with packages for visiting the falls. There are five cabins with balconies, hammocks, private bathrooms, and more. A dining room and salon with a view round out the amenities. Ucaima also has two cabins near the falls for visitors who are making the overnight trip to see them. Both cabins offer outdoor grills and spectacular views of the falls. The lodge’s packages include various amenities, tour services, and extras like a welcome cocktail, insurance, and more.

Angel Falls in Venezuela.
The rest of Canaima National Park is beautiful and well worth exploring.
Photo credit: Matyas Rehak / Shutterstock.com

What Else Is There To Do Near Angel Falls?

There are so many natural wonders and impressive sites on the way to Angel Falls that a trip to the falls is really the cherry on top. This part of Venezuela is home to undulating savannas, palm forests, rivers, towering cliffs, and table-top mountains called tepuis.

Canaima itself is a remote village its biggest claim to fame is that it is the jumping-off point for exploring Angel Falls. However, the rest of Canaima National Park is beautiful and well worth exploring. At the center, the Laguna de Canaima (Canaima Lagoon), a reddish-colored reflective lagoon, features palm trees and pink sandy banks. The red and pink hues are due to tannins from decomposing plants over the decades. Seven stunning waterfalls tumble from the lagoon and most tours to Angel Falls include a short boat trip and hike that allow tour goers to explore these other falls as well.

The park is also home to Uruyén Canyon and the sacred Kavak Caves, which are thought to have been the site of mystic shaman ceremonies. Angel-Eco Tours offers hikes from Uruyén to Kavak or vice versa. The trip to the waterfalls of Kavak includes hiking, wading, and swimming in the canyons before reaching the powerful waterfalls that tumble in the distance. The hike from Uruyén to Kavak is about 5 miles and takes roughly 3 hours to complete at a leisurely pace. Accessing the caves requires an additional 1.5-mile walk on slightly steeper terrain.

]]>
The One Experience You Must Try When Visiting Durango, Colorado https://www.travelawaits.com/2817221/reasons-to-experience-soaring-treetop-adventures-durango/ Mon, 24 Oct 2022 19:01:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2817221
Michael P. Smith

Do you enjoy zip-lining? I love it, and when I visited Durango, Colorado, a few years ago, I had the opportunity to zip on the largest zip line in the world! Soaring Tree Top Adventures has 27 spectacular spans and offers an all-day, family-friendly adventure.

Remotely located on 180 private acres, approximately 32 miles north of Durango by rail and surrounded by the mountains and forests of the San Juan National Forest, Soaring Tree Top Adventures is only accessible by train.

Let’s learn about zip lines and why a Soaring Tree Top Adventure might be the perfect vacation activity for you.

What Is A Zip Line?

A “zip line” is the generic term for steel cables that run from tree to tree. Soaring Tree Top Adventures uses stainless steel helicopter-grade cable that will never rust and is much higher quality than the standard “bright” steel zip lines that flake and are noisy. This provides a much smoother, quieter, and safe ride.

Soaring Tree Top Adventures holds the patent to a unique formula allowing zip line guests to go from tree to tree without manually slowing down. Gloves are unnecessary to brake on the zip lines because you never need to touch the cable. Guests arrive at a comfortable pace to each tree and can step onto the platform. A Sky Ranger will greet you at each platform.

Luxury Zip Line Tour

Soaring Tree Top Adventures is the Tesla of zip lines! It is the longest and safest zip line in the world. The Soaring property spans both sides of the Animas River, so the zip lines are permitted to cross the river by law.

Most of the river crossings are more than 500 feet in length. The tenth and last zip line that crosses the river is a whopping 1,400 feet (a quarter of a mile) span! You jump from a cliff to launch this zip line and fly across the Animas River.

Class V rapids in the upper Animas River, where the zip lines cross the river.
Class V rapids in the upper Animas River, where the zip lines cross the river
Photo credit: Robin O’Neal Smith

When I visited and zip-lined across the Animas river, there was a black bear in the river below. What a thrill that was.

While the experience allows you to enjoy nature and zipping from tree to tree, you are also treated to first-class train transportation in a luxurious, private train car, a four-course gourmet lunch among the trees, snacks, and an ecology tour.

Soaring Tree Top Adventures provides guests with two of the best Durango attractions (Soaring and the Durango & Silverton Railroad) packaged together for a day’s adventure.

Durango & Silverton train in Colorado.
The only way to get to Soaring Tree Top Adventures is to ride the Durango & Silverton Train.
Photo credit: Michael P. Smith

Train Ride Included

You board the historic Durango & Silverton Train in Durango and ride for 2 hours, viewing the scenic forest, majestic mountains, and the gushing Animas River. The views are spectacular. 

Visitors from around the globe visit Durango to ride the Durango & Silverton Narrow Gauge Railroad. Guests of Soaring Tree Top Adventures ride in a special car. After dropping guests off at the zip line, the train continues to Silverton. The train returns at the end of your zip line adventure to pick you up and return you to Durango. 

Attraction Rated #1 

It was the very first zip line and is currently the longest zip line in the United States. It was rated the #1 Attraction in the United States on TripAdvisor. It was also ranked the top activity in Colorado and Durango.

Get Away From The Crowds

This unique zip-lining course is in the middle of the San Juan Forest. Talk about being remote; the only way to get there is via train. There are no roads. There is also minimal cell service in the mountains, so plan to unplug and enjoy nature as you leave the crowds behind.

Full Day Adventure

It is a full day of adventure with the 2-hour first-class train ride through breathtaking alpine scenery to Soaring Treetop Adventures. Sky Rangers and Eco Rangers are there to greet you and accompany you throughout the day.

Soaring Guests will experience 5.5 hours of zip-lining! All that exercise will work up an appetite, and the delicious four-course gourmet lunch served on a platform overlooking the Animas River will give you the energy to zip through the afternoon.

When your soaring adventure through the treetops and tall timbers comes to a close, you board the train again for the 2-hour ride back to Durango. The experience from start to finish is approximately 9.5 hours.

Trained Sky Rangers

Your tour guides for the day are the Sky Rangers. They guide you through the entire zip line course, help with your equipment, greet you when you arrive on a platform, and send you off to the next on the next span.

All Sky Rangers have CPR and First Aid certifications. Plus, they are trained in Soaring’s treetop protocols to ensure they know how to safely and effectively guide guests of all ages and physical abilities.

Eco Rangers will educate guests on Soaring’s commitment to the preservation and sustainability of the rare old-growth trees.

Fun Multignerational Adventure

From 4 to 94, all ages can enjoy Soaring Treetop Adventures. Multiple generations come for the day to zip-line together. Several generations were zip-lining when we visited.

Zip-lining through aspens at Soaring Tree Top Adventures in Durango, Colorado.
Zip-lining through aspens at Soaring Tree Top Adventures
Photo credit: Michael P. Smith

The Scenery

Gorgeous scenery will surround you both during your travel by train to Soaring Tree Top Adventures and while you are there. Majestic mountains, the gushing Animas River, and the tall timbers that include Aspens and Pines contribute to one of the most scenic areas in the country.

You also may see various animals like deer, mountain sheep, elk, bobcats, turkeys, mountain lions, and bears.

Environmentally Friendly

Soaring Tree Top Adventures is environmentally friendly. Platforms are suspended from a patented “tree-hugging” system that allows the trunk to sway and expand. Built without bolts, hooks, screws, or anything penetrating the trees, they do not suffer any intrusions or stresses.

Accessibility And Rules

  • Guests must be able to climb stairs and hike up and downhill. You must be able to bend your knees.
  • The paths are not wheelchair accessible. The course is in an outdoor, wilderness environment.
  • The minimum weight for ziplining is 50 pounds, and the maximum weight is 265 pounds.
  • Smoking and all smoking devices are strictly prohibited.
Soaring Tree Top Adventures in Durango, Colorado.
Soaring Tree Top Adventures
Photo credit: Robin O’Neal Smith

Other Important Information

  • Soaring Tours typically run from the end of May through the middle of October.
  • You can reserve both the train and the zip line experience with one call to Soaring Treetop Adventures. They take care of everything.
  • There is a strict no-tipping policy.
  • The train and zip line run rain or shine. The zip line shuts down if there is lightning in the area.
  • Selfie sticks are not permitted.
  • You can travel with your family but skip the zip lines if you wish. Just reserve a pass as a day guest. This allows you to watch and take photos during part of the course and enjoy lunch with them.

Tips For A Successful Day With Soaring Tree Top Adventures

  • Dress in layers and bring a jacket. It is 5 to 10 degrees cooler in the mountains.
  • Wear closed-toe shoes. You will be hiking, climbing, etc.
  • Take bug spray and sunscreen.
  • Pay close attention to the Sky Ranger instructions. 
  • Have fun!

Related Reading:

]]>
8 Unique Mail Runs To Experience Around The World https://www.travelawaits.com/2814438/unique-mail-runs-to-experience-around-the-world/ Sat, 15 Oct 2022 17:18:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2814438 Harbour Air Otter landing in Ganges harbour
Harbour Air

Tag along with a postie for the day. “Neither snow nor rain nor heat nor gloom of night stays these couriers from the swift completion of their appointed rounds.” These words are associated with the American postal worker. But even tougher mail deliveries worldwide rely on boats, seaplanes, four-wheel-drives, and athletic teenagers. 

Tourists love to join in on these remote scenic delivery routes that provide chances to meet locals who have little contact with the outside world. After the thrill of my first mail run tour in Australia, I found myself seeking out these unique tours in all corners of the world. Here’s what I found. 

The Mail Run Tour in the Australian Outback
The Mail Run Tour in the Australian Outback
Photo credit: Josh Geelen / South Australian Tourism Commission

1. The Mail Run Tour

Coober Pedy, Outback South Australia

The Coober Pedy Mail Run tops the list of Outback adventures. Some tourists describe the experience as the highlight of their trip Down Under. Australia Post contractor Peter Rowe is usually the driver and guide. He takes his four-wheel-drive twice weekly on unsealed roads through red desert sands beginning in Coober Pedy — South Australia’s world-famous opal mining town where half the population lives underground. This otherworldly moonscape, known as Moon Plain, has captured the imagination of apocalyptic filmmakers in films like Red Planet and Mad Max Beyond Thunderdome

Mail truck in the Australian Outback
Mail truck in the Australian Outback
Photo credit: Josh Geelen / South Australian Tourism Commission

The Oodnadatta Track follows an ancient trail used by Aborigines for ochre trading. European explorers used the route to build the Overland Telegraph and the Old Ghan railway lines in the late 19th century. The trip takes around 13 hours with stops for meals at William Creek, its population of 10, the legendary bush pub, and Oodnadatta. 

The service delivers mail to a number of homesteads, including the world’s largest cattle station — Anna Creek Station — which is bigger than Israel. The locals love a yarn and a laugh, and tourists meet some amazing characters who call the Outback home. The trip stops at scenic points including the Dingo Fence (the longest fence in the world) and ruins connected to the Old Ghan railway.

A jumper on Lake Geneva Cruise Line
A jumper on Lake Geneva Cruise Line
Photo credit: Lake Geneva Cruise Line

2. US Mailboat Tour

Lake Geneva, Wisconsin

Magnificent homes skirt Geneva Lake. Back in 1916, when primitive roads were too difficult to traverse, mail here was delivered by boat. The residents possibly no longer need this service, but the much-loved tradition continues.

Tourists love seeing the huge mansions and learning about the area’s history. But most eyes are on the jumpers, or young athletic students who leap from the boat. Will they land safely or make a splash? 

With a delivery schedule of up to 70 homes, the mail boat — named the Walworth — does not stop. Runners make spectacular leaps from the moving boat onto the private docks, race to mailboxes, and dodge trip hazards before jumping on-board the vessel that has already left.

Despite possible drenchings, becoming a jumper is a coveted job with competitive tryouts every spring. Only a few contenders are sure-footed and agile enough to land this valued summer job. 

The Walworth departs at 10 a.m daily from mid-June to mid-September for the 2.5-hour tour. You can find details at Lake Geneva Cruise Lines.

The Riverboat Postman on Hawkesbury River near Sydney
The Riverboat Postman on Hawkesbury River near Sydney
Photo credit: The Riverboat Postman

3. The Riverboat Postman

Hawkesbury River, Near Sydney Australia

The Hawkesbury River is bordered by national parks. The Riverboat Postman mail run makes it easy for tourists to join the fun. Simply catch a train from Sydney Central to Hawkesbury River Station. Brooklyn Wharf, the departure point, is next door to the train station. 

The Riverboat Postman has been delivering mail to water-access-only properties since 1910 and is the last mail boat run in Australia. River residents have had their mail delivered every weekday, despite rain, hail, or high water. These days, the mail is delivered by Hawkesbury Cruises.

At each pier, there’s usually an excited dog eager for its owner and a treat. Although not everyone is social, a reclusive fisherman leaves a fishing hook on a wooden pole in the middle of the river. If he’s got mail, it gets left in a bag on the hook.

It’s a lazy trip up the meandering Hawkesbury and a delightful way to experience a landscape much loved by artists and writers who love their isolation. On a visit to Australia in 1873, the novelist Anthony Trollope wrote: “The Hawkesbury has neither the castles nor islands nor has it bright clear water like the Rhine. But the headlands are higher, and the bluffs are bolder, and the turns and maneuvers of the course which the waters have made for themselves are grander and, to me, more enchanting than those of either the European or American river.” And so the river remains today.

Trips depart at 10 a.m. on weekdays, except on public holidays, and coincide with the train’s arrival from Sydney. They include morning tea with famous Anzac biscuits — a ploughman’s-style lunch — and there’s a bar on-board. Co-owner Catherine Pignéguy said, “We are a true Aussie small business, locally owned and operated; all the crew live locally as well.”

Pro Tip: Extend your stay with one of the boat-only accessible accommodation options.

The Pelorus Mail Boat on Kenepuru Sound
Stunning weather in Kenepuru Sound with Pelorus Mail Boat
Photo credit: Marlborough Tour Company

4. Pelorus Mail Boat

Marlborough Sounds, New Zealand

The Pelorus Mail Boat has been operating since 1918. It sets out 3 days a week from the little town of Havelock at the top of the South Island to cruise through the stunning Marlborough Sounds — a collection of ancient sunken river valleys filled by the waters of the Pacific Ocean. Forested hills rise steeply from the sea around an intricate coastline of sheltered inlets and sandy bays. 

A pig waits to board the Pelorus Mail Boat
A pig waits to board the Pelorus Mail Boat
Photo credit: Marlborough Tour Company

Families that live in these pristine bays and inlets come down to collect their mail. Some live so remotely that they have no road access and their groceries and gas bottles are delivered. They collect their supplies in small boats or from the end of moorings. One expects a few dogs, but these locals bring their sheep, goats, and pigs — after all, this is New Zealand. It’s a hoot for tourists. Cruises last 5–6 hours, depending on deliveries. There are three different but equally scenic routes. There’s also a bring-your-own picnic lunch available in Havelock.

Jeff and Suzi Crawford, who run Akaroa's Eastern Bays Scenic Mail Run
Jeff and Suzi Crawford, who run Akaroa’s Eastern Bays Scenic Mail Run
Photo credit: Akaroa’s Eastern Bays Scenic Mail Run

5. Akaroa’s Eastern Bays Scenic Mail Run 

Akaroa, New Zealand

New Zealand is divided into two main islands — the North and South Islands. Akaroa, 50 miles from Christchurch on the South Island, was the country’s only French-founded settlement — albeit short-lived. The quaint township trades on its “Gallic heritage” with its wineries, bistros, cafes, and street names.

Behind Akaroa lies the extinct volcanic crater rim of Banks Peninsula. Join Jeff and Suzi Crawford on Akaroa’s Eastern Bays Scenic Mail Run, a tour that has been operating for over 30 years. Some do this mail delivery tour as a side excursion from the cruise ships that dock near Akaroa; others are touring New Zealand. The bright red mail van cuts a jaunty profile against the green swathes of pastures flecked with white sheep and contented cattle. The blue water-filled crater forming the bay twinkles below. 

The scenic rim would be a daunting drive for tourists, but for Jeff, the drive is second nature while he fills tourists in on the area’s fascinating natural and social history. A favorite stop is a visit to a historic church, after which guests enjoy Suzi’s tasty homemade baking. There are plenty of photo opportunities! Enjoy 5 hours amongst some of the most stunning scenery imaginable.

Passengers boarding Harbour Air Otter in Ganges harbour
Passengers boarding Harbour Air Otter in Ganges harbour
Photo credit: Harbour Air

6. The Mail Run Harbour Air 

Vancouver, Canada 

Vancouver is surrounded by water, and tourists love watching seaplanes splash land in the harbor. Here’s an excuse to fly in one. Seaplanes have historically figured large in the delivery of mail in these parts. A Mail Run Harbour Air tour involves harbor hopping. See BC’s beautiful Gulf Islands from the air, skipping from one picturesque coastal community to the next. Experience taking off and landing in quaint harbors like Maple Bay and the seaside village of Ganges on Salt Spring Island with its artisan producers and organic vineyards. 

The tour is customizable; anything from a 3-hour “island-hopping” adventure to a full-day trip with a stopover on Salt Spring Island. Rather than delivering mail, the tour is based on mail routes of yesteryear and ranks as a Canadian Signature Experience. It’s a once-in-a-lifetime excursion by Canadians who are passionate about sharing their part of the country with tourists.

Another option, CorilAir at Campbell River on Vancouver Island, still delivers mail in a De Havilland Beaver or Cessna float plane over British Columbia’s most remote and beautiful scenery. It also stops at one of Canada’s remaining floating post offices.

Coastline in Solund, Norway
Solund, Norway
Photo credit: Tobias Hersvik Ornehaug / Shutterstock.com

7. Stjernsund Postal Boat 

Hardbakke In Solund, Norway

Island Hopping to Solund, Bulandet, and Værlandet is a trip to the westernmost islands of Norway. There are several thousand islands, so numerous from above, they look like giant lily pads. Some islands are connected by bridges with perfect little Monopoly-style houses gracing the shores. The locals are resilient seafaring people, many tracing their ancestry to the Viking Age.

Cut off from Norway’s mainland until 1960 when a road was built to the village of Hardbakke, many of these windswept and wild islands are only accessible by a postal boat. This tour departs from Hardbakke. Beginning in calm waters and passing by narrow creeks and many beautiful small islands, it brings you close to nature and wildlife. The boat determines its stops based on passengers and mail deliveries. The last stop is the idyllic fishing village of Gåsvær. 

Afterward, the postal boat heads north to Bulandet and Værlandet in Askvoll municipality. Explore the islands on your own. They are connected by a series of bridges and 3.1 miles of roads — perfect for renting a bike. Take this tour as a day trip or over multiple days.

Pro Tip: Bring cash. Gåsvær does not accept credit or debit cards.

Herd of wild caribou near Nome, Alaska
Herd of wild caribou near Nome, Alaska
Photo credit: Chris McLennan / State of Alaska

8. Warbelow’s Air Ventures Bush Mail Flights

Fairbanks, Alaska

Go where few travelers have gone before and meet the people who live there. Warbelow’s Air Ventures flies its twin-engine, 10-seat Piper Navajo Chieftain to seven towns within 110 miles of its Fairbanks base, delivering mail and packages for the US Postal Service and UPS. Even Amazon packages make their way here.

This tour is a less expensive way to visit rural villages in Alaska, although there are no layovers. The plane only stops long enough to swap mail and have a chat with whoever turns up at the airstrip. But passengers get a bird’s eye view of Alaska’s interior; the treeless snow-covered mountains, roaming caribou, and heavily forested hillsides.

Locals get priority for empty seats, but passengers can pay to tag along for the experience when there’s space. Tours are approximately 1–3 hours with daily departures. Reservations can only be made the day before departures, but feel free to contact and discuss your plans.

]]>
13 Amazing Outdoor Adventures I Loved In Belize https://www.travelawaits.com/2801779/best-outdoor-activities-in-belize/ Sun, 11 Sep 2022 20:43:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2801779 Caracol, the largest Mayan ruin site in Belize
Svetlana Bykova / Shutterstock.com

Two distinct parts; one distinct Belize: On the flip side of our four glorious days on Belize’s Half Moon Caye sat another four glorious days in its up-country, with its rushing waterfalls, dramatic Mayan ruins, and wild jungles. Who knows? It’s the kind of place where you just might end up going beyond what you ever thought you would or could.

To celebrate my husband Dean’s 60th birthday, we booked an active vacation with REI Vacations. The first half of the itinerary gave us a taste of Belize’s island life and the last half, the mountainous, Mayan-rich Cayo District in the up-country. 

Before we get too far down the road, I want to start with the people on the adventure. It’s all about the company you keep.

Note: REI Vacations no longer offers trips to Belize, but you could use these ideas for travel on your own or with another outfitter.

1. Being Led By The Guide Of All Guides

On these kinds of trips, the guide can make or break it. Our lead guide, named Israel, demonstrated his love of Belize, nature, wildlife, culture, history, and outdoor skills at every turn. Before licensing as a tour guide, he worked with the Belize Audubon Society, was a nature preserve warden, and was part of Belize’s search and rescue organization. All this adds up to a guide perfectly suited to his role. He was an unending source of knowledge, humor, ambition, and patience. Surely, he added to the adventure as much as anything we did or saw.

Pro Tip: Language is not a barrier since English is the official language of Belize. Belizian Creole is widely spoken; Israel spoke both fluently.

2. Going ‘All In’ With Our Fellow Adventurers

People who take adventure vacations — like spending a week rafting in the Grand Canyon or hiking in a river in Japan — are a unique breed, and we were in good company on this trip.

Our group was small but spirited! We were joined by a couple in their 60s from California (this was their ninth REI vacation), another from Poland and Jamaica, and the third pair — a father-son (son was age 16) combo from Connecticut. These people were marathon runners and experienced divers, held careers in law and architecture, and traveled the world. I loved the father-son pair; they were “all in” on every ounce of adventure the trip offered.

3. The “Belizean Massage’ (Belize City To The Cayo District)

Our adventure started in the passenger van transfer from Belize City to our lodging at the Hidden Valley Inn. The roads got more and more primitive as we drove the two-and-a-half hours, eventually jostling and bumping our way over rocky, red clay they call roads. Israel laughed and hoped we were enjoying our “Belizean massage.” No extra charge!

Hiking in the Mountain Pine Ridge Forest Reserve
Hiking in the Mountain Pine Ridge Forest Reserve
Photo credit: Joan Sherman

4. Hiking In The Mountain Pine Ridge Forest Reserve Jungles

With Israel and a second guide, Rudy, we explored some of the 90 miles of trails inside the Cayo District’s beautiful Mountain Pine Ridge Forest Reserve, the largest and oldest of Belizean parklands. It has something for everyone: red earth, sandy areas, Caribbean pines, granite outcroppings, cascading waterfalls, limestone caves and sinkholes, rolling grasslands, and lush tropical rainforest. 

Pro Tip: Sunscreen and bug spray are jungle essentials. Don’t leave home without them.

5. Witnessing Giant Ceiba Trees

When Israel suggested a group photo, we were dwarfed by a ceiba tree (I believe it’s also called a kapok tree), one of the largest trees in the American tropics. Some can grow up to 200 feet! In Mayan culture, the ceiba was a multi-purpose tree and a spiritual pillar they called Wacah Chan, “the tree of life.”

Howler monkey in the wild at Mountain Pine Ridge Forest Reserve
Howler monkey in the wild at Mountain Pine Ridge Forest Reserve
Photo credit: Joan Sherman

6. Spotting Howler Monkeys

What was that spooky, almost prehistoric, roaring? A cacophony of howling, courtesy of howler monkeys! Israel told us that on a bad day, they will take to throwing things at the tourists. At least we didn’t have that problem! 

7. Tasting Termites — Literally!

Among Israel’s many accomplishments, he had extensive training in wilderness survival. He was constantly giving us plants to touch, smell, and taste. When he stepped up to a large termite mound, said they were edible, and demonstrated by eating some, we believed him. Upon his invitation, some believed him more than others and tried them, too! 

8. Carrying A Big Machete (Or At Least Being Guided By Someone Who Is)

Whenever we hiked, our guides carried machetes. Native to Belize, they knew these was essential gear, as common to them as us grabbing our cell phones before we leave the house. What exactly do these wild jungles hold? I wondered. All I could think was, “Speak softly and carry a big machete.”

Caracol, the largest Mayan ruin site in Belize
Caracol, the largest Mayan ruin site in Belize
Photo credit: Joan Sherman

9. Exploring Caracol, The Largest Mayan Ruin Site In Belize 

We hiked at the impressive Caracol, the largest Mayan site in Belize. Situated on the Vaca Plateau in the Maya Mountains near the Guatemalan Border, its 75 square miles are believed to have been home to almost 200,000 residents. We spent half a day here, walking around and climbing the ruins. The largest ruin, Sky Palace, is Belize’s tallest man-made structure and towers about 140 feet above the settlement.

Pro Tip: You can visit Caracol year-round but be sure to have a dependable tour guide and/or vehicle to get you there. 

Red earth mountain biking path
Red earth mountain biking path
Photo credit: Joan Sherman

10. Mountain Biking In The Mountain Pine Ridge Forest Reserve 

Our adventure included a 10-mile ride on 21-speed mountain bikes. It wasn’t far, but it was rigorous and challenging. The terrain was rocky red earth, loose sand, and packed roads with what they called “rolling hills,” but what I’ll call rather steep inclines and downhills. 

11. Swimming In The Pools Of Butterfly Falls

Sometimes, it’s not what you know, but who you know. Butterfly Falls is located inside the public Mountain Pine Ridge Forest Reserve, but the falls themselves are located on private property operated by the Hidden Valley Inn. Fortunately, that’s where we were staying!

The 80-foot-high Butterfly Falls plunge into a gorgeous pool that attracts butterflies, including the Blue Morpho. It looks like a movie set! We hiked about half an hour to swim in the cascading pool. The water was perfect; the area was secluded and lush. 

The waterfall and pools of Rio On Pools
The waterfall and pools of Rio On Pools
Photo credit: Joan Sherman

12. Exploring The Rio Frio Cave And Pools

About 3 miles from Butterfly Falls are a cave and waterfall in the public section of the reserve.

Rio Frio Cave

If you stand in the middle of this half-a-mile-long cave, you can see both openings marked by 65-foot arches. Like all good caves, it features giant boulders and large stalactites. A river runs through it, adding reflection and beauty everywhere you look.

Rio On Pools

After cave exploration, we headed to Rio on Pools, a wide shallow stream tumbling over large, largely flat granite rocks as it made its way downstream. Dean was brave enough to get in the water and float downstream. The rocks were extremely slippery, so caution is essential.

Pro Tip: Due to fast-moving water and underwater holes, this area is not recommended for children or inexperienced swimmers.

Serene cottages and grounds at the Hidden Valley Inn & Reserve
Serene cottages and grounds at the Hidden Valley Inn & Reserve
Photo credit: Joan Sherman

13. Enjoying The Lap Of Luxury At Hidden Valley Inn

The Hidden Valley Inn & Reserve is nestled in Mountain Pine Ridge Forest Reserve’s 7,200 acres. It has comfortable lounges with stone hearths, a terraced swimming area, and verdant gardens. Birds started singing at about 5 o’clock every morning, a beautiful sound to a Minnesotan in April!

The Cottages

When we stepped into our cottage (one of 12), we saw fresh flower petals on the bed and in the bathroom and a vase of fresh flowers on the fireplace mantel. The cottages are perfect places to relax because there are no TVs. There’s also no air conditioning, but the average temperature year-round is 73°F.

Pro Tip: Another reason to love this place: Due to the inn’s elevation, there are virtually no mosquitoes. 

The Food

This resort had delicious food, expertly prepared. Dinner started with amuse-bouche (literally, “mouth amuser”), and moved to homemade soup and freshly baked bread. Entrees could be a choice of three, including chicken, duck, seafood, pasta, vegetarian, Mediterranean, and more. Lastly, we enjoyed heavenly desserts, including creamy cheesecake with a “veil” garnish of spun, caramelized sugar — completely edible and beautiful!

Sign near a waterfall overlook, Belize
Warning sign preceding a waterfall in Belize
Photo credit: Joan Sherman

Final Thoughts

Somewhere along our journey in up-country Belize, we saw a sign that read “Don’t go beyond.” Of course, there was a dangerous drop-off, so it was there for safety. I don’t think their little fence would do much good!

But sometimes it’s fun, and good for us, to go beyond. To take this unique pre-retirement or retirement season of life and try new things. Things that might be outside our comfort zones. So go ahead, go beyond. These incredible outdoor adventures in beautiful Belize are a great place to start!

Pro Tip: Traveling to Belize is like traveling to any U.S. destination on Central Standard Time (CST); Belize follows CST all year and does not observe daylight saving time.

Related Reading:

]]>
My 5 Favorite Whitewater Adventures In The U.S. https://www.travelawaits.com/2800526/best-whitewater-rafting-in-the-us/ Wed, 07 Sep 2022 23:11:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2800526 Rafting on the New River
Adventures on the Gorge

Five years ago, I took my first whitewater rafting adventure in the jungles of Costa Rica. It was a wild ride, with the raft being tossed by the waves like an ice cube in a cocktail shaker. Every minute of the ride was thrilling and my only concern was seeing another day. Our guide safely navigated the course while the rest of us paddled for our lives. Thankfully, we finished alive and thoroughly soaked to the bone.

It was my first attempt, but it wasn’t my last. The adrenaline rush was so memorable that I knew whitewater rafting was something I wanted to seek out time and time again. And so I have, both in the U.S. and abroad. For those who think whitewater rafting might be right up their alley, I highly recommend trying one of these rivers for a ride unlike any other.

Tips For Whitewater Rafting

One of the first things you learn about whitewater rafting is that everything depends on the water level. Most rivers rely on melted snow, so if there was limited precipitation the previous winter, there won’t be a lot of water, which can make rafting a bit challenging. The majority of whitewater rafting in the U.S. occurs during the summer months because it is too cold the rest of the year.

Every whitewater rafting adventure will have guides who ride along with the group. They will cover all of the safety rules before you even step foot on the raft. Stronger rowers sit at the front of the raft, helpers in the middle, and guide in the back.

In the beginning, there will be time to practice the different strokes. Whitewater rafting is for all fitness levels, but if there are any shoulder or back issues, I would avoid taking the trip.

Rapids are classified from Class I to Class VI, with Class I being the easiest and VI being the most dangerous (and best left to the experts). Be sure to confirm the types of rapids you will encounter on your trip.

Rafting companies will provide all the gear you need, including helmets, life vests, and paddles. It is recommended to apply plenty of sunscreen — as well as bring some along for later — and wear closed-toe water shoes for the best experience. Flip-flops are not allowed.

If you think you’re up for the adventure, here are some of our favorite spots to navigate in the U.S.

Riversport OKC complex and rafting adventures
Riversport OKC complex and rafting adventures
Photo credit: Visit OKC

1. Riversport OKC

Oklahoma City, Oklahoma

Riversport OKC is a man-made whitewater rafting course in the middle of downtown Oklahoma City. The rapids here are between Class II and IV, and it’s a great place to learn the basics.

Riders will need to purchase tickets to the Riversport complex, but a ticket entitles you to two loops through the course in two separate time slots (four times in total). Each loop takes less than 10 minutes. Instructors will go through the rules and ensure your PFD (personal flotation device) fits correctly before setting off.

Pro Tip: This course is quick, but fun and you’re sure to get soaked. Be sure to bring a change of clothes and a towel. There are lockers available for storing your gear.

Reflection in Colorado River of Butte catching days last rays, in Grand Canyon.
The ride starts out with quite a few rapids and all hands on deck but dissolves into a relaxing river float for the majority of the trip.
Photo credit: LHBLLC / Shutterstock.com

2. Colorado River Through Glenwood Canyon

Vail, Colorado

Vail, Colorado, is one of my favorite places to visit in the summer because it has endless opportunities for outdoor adventures. That includes the nearby Shoshone Rapids on the Colorado River. This is the headwaters of the river that ends in the Grand Canyon, but don’t let that stop you, this ride is all about fun.

Here you will find Class II and III rapids that flow through Glenwood Canyon. The ride starts out with quite a few rapids and all hands on deck but dissolves into a relaxing river float for the majority of the trip. This is a great starting point for first-timers or those traveling with children.

Pro Tip: This half-day adventure can be booked through several different companies in Vail or Beaver Creek. Book in advance to ensure there is space available because it tends to be very busy in the summer.

whitewater rafting from Lake Tahoe along the Truckee River
I promise you’ll love it! (That’s me screaming).
Photo credit: Tahoe Whitewater Tours

3. Truckee River

Lake Tahoe, California

The Truckee River runs from Lake Tahoe in California through Reno and onto Pyramid Lake in Nevada. Like many other mountain rivers, the flow depends on the previous winter’s snowfall. The water can be quite frigid in the summer, but it’s also refreshing.

Guided raft tours on the Truckee River cover about 7 miles and feature Class II and III rapids. Along the way, you’ll see mountainous terrain, abandoned railroads (including part of the original Continental Railroad), and possibly wildlife. This rafting adventure is another good option for beginners, and there are several stops along the way where you can hop off the raft and take a quick swim.

Pro Tip: Bring sunscreen to re-apply during this rafting trip. It lasts several hours and most of it is without shade.

Rafting on the numbers section of the Arkansas River
Rafting the Arkansas River
Photo credit: Travis J. Camp / Shutterstock.com

4. Arkansas River Through Browns Canyon

Buena Vista, Colorado

The Arkansas River flows through Browns Canyon in central Colorado and provides a variety of experiences depending on the river’s water levels. Most tour operators are based out of nearby Buena Vista, Colorado, and before heading out, the company will tell you what to expect.

In this area, the Arkansas River has Class III and IV rapids. This means the current can be swift moving and sometimes difficult to navigate. It’s not impossible for beginners, but most will find it challenging. 

The scenery along this river includes steep canyon walls and stacked boulders. There are parts of the river where you can take a quick dip and other sections where you need to be vigilant as you ride the waves. This is one thrilling experience you won’t soon forget!

Pro Tip: Those heading out late in the season (August), might encounter some shallow areas that require exiting the raft and carrying it a bit. It’s not as difficult as it sounds, but it is good to be prepared.

Whitewater rafts ready for a trip down the New River Gorge
Whitewater rafts ready for a trip down the New River Gorge
Photo credit: Malachi Jacobs / Shutterstock.com

5. New River Gorge

West Virginia 

Quite possibly the ultimate whitewater rafting adventure in the U.S. is found in West Virginia. New River Gorge is one of the newest national parks in the U.S., but whitewater enthusiasts have known about this place for years.

There are two main rivers for rafting: the New River and the Gauley River. The New River is divided into the upper and lower sections, with the upper featuring Class I to III rapids and the lower featuring Class IV rapids and above when the water is really flowing.

Navigating the Gauley should really be left to the experts as it features Class V rapids and more than 25 chutes to navigate. The Gauley River is the one place almost every river guide wants to attempt. Yes, guides can be crazy.

We opted for the Lower New River experience through Adventures on the Gorge because it has a good mix of action and relaxation. The raft drifted at times and we could admire the picturesque scenery, but there were other times we had to work hard and focus on the task at hand (not flipping the raft). 

Pro Tip: For those newer to whitewater rafting, definitely start with the Upper New River. You will still have all the fun of rapids (Classes I to III) and stunning landscapes everywhere you look.

Whitewater rafting isn’t for everyone, but if you are a thrill-seeker and love a good jolt of adrenaline, this might be the answer. The first time I tried it, I was scared out of my mind, but now I look forward to the sense of accomplishment I feel once I’ve navigated each new course.

For more on our writers’ incredible adventures, check out these stories:

]]>
6 Things That Surprised Me About My 7-Day Rafting Trip Through The Grand Canyon https://www.travelawaits.com/2751917/things-that-surprised-me-grand-canyon-rafting/ Sun, 01 May 2022 17:09:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2751917 Rafting The Colorado River

I opened my groggy eyes and squinted at three layers — cloth, water, rock — and tried to remember where I was. When my eyes focused, I recognized the end of my blue sleeping bag and beyond that, the rugged waters of the Colorado River and an immense rock wall that towered above me. Oh yes, my “bedroom” was the floor of the Grand Canyon. 

A lot happened before I opened my eyes to that view. For years, my husband, Dean, had wanted to take a multi-day rafting trip on the Colorado River through the Grand Canyon (who knew you could do such a thing?). When he suggested it, I had questions: Rafting? For multiple days? Sleeping in the canyon? Sure, the stars would be incredible, but what about bodily functions? Will my arms fall off from all the rowing? How wild are those rapids?

He called a former coworker who had taken this trip several times. She recommended using Hatch River Expeditions as our outfitter, and we took her recommendation. Before I knew it, we were signed up, peering over packing lists, and I was somewhere on the spectrum between excited and scared.

Hatch runs trips April to September in various configurations. We chose a full week of rafting from Lees Ferry to Whitmore Wash (188 miles) on motorized rafts. Hatch’s website promised “intense rapids, great hiking, ancient ruins, caves, waterfalls, and unforgettable swimming spots.” We’d camp in the canyon on sandy beaches or rocky ledges for six nights and be transported out by helicopter at the end.

Pro Tip: Check the Risks and Requirements to be sure you meet minimums, including the physical ability to climb on and off the raft, walk on rocky terrain and sandy inclines, carry your personal gear (25 pounds max) to and from camp, and tolerate repeated exposure to temperature extremes. You don’t need previous whitewater experience or swimming ability. 

Departing the rocky ledge campsite.
Departing The Rocky Ledge Campsite (Photo Credit: Joan Sherman)

Getting Underway

On our June 1 departure, we joined 24 co-adventurers to meet three guides and embark on two rafts (capacity is 16). Before I set foot on the raft, there were things I expected, and over the course of the trip, they proved true:

  • It’s breathtakingly beautiful. There’s nothing like waking up in a sleeping bag (on a cot) on the floor of the Grand Canyon, under a canopy of stars.
  • The guides knew what they were doing. I expected them to respect the canyon and its mighty waters, to keep us safe, to excel at history, geology, and folklore, and to take care of the odd request, and they did.
  • The rafts are a marvel of engineering; the process is solid. We carried everything we needed for the entire week either in the underbelly of the raft or piled high in the center, covered by tarps. Seeing firsthand the logistics for gear storage, day and night bags, handwashing, dishes — and even backup plans for motor failure — was impressive.
  • Many hands make light work. The guides positioned everything, but rafters formed an assembly line to get luggage, gear, cooking equipment, and food on and off the rafts efficiently.
  • It’s a simpler life. No hotels, no showers, no bathrooms. Unplugged. Unscreened. Unparalleled.

Of course, the trip also had a few surprises…

Settling in at camp.
Settling In At Camp (Photo Credit: Joan Sherman)

Surprise #1: The People Who Take This Kind Of Trip Are Varied… And Fascinating

People are always more than what they do, but our trip included every occupation from schoolteachers and a professional chef (could come in handy) to an ER nurse and a risk manager (ditto). We were from eight states (including Alaska) and ranged in age from 11 to 70-something.

I loved all the informal conversations on the rafts during calm waters and when circling camp chairs for happy hour and meals. It’s a unique environment: Makeup and pretenses are off, and people are just people, with all their marvelous quirks, habits, and ideas.

Surprise #2: The People Who Guide This Kind Of Trip Are Varied… And Fascinating

As you’d expect, the river guides are full of personality. Our lead guide was 34 and has been running trips since he was 18. The “swamper” (a guide in training) was 30. He rode on the lead raft and was a “jack of all trades.” The guide who piloted the second raft was 36. His raft carried a unique passenger: a large blow-up toucan who joined us for numerous antics along the way.

One night at camp, before our nightly briefing on the events of the next day, one of the guides asked if we’d like to hear some poetry. I must admit I was expecting something frivolous or elementary, but he read Robert Service’s “The Joy of Being Poor” with passion and heart. He treated us to several other poems along the trip, too. My husband rolled his eyes, but I was delighted.

Mirror canyon reflection.
Mirror Canyon Reflection (Photo Credit: Joan Sherman)

Surprise #3: New Views Around Every Bend

“Seen one, seen ’em all” does not apply in the Grand Canyon. The color, texture, pattern, light, striation, water, and rock variety of the canyon make it a continual wonder, and we had time to really see it. Calm sections of the river brought perfect mirror images of the canyon to the waters. The luxurious turquoise color of the Little Colorado and roaring Havasu Falls were a clear contrast to the rest of the Colorado River. Cavern exploration, wading and swimming, and guided hiking added variety, too.

BYO Dagwood Sandwiches
BYO Dagwood Sandwiches (Photo Credit: Joan Sherman)

Surprise #4: Good Food… And Plenty Of It

River guides wear many hats, and meal prep is one of them. Coffee’s on by 5 a.m. (when rafting, you “run with the sun” and make the most of daylight). Breakfast could be made-to-order eggs, breakfast meat, cereal, fruit. For lunch: build-your-own “Dagwood” sandwiches, simple sides, chips. Dinner began with appetizers and advanced to grilled steak, salmon, chicken, carnitas, pasta, salads, baked potatoes, and more. Dutch oven dessert might be brownies, cheesecake, or pound cake. Filtered water and lemonade or Gatorade (for electrolytes) were always available both on the raft and at camp. Snacks included cookies, nuts, chips, fruit. The guides kept an eye on our food consumption, too; river runners need to keep calories up.

Rough rapids in the canyon.
Rapids (Photo Credit: Joan Sherman)

Surprise #5: It Was Easier — And Harder — Than I Expected

These are relative terms, but parts of the trip were easy:

  • The raft is motorized, so passengers just “sit down and hold on.”
  • Gear is provided, packing lists are thorough, and meals are prepared for you.
  • Mesh bags tied to the rafts held our pre-ordered beer and wine, chilled at perfect river temp, which tastes exceedingly good after rafting. Hard to claim you’re roughing it as you’re sipping a cold beer in camp!

Some things that were not so easy:

  • The temp extremes are challenging. In June, the Colorado River at a chilly 40 degrees Fahrenheit contrasted dramatically with Phantom Ranch hiking at a sweltering 120 degrees. My advice? Follow the packing list and listen to the guides. When they tell you to get in the river before a hike and dunk your shirt and put it on wet, believe them.
  • TMI, but relieving yourself ain’t fun. All liquids go into the river. More complicated: Solids go into a portable seat/box thing (technical term) but fear not — the system for privacy and sanitation during such events is simple and somewhat ingenious. 
  • You WILL get wet; you WILL get sandy, and the sand will be everywhere. ’Nuf said.

Pro Tip: There’s no constantly dry spot on the raft. If you’re adventurous, sit in “the bathtub” in the front of the raft. It takes the full brunt of whatever the rapids want to dish out. At the back of the raft, “the tea room” is a less splashy option.

Lesser rapids at the canyon.
Joan Sherman

Surprise #6: I Laughed — Hard

We rafted through 120+ rapids on our route, including mild-mannered rapids with fun names like Soap, Badger Creek, House Rock, and even The Roaring Twenties. Larger rapids were more “rowdy” (as the guides liked to say): Horn, Granite, Hermit, and Crystal.

Remember when you were a kid and you heard big belly laughs that were contagious? The rapids are unpredictable — some looked ferocious, and they were. Sometimes, an upcoming rapid that looked innocent could pack a powerful deluge. And sometimes, even in calm water, a rogue wave would hit the raft and catch an unsuspecting victim (often me) off guard. That big belly laugh? It was mine.

Pro Tip: Hatch’s website is quick to point out that “a Colorado River trip is an active vacation in a wilderness environment.” If you aren’t up for a physical challenge, this probably isn’t the right trip for you. If you are, this is one you will never forget.

I’ve been to both rims of the Grand Canyon and experienced trails by foot and by mule. Yet this unique, prolonged vantage point from a raft surprised me. The nuances of color, the variety of pattern, texture. The sounds. The good people we traveled with who made us laugh. A myriad of stars at night. The subtle way the morning light crept into the canyon. It’s full of wonder and surprises. There’s a reason this canyon is called grand.

For more information and tips, check out all our Grand Canyon coverage, including 10 Key Ranger Tips For Visiting The Grand Canyon and 7 Amazing Canyons To Explore In Arizona After You’ve Seen The Grand Canyon.

]]>
What I Wish I Knew Before Climbing A 650-Foot-Tall Rock In Colombia https://www.travelawaits.com/2750918/things-to-know-before-climbing-la-piedra-in-guatape-colombia/ Wed, 27 Apr 2022 13:09:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2750918 Top of La Piedra

In North America, the term “the rock” is likely to make you think of Alcatraz, the abandoned federal penitentiary on an island off the coast of San Francisco. And when hearing “top of the rock,” Americans and Canadians might think of the observatory in Rockefeller Center that offers panoramic views of the Big Apple. But in South America, in the beautiful Andean town of Guatapé, “the rock” is a much different experience, albeit one that still delivers stunning 360-degree views.

Pro Tip: Located about halfway between the towns of El Peñol and Guatapé, the rock can be associated with either destination. So while you may hear it referred to by many names — La Piedra Del Peñol (the stone of El Peñol), El Peñón de Guatapé (the Rock of Guatapé), or simply La Piedra (the stone) or El Peñón (the rock) — all refer to the same massive granite formation. So don’t let that confuse you!

At bottom of La Piedra.
Sage Scott

Where Is Guatapé?

Guatapé is located about 50 miles east of Medellin. But don’t apply an American interstate highway mentality to that 50-mile journey. Instead of speeding between the two destinations at 75 miles per hour on a freeway, you’ll wind your way along narrow bamboo- and palm tree-lined mountain roads. So be sure to allow about two hours of travel time each way.

I was fortunate to visit La Piedra with Colombian friends who drove us to Guatapé in their car. But you can also reach Guatapé from Medellin by bus, as part of an organized tour, or by hiring a taxi or private driver.

Pro Tip: Many people who remember the violence that racked Colombia during drug lord Pablo Escobar’s time or who see Colombia tagged with a Level 3 advisory by the State Department wonder, “Is Guatapé safe?” While each traveler has their own comfort level, I can tell you that I never felt unsafe during my time in Colombia, especially not in the town of Guatapé.

Zocalos at the base of La Piedra.
Sage Scott

What Is The Rock Of Guatapé?

El Peñón Guatapé is a massive quartz, feldspar, and granite dome that rises 650 feet above the surrounding rolling green hills. That’s 20 feet taller than the Gateway Arch in St. Louis and nearly 100 feet taller than the Washington Monument in D.C. 

El Peñón is mostly smooth, except for one long crack down its northwestern side. When Luis Eduardo Villegas Lopez successfully scaled the Rock of Guatapé for the first time in 1954, the climbing party ascended the dome by jamming wooden boards into the crack. You’ll find both a statue and mural celebrating Lopez’s accomplishment at the base of the Guatapé Rock.

As if a giant surgeon attempted to stitch up the crack, today you’ll find a staircase built into the crevice. Blending a natural wonder with human intervention, it allows visitors to easily zigzag their way to the top of the rock.

Fun Fact: While the Rock of Guatapé is a natural formation, the nearby lake is manmade. To create a gigantic reservoir in the 1970s, the Colombia town of El Peñol was relocated so the Guatapé River could be dammed, and the valley it was in flooded. Today the reservoir provides electricity to more than 35 percent of Colombia. 

Author eating a pancake at the top of the rock.
Food Vendors At The Top (Photo Credit: Sage Scott)

Tips For Climbing The Rock Of Guatapé

  • Buy a ticket. While the climb isn’t free, it’s not very expensive. When I visited in November 2021, it was 20,000 Colombian pesos, or about $5.
  • Go early. Not only will you beat the crowds, but you’ll also beat the heat. And by getting a jump on the day, you’ll have plenty of time to explore more of Guatapé. 
  • Be sun smart. UV intensity increases about 4 percent for every 1,000 feet you rise above sea level — and Guatapé has an altitude of 6,200 feet! So regardless of the clouds in the sky or the amount of melanin in your skin, protect yourself. Be sure to apply sunscreen and wear a hat and sunglasses. 
  • Prepare to climb. To get to the top of the rock, you’ll have to ascend 650 stairs. And then you’ll have to climb three more flights to get to the three-story viewing platform. Let me be clear: There is no elevator! And because the path up and down is one way, you can’t really turn around if you change your mind. At least numbers painted on the stone steps keep you posted on your progress, and encouraging phrases will cheer you on.
  • It’s okay to take your time. Although it took Luis Eduardo Villegas Lopez five days to climb El Peñón de Guatapé, it will only take you between 10 (if you’re part billy goat) to 30 (if you want to go slowly and admire the view) minutes. While there aren’t places to sit and rest along the climb, there are several scenic spots to stop, catch your breath, and admire your progress.
  • Linger at the top. On the flat top of the rock, you’ll find food vendors, a small gift shop, and views that will take your breath away (and not just because of the altitude)!
  • Wear smart shoes. You’re going to be climbing the equivalent of about 45 flights of stairs. And then back down. This is not an activity to do in flip-flops or high heels. 
  • OMG — the view! No matter how much your lungs burn at the top or your legs wobble as you make your way down, the view from La Piedra makes any pain worth it! To the north, you’ll see the clear water of the reservoir reflecting the sky and perpetually green landscape, and to the east, you’ll get a glimpse of the town of Guatapé. No wonder climbing La Piedra is often cited as one of the best things to do in Colombia!
  • Tag along even if you won’t make the climb. Members of your group who aren’t interested in ascending La Piedra can browse the kiosks or enjoy a bite or beverage at the base of the rock. Just note that there is a small fee (the equivalent of a few dollars) to enter the covered area overlooking the reservoir. While the panoramic view 650 feet higher up is certainly stunning, the view from this spot is still quite impressive.

Once you’ve climbed the El Peñón, head to the town of Guatapé. To fully experience one of the most colorful cities in the Americas, I recommend taking a boat ride on the reservoir (where you can see the burned-out ruins of one of Pablo Escobar’s mansions), enjoying lunch at a local eatery (be sure to try the trout), and admiring the zocalos (whimsical frescoes decorating nearly every home and business in Guatapé).

Want to climb La Piedra? Check out a variety of tour options here.

]]>
6 Extreme Travel Experiences I’ve Tried And Lived To Tell The Tale https://www.travelawaits.com/2748855/extreme-travel-experiences-ive-tried-and-lived-to-tell-the-tale/ Sat, 16 Apr 2022 16:09:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2748855 Everest base camp.

Are you looking for something a little “more” from your holiday? Ready to test your limits by embarking on a trip that’s guaranteed to put you outside your comfort zone? Keen to try something a little extreme? These days more and more people are heading to some of the farthest-flung corners of the earth in search of something new and adventurous. Let me give you a few tips and suggestions, a few ideas to help you plan the ultimate destination for an intrepid traveler.

These trips are a mix of epic hikes, extreme sports, and creative ways to see some of the planet’s most beautiful landscapes. These six activities are guaranteed to thrill — and quite possibly change your entire outlook on life!

Yellow tent at Everest base Camp in Nepal 2016.
Sonthaya / Shutterstock.com

1. Trekking To Everest Base Camp At The China-Nepal Border

At 28,996 feet above sea level, Everest is the highest mountain on earth and is known the world over to climbers, hikers, and couch potatoes alike. Altitudes above 26,000 feet are considered “death zones” because humans struggle to survive there. This is definitely one place that is best left to the truly experienced. You ideally need to have climbed at least three 20,000-foot peaks, one 23,000-foot peak, and one 26,000-foot peak before you consider Everest. But if you are one of the lucky few who have the experience, time, and money needed to reach the summit, then definitely go for it! 

Fortunately, for those who wouldn’t class themselves as mountaineers, Everest Base Camp is still an option — and without the many dangers involved in attempting to reach the top. Most treks from Kathmandu take around two weeks, and this epic journey will provide you with plenty of adventure, and at the end of it all, gazing up at the highest point on earth will be the reward for all your hard work.

While teahouse hospitality and magnificent views en route are to be expected on an Everest Base Camp trip, most treks are not actually allowed to stay at base camp (it requires special permission) and most trekkers simply visit base camp for a photo opportunity before descending to nearby Gorak Shep to sleep. There are a few companies, however, like Highland Expeditions, who do offer the unique opportunity to sleep in the shadow of the mighty mountain, and if your trip coincides with peak summit season, when groups of climbers are in residence, you may have the opportunity to chat with some of those brave climbers who are making their final preparations to head to the top. If you are lucky you may even witness teams setting off up the notorious Khumbu Ice Fall at the start of their push for the top.

Pro Tip: Summiteers usually arrive at Base Camp in April and May, so plan your trip accordingly. Keep yourself healthy, too. To avoid potentially infecting the climbers, trekkers with illnesses will not be allowed to stay at Base Camp.

Snow-capped Chimborazo volcano in the Andes of Ecuador with a blue sky surrounded by clouds.
Fabian Ponce Garcia / Shutterstock.com

2. Climbing Mount Chimborazo In Ecuador

Sticking with the mountain theme, standing at 20,565 feet, Mount Chimborazo is the farthest point from the Earth’s center. Most people believe Mount Everest is the highest point on Earth, and while the summit of Mount Everest is the highest point above sea level, Mount Chimborazo is actually the highest spot above the center of the Earth, making it the closest place to outer space. Although Chimborazo has glaciers on its peak, it is possible to climb to the top and gaze on down at the world spread out below.

Mount Chimborazo is a difficult but not technical climb, and most of the ascent is a steep trek up the side of the mountain. There are several routes for brave climbers. The El Castillo route is the standard route used by climbers, ascending 4,200 feet up the west side of the mountain and taking 8-12 hours to the summit, then another 3 to 5 hours to descend. All this effort does require good stamina and endurance, though, as well as good adaptation to altitude. Climbers taking on Chimborazo are advised to have previous experience with alpine climbing. If you don’t, beginners can take an alpine climbing and glacier trekking course with their guiding company to learn proper climbing techniques and gain familiarity with the gear. It’s important to take your training and preparations seriously. The success rate of Chimborazo depends almost entirely on the climber. Those looking to climb Chimborazo might like to check out Ecuador Eco Adventures.

Pro Tip: For those wanting to witness this natural wonder without leaving civilization, gazing at the beauty of this magnificent mountain and the surrounding scenery can be just as rewarding. The nearest town to Mount Chimborazo is Riobamba. Here you can zip through narrow streets, visiting the city’s top attractions like the Museo de Arte Religioso, a beautifully restored 18th-century convent that showcases 200 religious pieces in 15 different rooms, before shopping at Feria Artisan market. If you are looking for somewhere to stay, try the highly acclaimed Hosteria La Andaluza.

Bike tourists  ride on the "road of death"  downhill track  in Bolivia.
mezzotint / Shutterstock.com

3. Biking Down The Death Road In Bolivia

Have you heard of The Death Road? With no guard rails and frequent rain and fog causing limited visibility, the road has claimed numerous lives. Reports say that around 200 to 300 people die on this road every year (this number is a combination of motorists and cyclists), and because of this, the road is known as one of the world’s most deadly. This infamous narrow dirt road is cut into the side of the mountain and the descent is at such a rapid rate that riders are practically hurtling down the rough terrain. On one side of the road is a sheer drop, and on the other side are enormous rock overhangs and cascading waterfalls. It’s a thrilling ride that will have you hanging on, with white knuckles, all the way down.

While this harrowing stretch of road in Bolivia is undeniably dangerous, numerous people do summon up the courage to cycle it, and for those looking for an ultimate adventure, this definitely fits the bill. Not for the fainthearted, the 43-mile-long stretch through the Cordillera Oriental mountain chain links the Bolivian capital of La Paz with the low-lying city of Coroico via one seriously steep road. The road twists and turns, and I wouldn’t recommend looking off to the sides — it’s a 2,000-foot drop!

Most of the road is around 11 feet wide and some sections are unpaved. With warm, humid winds from the Amazon hitting the slopes of the Andes and bringing heavy rain and fog, visibility isn’t great. Mudslides and rockfalls are common, and sometimes you’ll even find waterfalls in the cliffsides. The stretch of road takes about 5 hours to complete, so it’s not a quick trip by any means, and it’s likely you’ll never let off the brakes because it’s entirely downhill and steep. At some points, the road is so narrow it feels like only one bike can pass at a time and it barely seems possible that a car or bus would ever consider driving this route. All along the road are crosses in remembrance of lives lost, and in the misty surrounding, it all feels unbelievably eerie.

Pro Tip: Madre Tierra Travel offers Death Road cycling tours as day trips departing from La Paz.

photo of traveler, White Water Rafting in Victoria falls.
cordelia bua / Shutterstock.com

4. Whitewater Rafting The Zambezi River In Zambia

Whitewater rafting through the powerful rapids of the Zambezi River is definitely not for the fainthearted. Considered to be one of the best rafting experiences in the world, this Grade 5 “extremely difficult” water run will have your palms sweating, your knuckles white, and your heart pounding. There are many places in the world where you can white water raft, so why the Zambezi? Sad to say, the Zambian and Zimbabwean governments currently plan to move ahead with a $4 billion hydroelectric dam project that will flood the river gorge almost back as far as the famous Victoria Falls, displacing villagers and wildlife and putting a stop to rafting. So run this great river while you can!

Whether you choose a day or half-day trip from Livingstone, or maybe a multi-day, beach-camping expedition, this adventure is really up there with the world’s greatest river journeys and extreme travel experiences. You’ll tackle hair-raising rapids with names like Oblivion and The Devil’s Toilet Bowl, there’s a chance you’ll spot hippos lazing in the channels or even crocodiles lying on the river bank. Rafting the Zambezi is something I just keep coming back to do over and over again. I’ve been down this river more times than I can count, and I’ve loved it every single time.

Pro Tip: Book your trip on the Zambezi for some time between August and December; that’s low water season and the best time for rafting.

Bungy jump in Kawarau Bridge Queenstown New Zealand.
i viewfinder / Shutterstock.com

5. Bungee Jumping In New Zealand

New Zealand practically invented bungee jumping when the Kawarau Bridge Bungy, the world’s first bungee, opened in 1988. Here you can join around 38,000 annual visitors and make the 141-foot jump from the South Island’s historic, steel-framed Kawarau Bridge (you can even touch the water if that’s your thing!). Alternatively, if you are feeling really brave, how about the Nevis Bungy, which at a whopping 440 feet is the highest in the southern hemisphere, and has 8.5 seconds of terrifying free-fall? Quite possibly the longest 8.5 seconds of your life! Not only is bungy jumping a fantastic thrill in itself, but both jumps are located in truly gorgeous surroundings, not far from Queenstown.

Pro Tip: Check out AJ Hackett Bungy New Zealand to plan your adventure, and if throwing yourself off with a cord tied ’round your ankles seems a little too extreme, perhaps the slightly more sedate zip line, or maybe “the catapult,” might be more your thing. 

Great white shark cage diving, South Africa.
Mogens Trolle / Shutterstock.com

6. Swim With The Sharks In Gansbaai, South Africa

I don’t know about you, but the movie Jaws had me petrified of sharks as a kid. If you are the same, then the waters around South Africa’s Gansbaai are bound to bring those memories flooding back. Gansbaai has some of the most treacherous waters on Earth — this is prime great white shark territory. “Shark Alley,” a small channel of water between Dyer Island and Geyser Rock, is home to the densest concentration of these creatures, and it’s become a popular destination for tourists who want to get up close and personal with these deadly creatures by jumping on board a shark cage diving tour. Imagine being underwater in a cage and watching these terrifying beasts circling around you, so close that you can count their razor-sharp teeth! If this sounds a little overwhelming, you can go whale watching instead, or perhaps on a cruise to see penguins, seals, or dolphins.

Pro Tip: Marine Dynamics would be my recommendation for the company to do a shark diving trip with. They have the only purpose-designed boat for shark cage diving, are the only company that guarantees a marine biologist on every trip, and are the only company that has a registered conservation trust. They also take your safety really seriously, which seems a pretty important criterion to me! So there you have my round-up of extreme travel experiences that I’ve tried and lived to tell the tale!

Hopefully I’ve got you excited enough to head out on some of your own adventures. For more inspiration, see all our Adventure Travel content here!

]]>
7 Places Where You Can Drive A Tank https://www.travelawaits.com/2690315/places-where-you-can-drive-a-tank/ Wed, 08 Dec 2021 20:12:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2690315 Tank driving through dirt.

Walking on the beach, strolling through art galleries, careening a tank through an obstacle course… Wait. What!? You heard right. Driving a tank — we’re talking a military-grade vehicle here — is fast becoming a popular travel activity, attracting all kinds of travelers. It doesn’t take any special skill to drive a tank, and it provides the adrenaline rush you’d expect from extreme sports but without the scary heights and physical challenge. Plus, you get to smash, crash, and bash. Who doesn’t like the chance to blow off a bit of steam?

While many tank driving companies are based in the United States, few have American-made tanks among their recreational arsenal. The Department of Defense’s policy requires old combat vehicles to be destroyed. As such, the majority of companies offer experience with foreign equipment.

It’s also worth noting that not all “tanks” are actually tanks. For instance, they may be armored personnel carriers — which certainly act like tanks in the eyes of most civilians but might not make the cut with military veterans looking to relive their service experience. Thankfully, all tank driving companies are eager to share the history of their vehicles so you’ll know exactly what you’re going to get.

It’s worth noting that tank driving experiences universally involve mud and the supremely awkward exercise of trying to climb in and out of a tank. In other words, wear sturdy shoes and old clothing that allows you to move with ease! And bring your wallet. Experiences usually start at a few hundred dollars and can easily go up to a few thousand. Other than that, you’re ready to hop aboard!

1. Ox Hunting Ranch, Uvalde, Texas

Ox Ranch’s claim to fame is that they’re the only place in the world where you can drive and shoot real tanks (most retired tanks have had their cannons altered so they don’t fire), along with the chance to shoot artillery and machine guns. Visitors can also engage in trophy hunting, yoga, stargazing, hiking, bass fishing, skeet shooting, and more.

Centurion tank firing, Drive A Tank, Kasota, Minnesota.
The Centurion, a British-designed tank, firing at Drive A Tank (Photo Credit: Drive A Tank)

2. Drive A Tank, Kasota, Minnesota

One of the original players in the recreational tank driving industry Drive A Tank offers an exhaustive list of packages and options, ranging from short drives to epic home demolition packages. Yep, you can drive a tank through a house or use it to crush a car (or several!) Adventures here include an opportunity to drive a rare Sherman 8 (just like Brad Pitt in Fury!).

3. Battlefield Vegas, Las Vegas, Nevada

This well-known purveyor of Las Vegas’s ultimate shooting range (think machine guns and grenade launchers) also offers a tank experience. This being Vegas, lush forests are in short supply, so instead of woodland rides, you drive your tank on a course that includes obstacles like other vehicles and dealing with pits and mounds. Participants are picked up and dropped off from their hotels in a military Humvee. Sadly, there’s no tank-based wedding service offered – a lost opportunity if you ask me.

4. Tank Town USA, Morganton, Georgia 

If you’re mildly curious about driving a tank, Tank Town USA might be the best place to try it out for the first time. Tank Town’s packages start with 10-minute experiences, which probably goes much faster than you expect but it’s an easy, affordable way to try things out. You can also bring along two additional passengers at no cost, which is especially nice for families and couples. 

5. Russia EGuide (Outside Moscow)

You didn’t think it was just American companies that offered tank driving experiences, did you? This Russian tour organizer offers a six-hour package that includes a visit to military grounds, a ride in a tank over a trench, an obstacle course, an off-road route, and even a Russian military-style lunch. 

6. The Irish Military War Museum, Starinagh, Ireland

Every tank driving company offers its own vibe, from gung-ho testosterone-heavy mayhem to adrenaline-fueled group adventures. The Irish Military War Museum will appeal to both history buffs and families. In addition to having one of the most hands-on military museums in the world, they offer both tank driving experience and tank riding ones as well. The latter, which can accommodate up to 10 people for roughly $87, is a bargain.

7. Armourgeddon, Bosworth, England

All the tank driving experiences at Armourgeddon take place on a WWII-era bombing range and includes free entry to the company’s large onsite museum, making this the ideal experience for military history fanatics. They’re also the only company in the world that offers a hybrid tank driving paintball battle.

Bonus! Ontario Regiment RCAC Museum, Oshawa, Canada

There’s no tank driving at the RCAC Museum, but you can enjoy a ride in a military battle tank or military vehicle with museum staff in the driver’s seat. It’s the only place in Canada to offer this experience. Costs start at about $50, making this one of the most affordable tank experiences in the world.

On the hunt for unique travel experiences? Check out:

]]>
9 Places To Hot Air Balloon In The U.S. https://www.travelawaits.com/2411761/5-places-to-hot-air-balloon-in-the-us/ Wed, 08 Sep 2021 22:17:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2411761/5-places-to-hot-air-balloon-in-the-us/ Hot air balloon, Letchworth State Park, New York.

The U.S. is home to some of the most picturesque hot air ballooning locations in the world. From the rolling Rockies to the glowing sandstones of Red Rocks, come out and watch these gentle giants take flight in breathtaking settings.

The U.S. hosts hot air balloon festivals and private flights from coast to coast. No matter where you live, there’s a good chance that there’s a hot air balloon festival near you. 

Here are nine places to hot air balloon in the United States.

1. Letchworth State Park, New York

Letchworth State Park is thought to have some of the most beautiful scenery in the country. What better way to take it all in than from the nest of a colorful balloon as the Genesee River rumbles through the park’s gorge below? Ballooning at Letchwork State Park can be as thrilling as it is tranquil. Ride with Balloons Over Letchworth, and your seasoned captain will guide you gracefully over the park’s three major waterfalls.

When you’re done with your ride, Letchworth State Park is a playground of outdoor activities. You’ll have a hard time choosing between guided nature walks, camping in the forest, or going horseback riding. With beauty galore, it’s no wonder many consider Letchworth State Park to be the most romantic ballooning location in the country.

Fair Winds Hot Air Balloon Flights (Photo Credit: Lori Lauck)

​​2. The Rocky Mountains, Colorado

The air is clear and bright high above the Rocky Mountains outside of Denver, Colorado. The area’s high elevation — the highest of any major U.S. city — lends itself to ideal hot air balloon weather. May through November is the best time to go if you’d like to take to the skies. The Colorado landscape is especially breathtaking in the fall when the leaves are changing. That’s when you want to hop in a balloon and soar high above Rocky Mountain National Park. You’ll have a view of alpine lakes, mountains, and forests. If you get bored of the rugged mountain terrain, simply direct your gaze east over to the High Plains.

Fair Wind Hot Air Balloon Flights is one of several hot air balloon companies in the Denver area. It’s located in the town of Lafayette, just north of Denver proper. Plan your flight to coincide with one of the city’s annual festivals, like the Dragon Boat Festival, the Chinese Mid-Autumn Festival, and the Great American Beer Festival (returning in 2022) in September.

Hot air balloons over Napa Valley, California.
cheng cheng / Shutterstock.com

3. Napa Valley, California

Napa Valley offers gorgeous scenery of its own — not to mention abundant wine. The best time to visit is March through May, when harvest season is in full swing, but expect to pay higher prices for lodging.  

Plenty of operators offer hot air ballooning in Napa Valley, so you’ll have a choice of experiences. Yes, you came for the wine and the food, but experiencing the rolling beauty of California’s wine country by air will leave you with memories that will last forever.

Gliding above the rolling hills of Napa Valley can be a refreshing way to start your day, as hot air balloon flights in the Napa valley launch in the morning, when the winds are calmest. Ballooning is a weather-dependent activity, but if the cards are in your favor, you’ll at least be treated to a serene sunrise.

Hot air balloons over Red Rocks in Sedona, Arizona.
Jon Manjeot / Shutterstock.com

4. Red Rocks, Sedona, Arizona

Sedona has plenty to offer to nature lovers. The scenery is some of the most unique in the country. Sedona sits at the mouth of Oak Creek Canyon and is in the most popular area of Red Rocks. The windswept canyons are shaped in deep red sandstone and shale. The way the light casts on the slivers of slender rock formations is a sight to behold, especially during sunrise and sunset.

The best hot air balloon flights at Red Rocks take place in the early morning, for sunrise. Morning is when the winds are mild and ideal for ballooning. Some Sedona hot air balloon companies offer rides at sunset as well. Allow three to four hours for the entire journey, and end your ride with a gourmet champagne brunch among the backdrop of the famous Sedona red rocks.

Hot air balloon over Lake Tahoe in California.
drewthehobbit / Shutterstock.com

5. Lake Tahoe, California

Lake Tahoe straddles the border of California and Nevada, and its cobalt blue waters attract approximately 3 million visitors a year. The surrounding peaks of the Sierra Nevada Mountain Range make Lake Tahoe a truly idyllic spot for a hot air balloon ride.

Lake Tahoe is home to one of the most unique hot air balloon experiences in the world. At the far southern tip of the lake, Lake Tahoe Balloons sends passengers up for the scenic tour of a lifetime. They’re the only company in the world that launches and lands from a boat! Lake Tahoe has a wide variety of restaurants, too, and tons of recreational opportunities when your air-bound adventure is complete. Wildflower season is in full swing come mid-July, and several trails wind through fields painted with purple yarrow, Columbian monkshood, horsemint, and orange agoseris. The Taylor Creek area of South Lake Tahoe is home to several hiking trails.

6. Nashville, Tennessee

Soar above the Appalachian Mountain range and Cumberland Plateau region of Tennessee with Middle Tennessee Hot Air Adventures in Nashville.

Middle Tennessee is one of the most verdant and outdoorsy states in the U.S., and Middle Tennessee alone has 10 state parks and eight national parks, scenic byways, and historic battlefields to explore.

After soaring above the mountains and waterfalls of the area, take a little time to explore Nashville and its music-saturated history. Nicknamed “Music City,” Nashville has plenty of adventure that centers around music, culture, arts, food, sports, and shopping. Fans of the TV show Nashville can visit the Bluebird Cafe, where up-and-coming and famous songwriters perform in an intimate setting. Families can explore the award-winning Nashville Zoo to watch the cloud leopards, giraffes, and spider monkeys.

Balloons over the Rio Grande by Albuquerque, New Mexico.
Balloons over the Rio Grande near Albuquerque, New Mexico (Photo Credit: gmeland / Shutterstock.com)

7. Albuquerque, New Mexico

Home to the largest hot air balloon festival in America, Albuquerque offers flights above the Rio Grande Valley. However, the biggest draw to ballooning in this state is the famous Alburquerque International Balloon Fiesta.

For nine days in October, the Albuquerque International Balloon Fiesta attracts thousands of hot air balloon enthusiasts to view hundreds of special-shaped balloon rodeos, twilight balloon glows, and blue skies filled with the vibrant colors of balloons.

If you miss the festival, don’t worry. Hot air balloon rides are offered through World Balloon, which hosts sunrise flights over the Sandia Mountains. After your flight, celebrate your experience with the traditional champagne toast, light snack, and a commemorative flight certificate.

While in Albuquerque, don’t miss out on another high-skies adventure. The Sandia Peak Aerial Tramway takes you up to the 10,378-foot peak of the Sandia Mountains on a gondola-style ride. It’s a beautiful way to catch those famously gorgeous New Mexico sunsets.

8. St. Augustine, Florida

People escape to the whimsy of Disney World in Orlando or to the cool waves of the Atlantic Ocean in St. Augustine, Florida, but a hot air balloon ride over both is an experience most tourists to Florida miss out on.

A Hot Air Balloon Ride in Jacksonville, St. Augustine, and Orlando offers hour-long flights that bring you over the orange groves, Disney World, and the Atlantic Ocean. The company can pick you up at your hotel in Orlando or can leave from a meeting stop in St. Augustine. While the flights are an hour, you should allow at least three to four hours to enjoy the experience, including helping the flight crew prepare the balloon.

While most people are familiar with the tourist mecca that is Disney World, St. Augustine is a charming Florida town that offers up its own brand of adventure, culture, and history. It’s the oldest city in America, founded in 1565.

After soaring above the city in a hot air balloon, take in the living history museums like the Castillo de San Marcos and Gilded-Age hotels, tours of the historic district, or a sampling of fine spirits at St. Augustine Distillery.

Hot air balloons over Austin, Texas.
Hot air balloons over Austin, Texas (Photo Credit: Joseph Sohm / Shutterstock.com)

9. Austin, Texas

For an adventure as big as Texas, the Austin Aeronauts offers soothing and awe-inspiring flights over the Texas Hill Country. Flights take you over Lake Travis and the local landscape, but this company offers specialized custom flights, adventure tours, and even wedding flights.

Once you have taken in the beauty of the Texas Hill Country by air, venture into the “Keep Austin Weird” vibe of one of Texas’s most popular towns. Satisfy your sweet tooth at Austin’s Museum of Ice Cream, roar with the lions at the Austin Zoo, or hike through a Texas Hill Country landscape of limestone cliffs and stone river beds at Pedernales Falls State Park

You don’t want to miss the beer scene here in Austin. Explore Austin’s Beer Trail and be sure to sample the legitimate Tex-Mex cuisine at places like Mi Madre’s or Trudy’s.

Ballooning Is Everywhere

No matter what state you find yourself in, the chance to explore the beauty of the United States by hot air balloon is there. From Oklahoma’s FireFlight Balloon Festival in Shawnee, Oklahoma to the Taste and Glow Balloon Festival in Wassau, Wisconsin, every state has a chance to fly high in an aerial adventure like none other.

Destinations mentioned in this article:

]]>
7 Thrilling Outdoor Adventures To Experience In Iowa https://www.travelawaits.com/2687056/iowa-outside-activities-things-to-do/ Wed, 11 Aug 2021 13:03:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2687056 Sara in an off-road vehicle in Fort Dodge, Iowa.

There are several thrilling outdoor adventures for all skill levels in several places in Iowa. My home state has rolling hills, bluffs, waterways, and thrilling outdoor adventures that you don’t want to miss. I hope you will plan a day of outdoor adventure in Iowa, as you will not be disappointed. I’ve included some tips with each of these activities to help you have a memorable day.

Please note that I was a guest on a press trip for some of these activities. All opinions are my own.

1. Mountain Biking: Fort Dodge 

The Lizard Creek Mountain Bike Park is a single-track trail in Fort Dodge, Iowa. The trail is approximately 10 miles long and is a great experience for all skill levels. I am not a professional mountain biker and I enjoyed riding this trail. As you pedal through the woods, you will wind around the trees and through the forest. Summertime brings an abundance of blooming flowers, as well as a beautiful river view. Beginners enjoy Lower Lizard, which is where I spent my time riding this trail. More experienced riders enjoy Upper Lizard and the Phinney Loop.

Bring your bike, hop on the mountain biking trail, and enjoy an epic time in Fort Dodge. Bring a snack and find a bench along the river to rest up before you return to the parking area. A bicycle helmet is recommended but not required. There are no fees to bike this trail.

Larkin Overlook in Yellow River State Forest.
Larkin Overlook in Yellow River State Forest (Photo Credit: Sara Broers)

2. Hiking: Allamakee County

Allamakee County offers some of the most incredible hiking trails that you will come across in the country. Lace up your hiking boots and hit the trails in the Yellow River State Forest. This state forest is vast, as it is made up of 8,900 acres, with more than 50 miles of hiking trails. You can hike and stay overnight if you want an extended adventure. The stars are visible as the black skies cover the trails. The views that you will find are incredible over the valley and bluffs that surround the area. Pack a pair of binoculars as your adventure continues with your eyes to the sky. Birding opportunities are around every corner as you hike through the forest. Be sure to carry plenty of water with you, as you will want to pack everything that you need. 

Winter brings a different way of using the hiking trails. Cross-country skiing and snowmobiling are popular in the Yellow River State Forest during the winter. Iowa has four distinct seasons, and this state forest is a fantastic way to experience them. Each season brings a new opportunity for outdoor adventure. Dress for the season, and you will have an incredible day exploring Allamakee County. There are no fees to enter this state forest.

3. Bike The High Trestle Trail: Polk County

Load up your bicycle and bike Iowa’s well-known biking trail. The High Trestle Trail connects five Iowa communities and four counties. This popular biking trail highlights the one-half mile, 13-story bridge that spans across the Des Moines River between Madrid and Woodward in Central Iowa. The trail is mostly flat and easy to ride. If you are a beginner biker or an experienced biker, you will enjoy riding this trail. The High Trestle Bridge is lit up at night and offers a unique view of the trail. For more of a thrill, ride further and challenge yourself with distance.

When my husband and I biked the trail, we hopped on the trail at Madrid. There’s a trailhead with restrooms, a large parking lot, and a restaurant nearby. It’s also a short ride to the bridge, which is the highlight of this trail. Leave from Madrid near sunset and enjoy the lights on the bridge — it’s an experience you won’t forget. Make sure you have lights on your bicycle, as it will be dark on your way back to the parking lot. 

Gypsum City Off-Highway Vehicle (OHV) Park
Sara Broers

4. Off-Highway Vehicle Park: Fort Dodge 

Fort Dodge, Iowa, is home to the Gypsum City Off-Highway Vehicle (OHV) Park. Riders come from all around the world to ride the miles of trails using ATVs, side-by-sides, and off-road motorcycles. There are 800 acres with 60 miles of trails. I have experienced this park riding a side-by-side, and it was a lot of fun. You’ll wind around the woods and climb a hill now and then. During the middle of summer, the wildflowers are in full bloom. If you like a thrill that you won’t find elsewhere, this is your park. If you are new to this trail, you will be glad to know that the signage is excellent throughout the park.

You will need to trailer your off-road vehicle to the trailhead, and your OHV must be registered in the state you call home. If you are a non-resident of Iowa, you need to display an IDNR Nonresident User Permit. You can purchase this at your county recorder’s office or any license agent selling hunting and fishing licenses. You will need to wear a helmet. I’d also suggest that you wear long pants and closed-in shoes. 

Clear Lake, Iowa.
Sara Broers / Shutterstock.com

5. Waterskiing: Clear Lake

Clear Lake, Iowa, is where memories are made on the lake all summer long. I grew up on this lake and learned to waterski on it when I was 10. Over the years, I have seen friends of all ages learn how to waterski and experience the thrill of riding on the water. Water skiing is an incredible way to experience Clear Lake. If you don’t own a boat and trailer, that’s not a problem. You can rent a boat for the day from Clear Lake Boats and enjoy the lake. Take a break at the seawall near downtown Clear Lake and grab a sandwich from Starboard Market and a cookie from Cookies Etc. 

If you are not ready to hop on waterskis, hop on a tube. There’s nothing like riding on the water on a hot summer day. Clear Lake is a great place to learn how to waterski or ski to your heart’s content. The best tip that I can give you is to visit during the week to experience calmer waters and less boat traffic. 

Kayaking in Estherville, Iowa.
Sara Broers

6. Kayaking: Estherville

High Lake offers an opportunity in Northwest Iowa to hop in a kayak. You can rent a kayak for a small fee from the Emmet County Nature Center. Life jackets are included with your kayak rental. You do have a choice of kayaks. You can opt for a sit-in kayak and sit-on kayak. If you are looking for a quiet place to enjoy nature on the water, this is a great way to do it. Sit in your kayak, move at your own pace, and enjoy the water. The one thing that I noticed on this lake was the variety of birds. Look up and out in front of you, as you never know what you will see from your kayak. You can rent your kayak for more than two hours if you want more of an outdoor challenge. You can decide how far and how long you want to venture out on the lake.

7. Riding The Trails: Volga River State Recreation Area

Many people often refer to the Volga River State Recreation Area in Northeast Iowa as “Little Switzerland.” The rock formations, prairie, bluffs, river, lake, and trails make this an outdoor lover’s paradise. The trails are groomed for equestrian riders, hikers, and mountain bikers during the warmer months. With more than 20 multi-use trails available for you to use, you will find natural beauty in all corners of this recreation area. And the view? The views of the lake will win you over instantly. 

Winter brings an opportunity to cross-country ski and snowmobile on the trails. I have yet to visit this recreation area in the fall, but I have been told that the fall foliage is incredible. Summertime is my favorite time of year to visit, as the trails are ready for me and my hiking boots. There are no fees to visit this park, so make the most out of your day.

Pro Tips

No matter where you decide to experience an outdoor thrill in Iowa, there is one thing that I know for sure — you will enjoy every moment of it. Keep your skill level in mind before you venture into any of these activities. Know your limitations, and don’t try to do something that you don’t feel comfortable doing. Each of these places has an opportunity for all levels of thrill-seekers to have the time of their lives in the great outdoors of Iowa. 

If you have always wanted to try something new, now is the time. With so many thrilling outdoor adventures to choose from, you will find something that you enjoy. I have personally done all of these experiences at one time or another. Each of them can be as challenging as you make it. Summer is the best time for kayaking and waterskiing. Fall and spring are ideal for hiking, mountain biking, horseback riding, and riding an OHV. Challenge yourself with something new and see how far you can go. If there is one thing that I know, it’s the fact that you will discover something that you find yourself doing over and over. I can’t wait to return to the OHV Park in Fort Dodge, as that was indeed an outdoor adventure that I cannot stop reliving in my mind. 

For outdoor adventurers seeking to explore more of Iowa, check out these Iowa towns with incredible scenery and the best campgrounds in Northeast Iowa.

]]>
The 8 Most Unusual Experiences You Can Have In A Volcano https://www.travelawaits.com/2679973/unusual-experiences-in-a-volcano/ Sat, 10 Jul 2021 16:17:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2679973 Lava sunrise on the southeast rift zone of Kilauea volcano

There is not much more impressive than Mother Nature doing her thing. Natural wonders, be it simply the expanse of the ocean, the power of a waterfall, or the beauty of a sunset, make us sit back and appreciate the world around us, making us feel small and insignificant, but not in a bad way.

Instead, when we see nature being nature, completely ignoring us humans, our hearts swell and jaws drop, and we come back home to our day-to-day life so much richer.

When it comes to understanding and seeing what lies beneath the thin crust of the earth, that powerful feeling is even stronger. Experiencing the earth’s crust breaking open, volcanoes erupting, and the earth moving, is something quite special.

Around the world, there are sights that will take your breath away (at times quite literally, considering what lies underneath can be quite smelly!), and while these adventures can be a little scary at times, they will certainly raise your adrenaline levels and make your heart skip a beat, giving you a new appreciation of the very special planet we live on.

Here is a range of volcano experiences that will quicken your pulse.

Editor’s Note: While not all of these experiences are in volcanoes, per se, they are all in magnificent regions shaped by volcanic activity.

Lava tubes at Undara Volcanic National Park in Queensland, Australia
Stuart Perry / Shutterstock.com

1. Walk Through Lava Tubes

Queensland, Australia

Undara Volcanic National Park, some 3-hour’s drive inland from Cairns, boasts the world’s largest and best-preserved lava tube system, with a geological history dating back to Australia’s most recent volcanic explosion more than 190,000 years ago. An estimated 56 cubic miles of 2192-degree Fahrenheit hot lava flowed from the main crater spreading across the landscape.

Eventually, the lava flow stopped, and tunnels were left with ceilings up to 50 feet high. You can walk down into them. Some are filled with water, some have bats, and all will impress you with their magnitude and history.

The only way to see the lava tubes is with a trained guide on a tour. There are several tours available, such as the two-hour Archway Explorer, which takes in three sections of lava tube, including the largest piece, the so-called archway. Others are longer, some more challenging, and the Wildlife at Sunset tour includes bubbly, a cheese platter, a stunning sunset, and a million bats, give or take a few.

Pro Tip: It’s too far from the coast for a day trip, but there is basic overnight accommodation either on a campsite or in lovely, restored railway carriages.

Bubbling Champagne Pool at Wai-O-Tapu Thermal Wonderland in North Island, New Zealand
WitR / Shutterstock.com

2. Visit A Bubbling Champagne Pool

North Island, New Zealand

The Wai-O-Tapu Thermal Wonderland lies on the North Island of New Zealand and is a veritable volcanic theme park, with champagne pools sparkling and popping away; startling green lakes; a hole in the ground in the walls of which birds nest and hatch their young without having to sit on their eggs; and bubbling, burping mud pools. It’s a true wonderland that is both weird and wonderful – and somewhat “aromatic,” if not downright stinky. Of course, it’s full of natural attractions that prove that New Zealand is sitting right on the Pacific Rim of Fire.

And don’t worry, after a couple of days, you get used to the smell. Or that’s what the locals claim, anyway.

Pro Tip: Just down the road you’ll find the small town of Rotorua by a pretty lake, the coastline of which is brimming with spas taking advantage of the naturally heated springs and grounds.

White Island in the Bay of Plenty, New Zealand
Unicus / Shutterstock.com

3. Diving Among Bubbles

White Island, New Zealand

While you are in New Zealand, don’t miss the Bay of Plenty with the North Island’s most active and only active marine volcano, White Island. The island-volcano has been emitting a puff of smoke pretty much nonstop since Captain Cook spotted the island in 1769. An ill-fated sulfur mine was once on the island but was abandoned in 1914 after volcanic activity killed all 10 workers based on the island. Today it is one of the most accessible marine volcanoes in the world and attracts tours from nearby Whakatane. The underwater world here is magical, with lava arches and gas bubbles, and thriving marine life, making it a perfect dive spot.

Pro Tip: When in Whakatane, take advantage of all the other tours available, which include opportunities for dolphin and whale spotting. 

Aerial view of Rano Kau volcano on Easter Island, Chile
IURII BURIAK / Shutterstock.com

4. Walk Around A Crater

Easter Island, Chile

Easter Island, or Rapa Nui to give it its indigenous name, is an island like no other. Located some 2,175 miles from Chile, Easter Island is one of the most remote spots on this planet. It is also one with a history that is still keeping historians puzzled today. Apart from the roughly 1,000 moai, the large stone heads dotted across the island, it also has a long-extinct volcanic crater at the southern end of the island. The Rano Kau crater is an imposing sight. The crater itself is filled with water, full of plants and wildlife, and has its own microclimate. When I was there, there was one small cloud hanging just above the crater producing rain, whereas the rest of the island was sun-bathed under the blue skies. You can hike around the crater but need to be aware that this is rough terrain and a secluded place, so please advise the visitors center on the summit of your intentions, and, even better, hire a local guide.

Pro Tip: You can also visit the ceremonial village of Orongo Tangata Manu, which lies along the crater, on a guided tour.

Kilauea volcano erupting at Volcano National Park in Big Island, Hawaii
Catmando / Shutterstock.com

5. See A Volcano In Action

Big Island, Hawaii

One of the most active and most accessible volcanoes in the world is Kilauea in Hawaii’s Volcano National Park, which is situated on the Big Island. A shield volcano as compared to a stratovolcano, that is, a relatively level volcano that emits thick, slow-flowing lava rather than the violent eruptions from a steep cone, Kilauea offers numerous ways of getting up close and personal with glowing hot lava, from hikes taking you really close to helicopter flights with great views and not-so-hot feet.

Pro Tip: This volcano, when active, is even more spectacular at night, when the bright orange lava glows against the dark sky. There are tours that can take you to the best vantage points safely.

Dive between tectonic plates in Silfra, Iceland
Hoiseung Jung / Shutterstock.om

6. Dive Between Tectonic Plates

Iceland

Iceland sits right on the spot where the North American and Eurasian tectonic plates meet, or, in fact, drift apart by around one inch each year. This not only results in a plethora of seismic activity, including hundreds of earthquakes every week, and regular volcanic eruptions, such as the eruption of Eyjafjallajökull back in 2010, which brought the world’s airports to a standstill.

It also allows you to experience something you won’t get to encounter anywhere else on the planet: the chance to snorkel or dive in Silfra, the fissure between the two tectonic plates. With the water being runoff from glaciers and filtered through the porous igneous rock, making it crystal clear, the underwater visibility is more than 300 feet. But it is cold, so you will need to dive in a dry suit, which you will become accustomed to during a professionally led dive tour.

Pro Tip: Luckily, Iceland has not only freezing waters but also hot springs, so book yourself in for a warm soak after your adventure.

Mount Etna volcano at sunset, as seen from Taormina, Sicily
Mount Etna as seen from Taormina, Sicily (Photo Credit: kavalenkava / Shutterstock.com)

7. Mount Etna

Sicily, Italy

Europe’s largest active volcano sits on the island of Sicily off the coast of southern Italy. And apart from being the tallest volcano in Europe, and one of the most active in the world, it is also one that is a huge draw for visitors, and the facilities catering for people wanting to go and see it up close are superb. From an observation station halfway up the slope to buses and a funicular taking you to 8,200 feet of the total 11,000 feet, plus half-day and full-day excursions from the cities of Catania, Taormina, and Messina, there really is no excuse not to see this impressive volcano.

Pro Tip: If you want to hike up, no problem, but bear in mind that the temperatures in spring and fall might be better suited than the summer heat.

Mount Yasur eruption Tanna Island, Vanuatu
StanislavBeloglazov / Shutterstock.com

8. Mount Yasur

Tanna Island, Vanuatu

Vanuatu is not a country many people have heard of, but it is worth a trip, even if it is “just” for the volcano and the fact that this is where bungee-jumping originated (think a wooden tower and a sisal rope attached to the ankle…). The South Pacific island nation, comprising more than 80 islands, lies between New Caledonia and Fiji, some 2,200 miles east of Australia, and, like New Zealand, sits firmly, or maybe not quite so firmly, on the Pacific Rim of Fire.

Mount Yasur is found on Tannu Island and provides visitors with regular firework displays. What makes this highly active volcano more attractive than others is its yet unspoiled and not overrun location. While one of the most active volcanoes in the world, you will only find truly intrepid travelers and volcanologists climbing its slopes.

Pro Tip: Vanuatu has lots to offer, so why not consider island-hopping, sampling more than one place? Pencil in a day at the volcano, of course.

]]>
7 Famous Volcanoes That You Can Visit https://www.travelawaits.com/2668385/famous-volcanoes-you-can-visit/ Sat, 12 Jun 2021 12:41:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2668385 Villarrica Volcano in Chile.

Climbing a volcano doesn’t exactly sound like something that would make for a tranquil vacation. If anything, it sounds like a scene from a blockbuster movie, the kind of thing the good guys might do to thwart the villains. But visiting volcanoes is a surprisingly peaceful activity. These unique ecosystems offer visitors the chance to enjoy rare geological phenomena and delicate plant life. They also loom large in more ways than one, shaping the culture and growth of the communities that surround them. They’re even spiritual centers in a way, their mighty power promoting folklore, legends, and theological reflections. If you’ll forgive the pun, visiting volcanoes is a hot travel activity, one that you’re likely never to forget.

Here are seven of the world’s most famous volcanoes that you can visit.

Mount Stromboli in Italy.
BGStock72 / Shutterstock.com

1. Mount Stromboli, Italy

For most people keen on checking out a volcano, being there for an active eruption isn’t exactly part of their plan. But at Mount Stromboli in Sicily, watching the eruption up close is an essential part of the experience. Nicknamed “the Lighthouse of the Mediterranean,” Stromboli has been erupting on a fairly consistent schedule since 1932. With local guides leading the way, visitors tackle a steep hike that takes several hours. By the time they reach the summit, it’s dark outside, and the guides know exactly where to position everyone to safely enjoy the bursts of orange lava that illuminate the sky

Mount Vesuvius in Italy.
Andrii Kozak / Shutterstock.com

2. Mount Vesuvius, Italy

Mount Vesuvius has the distinction of being one of the world’s most dangerous volcanoes, a well-earned title considering its A.D. 79 eruption destroyed the city of Pompeii, killing an estimated 1,000 people. Should it erupt today, the repercussions would be nothing short of catastrophic, since 600,000 people live directly in the danger zone in the city of Naples. Still, visitors stream in to visit every day. Part of the appeal is its accessibility. You can drive up about 4,000 feet before parking to walk the final 650 feet to the top. 

Batur in Bali, Indonesia.
saiko3p / Shutterstock.com

3. Mount Batur, Indonesia

If you don’t mind waking up very early (or going to bed very late, depending on your point of view), visiting Indonesia’s Mount Batur is an unforgettable travel experience. The majority of guided treks to the top of this volcano leave early. We’re talking 3 a.m. early! But pulling an all-nighter or getting up while it’s still pitch black outside is worth it. Not only will you experience sunrise from the volcano’s point of view, but you’ll avoid the hazy clouds that normally ruin the views in the afternoon and be rewarded with unspoiled views of Bali.

Villarica in Chile.
Macca Sherifi / Shutterstock.com

4. Villarrica, Chile

Villarrica is also known as Rucapillán, a Mapuche word meaning “House of the Devil.” With that foreboding of a name, you might think twice before visiting. But Villarrica is a dreamy destination for nature lovers (and anyone keen on a challenging hike!). One of the most active volcanoes in the country, it is usually covered with snow, making for great photos. Villarrica National Park is a fantastic place for hiking, and there’s excellent skiing, horseback riding, and river rafting nearby. 

Arenal in Costa Rica.
Esdelval / Shutterstock.com

5. Arenal, Costa Rica

In Costa Rica, the name Arenal elicits mixed reactions. In 1968, the volcano unexpectedly erupted, causing widespread devastation. But some good has come from the destruction. A national park was established, and visitors can enjoy hiking across the former lava fields. Guided tours of the destination, which is about 3 hours from San José, include a history of the eruption, plus luxurious moments like visiting hot springs and relaxing by waterfalls.

Mount Rainier in Washington.
Thye-Wee Gn / Shutterstock.com

6. Mount Rainier, United States

Mount Rainier is one of the most accessible volcanoes on this list, owing to its location in the family-friendly Mount Rainier National Park. Well, it’s accessible to look at, but not so much to climb! Hiking Mount Rainier isn’t an excursion to undertake lightly. This volcano is notorious for its harsh weather, including year-round blizzards. The climb requires serious technical skills, and only those experienced in high-altitude treks should attempt it. But observing the volcano from the ground is tremendously rewarding, too, and you can enjoy the views via hiking, cycling, or camping.

Kilauea, Big Island, Hawaii.
Tada Images / Shutterstock.com

7. Kīlauea, Hawaii

Kīlauea looms larger than life for the residents of Hawaii’s Big Island. The volcano’s regular eruptions have destroyed roads, homes, and even some of the facilities at Volcanoes National Park. The cycle of destruction and subsequent rebirth is honored in the nearby community of Pahoa at the Lava Zone Museum, which chronicles the hardships and joys of living next to a powerful volcano. Visitors to the area can explore past lava flows on hikes and scenic drives through the national park — and enjoy seeing rare lava trees at a nearby state park.

Pro Tips

Should you set out to visit a famous volcano, consider investing in the services of a guide. (In some locations, a guide is mandatory.) Few famous volcanoes have visitor centers or restroom facilities, so plan accordingly. And, as with all kinds of travel, take pains to respect the ecosystem. Keep on the designated trails, be prepared to carry your garbage with you, and respect the spiritual practices of the surrounding communities.

]]>
Little-Known Adventures In The Smallest Of Small Midwestern Towns https://www.travelawaits.com/2665356/midwest-small-town-adventures/ Sun, 30 May 2021 13:37:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2665356 Musical in Medora, North Dakota

The Midwest is where you can have adventure after adventure in some of the smallest towns in America. Each of these towns offers something special. It’s not uncommon to have a local wave at you as you stop at the lone stop sign in town. Most importantly, kick back and enjoy the atmosphere that each of these small towns has to offer.

Medora, North Dakota

Fewer than 130 people call Medora home. It’s no wonder that many people fall in love with this small charming mountain town on their first visit. The entrance to the South Unit of Theodore Roosevelt National Park is in Medora. An evening at the Steak Fondue and the Medora Musical is one for the memory books. Find your chair in the outdoor amphitheater and enjoy the longest-running outdoor musical in the country. Lace up your hiking boots and hike the world-famous Maah Daah Hey Hiking Trail. If you want a game of golf, Bully Pulpit is one of the top golf courses in the country. It’s not only challenging, but it’s also one of the most beautiful courses you will find in the Midwest. June, July, and August are the prime months to visit, as the attractions are all open.

Planning your trip? Read up on how to spend a perfect day in Medora, North Dakota, or our North Dakota road trip: Fargo to Medora.

Buddy Holly glasses trail marker, Clear Lake, Iowa.
Sara Broers

Clear Lake, Iowa

Clear Lake is where Buddy Holly played his last concert at the legendary Surf Ballroom. You can hike out to the crash site and relive the music that lives on today. This small town of under 8,000 is also an incredible lake town that offers boating, swimming, and fishing. The 4th of July is the best in the country when it comes to family fun. The parade, lake, picnics, carnival, and fireworks over the lake are incredible. A summer visit must is to enjoy swimming in Clear Lake.

May is a terrific time to hike out to the Buddy Holly Crash Site, as the countryside is beginning to green up. If you do choose to hike out to the crash site, wear proper footwear. The site is approximately a quarter-mile off of a gravel road, and it is often muddy. Be sure to take a selfie with the Buddy Holly glasses that mark the beginning of the trail to hike to the crash site. Book a night’s stay at the award-winning Larch Pine Inn.

The Garden of Eden, Lucas, Kansas.
Sara Broers

Lucas, Kansas

If you are an art enthusiast, you probably know about Lucas. If not, you need to know about Lucas! This small town of under 200 people celebrates art in every way, shape, and form. Bowl Plaza is home to some of the most beautiful restrooms (yes, you read that right!) in the world. The Grassroots Art Center is where you can see all types of art. Everything and anything comes to life in this museum. The highlight of my visit to Lucas is always the Garden of Eden.

A gentleman named Samuel Perry Dinsmoor constructed this work of art that many travel for miles to experience. For a small fee, you can take a guided tour of the site. Something unique to this site is that Mr. Dinsmoor is buried in the log cabin mausoleum on-site. There is no photography allowed when viewing his body.

Plan to visit anytime from May through October to enjoy all that Lucas has to offer. 

Alma, Kansas

The Volland Store south of Alma, Kansas, is where you can have a night at the museum in rural Kansas. The Loft at the Volland Store overlooks a museum space that rotates out with different traveling displays. I had the opportunity to stay here when a salute to agriculture was on display. Sunrise was gorgeous, as were the deep breaths of fresh air that greeted me as I stepped outdoors. If you enjoy a quiet place without other people around, the Volland Store will interest you. 

Wetmore, Kansas

Have you ever seen a shoe tree? Imagine the smile I had when I saw the shoes on the tree as I drove around the bend on the gravel road that leads to the Kissel Shoe Tree. This is one of the most clever experiences that I have come across in all of my travel. People have been nailing their shoes to this tree since the late 1980s. Many visitors stop to look at this amazing work of art in rural Kansas, and some even nail a shoe to the tree.

This tree is not in Wetmore proper, so you will need to travel to the tree. Travel 1 mile west on K-9 from Wetmore, then 5 miles north on W Road to the old Davis Ranch sign, then turn and go 1 mile west on 90th to V Road. You will not miss the tree, as it is on a corner and it’s on public ground. A hammer and nails are on site, but you do need to bring your own shoe to nail on the tree. I would also suggest bringing a permanent marker to leave a message on your shoe!

Tornado sculpture in Codell, Kansas.
Sara Broers

Codell, Kansas

If you are a weather enthusiast you most likely know about Codell. Codell was hit by a tornado on May 20th in 1916, 1917, and 1918. Today you can view the 12-foot sculpture that replicates a tornado funnel. Can you imagine what life was like in this town in 1919? The town never recovered from all of the damage that these tornadoes caused, yet the pride in the community lives on today. The Rose Cottage in Stockton offers a cozy night of lodging in Rooks County, and you’ll also find restaurants in town.

Wall, South Dakota

With fewer than 1,000 residents, Wall, South Dakota, home to the iconic Wall Drug Store, swells to accommodate thousands of visitors throughout the year. Wall Drug is one of the most popular stops for millions of people traveling to and through the Black Hills. Travelers have stopped for years for water and coffee. Today you can experience the Old West and enjoy a meal, including pie. Cowboy-themed stores, as well as gift shops, offer something for everyone. There are several choices for lodging in Wall Drug if you need a place to stay for the night. If possible, plan your stop during the middle of the morning or afternoon and eat a late meal here. You can avoid waiting in line for a table or ordering food if you eat at an odd hour.

Schoolhouse Beach in Washington Island, Wisconsin.
Sara Broers

Washington Island, Wisconsin

To arrive on Washington Island, you will take a ferry ride over from the tip of the Door County Peninsula. Plan to spend a full day exploring this island, which is home to around 700 people year-round. Hike to the top of Mountain Park Lookout Tower for an epic view of the island and its surroundings. I have climbed this tower in spring, summer, and fall.

Fall is incredible with the golden foliage that surrounds the tower. Schoolhouse Beach is one of the most interesting beaches I have ever set foot on. The rocks that make up the beach are stunning and unique. Note that it is against the law to take any of the rocks from the beach home with you. 

Beach in Kelleys Island, Ohio.
Sara Broers

Kelleys Island, Ohio

One of my favorite things to do on Kelleys Island is to watch the sunset in the evening. During the day, it’s a great time to explore the island by golf cart. Experience the Glacial Grooves and historical sites, and find a place along Lake Erie to kick back and relax. The areas that I have found to sit along the shoreline on Kelleys Island often remind me of a Caribbean beach. If I did not know that I was on a beach in Ohio, I could easily think that I was in the Caribbean.

This tiny island town is one of the best secretive adventures that the Midwest has to offer. I can count on one hand the places where I can hop on a golf cart and explore an island in the heart of America. Hop on the ferry early in the day for a full day of exploring. You can drive your car on the ferry to travel to the island, as well. I have found that a rented golf cart suffices for all travel necessities on the island, though.

Each of these towns has something that you will find unique. The best tip that I can give you is to start a conversation with the local folks. In each of the communities that I have recommended for adventures in the smallest of small towns, you will find local folks who will welcome you. If you need directions on how to get somewhere, roll down your car window and ask. Stop your golf cart along the road and ask. These folks in the Midwest will help you and appreciate that you took the time to visit their communities.

Adventure comes in all sizes, shapes, and forms. I appreciate the fact that many people have taken the time to invest in their towns so that people like you and me will feel welcome when we arrive. Enjoy the home-cooked meals in the diners that you will find along your route. The chances are pretty good that you will be planning a return visit before you leave town.

]]>
Huacachina: The Unexpected Desert Oasis In The Middle Of Peru https://www.travelawaits.com/2659434/huacachina-desert-oasis-in-peru/ Fri, 07 May 2021 12:38:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2659434

There aren’t too many desert oases in the world. And among those few, Huacachina Oasis in Peru really stands out.

Huacachina Oasis — known as “Oasis of America” — is about five hours from Lima, Peru’s capital. The oasis is “the only natural oasis in South America” and is home to the biggest sand dunes on the continent, the official Huacachina website explains.

Huacachina Oasis in Peru from above.
Photo by Willian Justen de Vasconcellos on Unsplash

How The Oasis Was Formed

Circled by palm trees, Huacachina Oasis is a “lush island in a sea of sand, its watery pool ripples in shades of blue and green, completely encompassed by the brutal environment around it,” according to Atlas Obscura.

Here’s the geologic explanation for how the oasis was formed in a sea of desert: Huacachina Oasis is the result of a current of water deep underground which bubbles up to allow palm, eucalyptus, and carob trees to grow around it, the Huacachina website explains.

There are also local legends about how the oasis was formed. Although accounts vary, Huacachina.com explains that a young woman — who mourned the loss of her beloved — cried so much that her tears created the lagoon. Then, one day, a warrior passed through the area and saw the woman.

“Feeling observed, the young woman threw herself into the water to hide for hours until the warrior left,” Huacachina.com explains. “When she tried to leave she realized that she had transformed into a mermaid. The girl’s name was Huacachina.”

Dunebuggy near Huacachina Oasis, Peru.
Image by lourdesatt from Pixabay

Adventure Recreation

Huacachina Oasis is famous for its enormous sand dunes. In fact, seeing the dunes has been described as an “out of this world” experience because the area looks like the surface of another planet, according to Huacachina.com.

The area has become famous for its dune buggy and sandboarding tours that take advantage of the sand dunes. On the first half of the tour, visitors ride in a dune buggy driven by a professional driver up and down the dunes at high speeds.

The second half of the tour gives tourists a chance to try sandboarding — which is exactly like snowboarding only on sand dunes instead of snow. Those who don’t want to sandboard can also “sand sled” by going down the dunes on a sled.

Nazca Lines in Peru.
Image by Monika Neumann from Pixabay 

Nazca Lines

A trip to Huacachina wouldn’t be complete without also visiting the 2,000-year-old Nazca Lines — about two hours away. The lines, some of which measure up to 1,200 feet long, are giant designs etched into the ground, National Geographic explains.

When seen from an airplane, visitors realize the lines are actually more than 300 geometric designs, ranging from triangles to spirals. There are also about 70 representations of plants and animals, including a spider, hummingbird, monkey, llama, flower, tree, and dog.

Huacachina Oasis in Peru at night.
Photo by VeDoble on Unsplash

Know Before You Go

The U.S. State Department recently increased its Health Alert: Travel Advisory for Peru to Level 4 Do Not Travel due to “the very high level of COVID-19 in the country.” When it is safe to travel to Peru again, you’ll need to fly into Lima, and then take a five-hour bus ride to Huacachina. As you plan your trip, consider

]]>
This Gorgeous Luxury Resort Built A Steel Staircase Suspended 400 Feet Off The Desert Ground https://www.travelawaits.com/2657287/cave-peak-stairway-amangiri-utah-luxury-resort/ Fri, 30 Apr 2021 12:34:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/?p=2657287 Cave Peak Stairway, Amangiri resort, Utah.

If you’re looking for what some people may call the thrill of a lifetime and you don’t mind heights, a luxury resort in Utah has just what you need.

Reaching a height of 400 feet, the Cave Peak Stairway — essentially a hanging ladder-like bridge — uses 120 steps to span a distance of 200 feet. That length makes it the longest bridge of its kind in North America, a Bloomberg article reports.

View of Amangiri resort.
Aman

A Beautiful Location

A company called Aman owns 32 resorts, hotels, and private residences in 20 countries. One of the luxury resorts is Amangiri.

Sitting on 600 acres of the Colorado Plateau in southern Utah, Amangiri is about 100 miles from Zion National Park, just under 150 miles from Bryce Canyon National Park, and 60 miles from Lake Powell

There are two parts of the resort: The Suites of Amangiri hotel and the tented Pavilions of Camp Sarika retreat, which was inspired by safari lodges in Africa. Both offer stunning views of the desert’s canyons, mesas, ridges, and gorges.

Ferrata course at Amangiri.
Aman

A Thrill-Seeker’s Dream

Amangiri has a set of via ferrata — Italian for “iron path” — courses of varying distances. These types of courses are “protected mountain climbing routes consisting of anchored cables, rungs, steps, bridges, and ladders, which [allow] lesser or even inexperienced climbers to face otherwise dangerous — but incredibly scenic — routes,” a Fodor’s article explains.

As if the thought of crossing the aerial stairway isn’t daunting enough, think about this: Cave Peak Stairway is only accessible after climbing to its starting point. Indeed, to even reach Cave Peak Stairway, guests must first complete a three-hour via ferrata circuit that crosses a series of red rock canyons.

View from Cave Peak Stairway in Utah.
Aman

Cave Peak Stairway

Crossing what basically is a hanging ladder made of metal slats connected by wires some 400 feet above the desert is — without a doubt — not for the faint of heart. The question then, is “Why do it?”

The answer is simple: “Intense exposure and mesmerizing vistas of the property and beyond,” the resort explains.

“Guests are invited to take to the stairs after completing the via ferrata, and will be rewarded with an incredible panorama from the top,” Amangiri explains. “With an unmatched vertical route of ascent, a spectacular position, and a summit visible from the resort, it is destined to be an iconic and exhilarating adventure.”

Amangiri resort in Canyon Point, Utah.
Aman

A Relaxing Resort

Let’s face it: After a long day of climbing via ferrata routes at heights of up to 400 feet, you’re going to want a chance to relax and unwind. Fortunately, Amangiri is a luxury resort, so it has exactly what you need.

Its 25,000 square-foot spa “reflects the healing traditions of the Navajo, with treatments drawing on the four elements of earth, wind, fire, and water,” the resort notes.

Here’s the great part: Every two-night stay includes one 30-minute “crystal sound bath.” What’s more, that stay also includes one 60-minute massage per person per night.

At this point, it should be mentioned that the resort is mostly sold out through June. After that, nightly rates for one room with two adults at Amangiri start at $3,500.

Can’t get enough bird’s-eye views? Consider how to experience the world’s highest cliff camping here.

]]>
7 Incredible Caves To Explore In Pennsylvania https://www.travelawaits.com/2563420/caves-to-explore-in-pennsylvania/ Sun, 18 Apr 2021 12:47:51 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2563420/caves-to-explore-in-pennsylvania/ Celebrate the International Year of Caves and Karst with a visit to one of these incredible Pennsylvania caves.

]]>
Laurel Caverns in Pennsylvania.

Mother Nature has been working her magic underground for millions of years using water, tectonic movement, and wind to create hidden worlds filled with incredible sculptures, massive flowstones, and delicate crystals. We know these subterranean worlds as caves or caverns, which provide valuable information about how our earth has evolved.

Over the years, caves have served as homes, burial grounds, and sites for religious practices. Because of the near-constant conditions in caverns, sensitive artifacts such as relics of ancient Indian civilizations and prehistoric animals’ remains are preserved within caves.

Most people don’t realize what is under their feet. Much of the drinking water you and I enjoy flows through caves before reaching wells, springs, and aquifers.

This year, caves across the nation, including caves in Pennsylvania, are celebrating the International Year of Caves and Karst, organized by the International Union of Speleology, to draw attention to the promotion and protection of caves and karst.

What is karst? Karst landscapes include underground streams, caves, sinkholes, and other features formed when bedrock is dissolved by water. One-fifth of the land in the United States is considered karst.

Thanks to the region’s thick layers of limestone, Pennsylvania offers a treasure trove of caves to explore. The Keystone State is home to seven beautiful show caves and approximately 1,100 other private mapped caverns across the state.

The caves are listed in a clockwise circle starting in the western part of the state. Each cavern is different and has unique features.

Lincoln Caverns and Whisper Rocks and Penn’s Cave and Wildlife Park provided free admission. All opinions remain my own.


1. Laurel Caverns

Farmington

Laurel Caverns is situated in the Laurel Highlands atop Chestnut Ridge. The Laurel Caverns has over three miles of passages and is Pennsylvania’s largest cave. You can enjoy a well-lit guided tour or, if you’re more adventurous, try the three-hour spelunking tour.

A natural cave, Laurel Caverns follows the slope of the mountain and maybe strenuous walking for some.

Aside from the cave, the 43-acre park offers a magnificent seven-county view, a visitor center, rappelling, indoor mini-golf, picnicking, and educational programs.

The Laurel Caverns are open daily May through October, and then on weekends in March, April, and November.

Robin O’Neal Smith

2. Lincoln Caverns And Whisper Rocks

Huntingdon

Celebrating a big anniversary this year, Lincoln Caverns and Whisper Rocks are enjoying their 90th anniversary of being open to the public. Located along Route 22, three miles west of Huntingdon, Lincoln Caverns provides one-hour interpretive tours of both spectacular caves.

Whisper Rocks contains some of the most spectacular and unique speleothems found in Pennsylvania, and Lincoln Caverns boasts one of the most comprehensive educational programs of all the Pennsylvania show caves.

Aside from their interpretive tours and educational programs, they also offer special events such as Santa in the Cave, Ghosts and Goblins Tours, Batfest, Ultimate Underground Birthdays, and Bunny Underground. During the summer, they host Discovery Days, Kids Cave Kamp, T-Rex Tuesdays, Photography Tours, and weekly Come To The Dark Side Blacklight Adventures.

When I visited, we participated in a blacklight adventure which shows the cavern in a totally different light. Our tour started with a pre-tour program, An Introduction to Speleology: The Study of Caves.

We were each given a handheld blacklight to help guide us through the cavern and view the amazing fluorescent calcite crystals and glowing speleothems’ phosphorescent beauty. We also learned how mother nature created the formations, the caverns’ history, and the need to protect caves and karst areas.

After seeing things via the black light, we were able to view them in regular light. It was great to see them in different ways.

Lincoln Caverns is also spearheading several International Year of Caves and Karst activities throughout the summer.

Amenities include the Raystown Rocks Gift Shop and gem panning. Lincoln Caverns is the closest cave to the beautiful Raystown Lake. It is open year-round, check their website for hours.

The entrance to Penn's Cave.

Robin O’Neal Smith

3. Penn’s Cave And Wildlife Park

Centre Hall

Penn’s Cave and Wildlife Park is America’s only all-water cavern and farm-nature-wildlife park. Listed on the National Register of Historic Places, Penn’s Cave was discovered in 1885.

Sitting above the cave is a farm. When you take the cave tour, they talk about the different aspects of the farm above ground.

There are two separate tours: the cave tour by boat and the wildlife park tour.

The 45-minute fully-guided cave tour is entirely by flat-bottom motorboat. It is the only way to see the cave. You board the boat near the cave entryway. Each boat holds 20 to 22 people. The guide sits at one end and steers the boat through the winding cavern passageways, stopping to point out the highlights and unique formations often in mysteriously familiar shapes, such as The Garden of the Gods and The Statue of Liberty.

The boat exits the end of the cave and then includes a ride on Lake Nitanee. From the lake, you can see the barn and other buildings that sit above the cave. You then reenter the cavern via the river flowing through it and go back through the cave. I found it to be a fun experience to enjoy the cave by boat.

The cave tour is not handicapped accessible. A 300-foot paved inclined path leads to 48 steep concrete steps with handrails down to the entrance where the tour boats are boarded.

The 90-minute wildlife park tour is also fully guided. You ride a bus through the various portions of the park, where 1,600 acres have been carefully preserved for birds and animals. Some of the animals you see on this tour are Texas longhorn cattle, foxes, wolves, bears, bison, bighorn sheep, whitetail deer, elk, mustangs, and a mountain lion.

You might also enjoy Prospector Pete’s Miners Maze, shopping the vast gift shop, grabbing a snack at the Cave Cafe, or eating in the picnic area. There is also gemstone panning.

4. Woodward Cave

Woodward

The Hall of Statues in Woodward Cave is over 200 feet long. It is nicknamed The Big One. This is one cave that is easily walked and has large, well-lit passageways.

The guided cave tour is a half-mile in length and goes through five different rooms within the cave. You will see one of the largest stalagmites in the U.S., called the Tower of Babel.

One of the rooms in Woodward Cave was used by the Seneca Indians for their religious ceremonies. Early settlers named the room the Red Panther Cave. The cave also was reported to have sheltered a band of robbers more than 100 years ago.

Woodward cave is adjacent to an RV campground with all kinds of summer activities and a gift shop, a recreation hall, a picnic pavilion, cabin rentals, and a lunch stand.

5. Lost River Caverns

Hellertown

Guided walking tours through the five cave chambers with crystal formations and an underground river are the Lost River Caverns’ highlights. The tour takes you along 1,200 feet of paved walkways that are well lighted. There are several ramps and eight steps.

An interesting fact about this cavern: During the late 1800s, a wooden ballroom dance floor was installed in what is now called the Crystal Chapel, and dances were held in the cave’s natural air conditioning. After it was purchased for a show cave, and up till 2009, over 100 ceremonies were held in the Crystal Chapel. I bet they were memorable celebrations.

Located south of Bethlehem, other amenities on Lost River Canyon’s grounds include an indoor tropical garden, a nature trail, souvenirs, gem panning, a picnic grove, a rock and mineral museum, and more.

Lost River Caverns is open year-round except for holidays.

Water in Indian Echo Caverns.

Amy R. Gillung / Shutterstock

6. Echo Dell, Home Of Indian Echo Caverns

Hummelstown

Visitors of Indian Echo Caverns tread on the same paths the Susquehannock Indians and early explorers walked. The caves are rich in history and local legends.

Minutes from Harrisburg, Hershey, and Lancaster, Indian Echo Caverns provides a 45-minute guided tour of breathtaking natural beauty underground. Featuring fantastic geological formations and crystal clear sparkling lakes, you will visit various stunning rooms, including the Wedding Chapel.

Other amenities include a petting barnyard, panning for gemstones, a 4,000-square-foot gift shop, covered picnic areas, and a playground. Indian Echo Caverns is open year-round except for Thanksgiving, Christmas, and New Year’s Day.

7. Crystal Cave

Kutztown

Pennsylvania’s very first show cave, located near Kutztown, off Rt. 222, Crystal Cave is famous for its varied formations. It is the most heavily visited cavern in the state, sitting on 15 scenic acres, and has thrilled millions of visitors since it opened in 1871. One of the oldest continuously operating show caves in the United States, Crystal Cave is also considered one of the most beautiful.

When visiting, you will be amazed when you step inside to view the dazzling display of crystal magnificence created by nature. Calcite and aragonite crystals sparkle in various colors everywhere you look. This geologic wonderland contains delicate flutings, drapery, flowstone, stalactites, stalagmites, and more.

They provide a one-hour walking tour of the cavern along safe concrete walkways with steel railings. Also on premises is a gift shop, fast food, mini-golf, museum, gemstone panning, and a nature trail.

Penn's Cave with colored lights.

Robin O’Neal Smith

Pro Tips

  • Take a sweater or light jacket. Caverns are usually between 48 and 52 degrees year-round.
  • Mother Nature did not make most caves handicapped accessible. Please check their websites to verify accessibility information.
  • While caves have lighting inside, there are places where it is dim. If vision is a problem, you might want to reconsider.
  • Wear sturdy, closed-toe shoes for walking around the caves. Some caves are damp and wet.
  • Some caves do not permit backpacks, oversized bags, strollers, walking sticks, umbrellas, tripods, monopods, selfie sticks, pets, video cameras, food, or beverages. Check their websites for details.
  • Don’t touch: The formations underground are often delicate, and just touching the walls with the oil from your skin can cause damage. A careless touch can ruin what took centuries to form.
]]>
6 Tips For Exploring Canada’s Beautiful Trans Canada Trail One Mile At A Time https://www.travelawaits.com/2563000/trans-canada-trail-tips-for-exploring/ Fri, 02 Apr 2021 13:20:43 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2563000/trans-canada-trail-tips-for-exploring/ It’s officially the longest recreational, multi-use trail network in the world. Here’s what you need to know about the Trans Canada Trail.

]]>
The Trans Canada Trail on the Atlantic coast in winter.

Canada has some serious bragging rights. As the world’s second-largest country, Canada has the longest coastline, the most lakes, the most polar bears, and even the most maple syrup on earth. The country is also home to another record-breaker that should be on every traveler’s radar: the Trans Canada Trail.

The Trans Canada Trail is a cross-Canada system of greenways, waterways, and roadways that connects the Atlantic, Pacific, and Arctic Oceans. At more than 15,000 miles, it’s officially the longest recreational, multi-use trail network in the world.

1. It’s Open To Everyone

There’s absolutely no cost or admission associated with the Trans Canada Trail. It’s open for everyone, and that includes travelers. Don’t worry, absolutely no one expects you to hike the length of it! The goal of the Trans Canada Trail isn’t to encourage people to undertake some kind of extreme sporting challenge to traverse the country but rather to enjoy deeper connections on a local level. Chances are, no matter where you’re vacationing in Canada, you’re never that far from a section of the trail and even an hour or two of hiking or cycling is a great way to experience its beauty.

Lindsay Davies from Niagara told me, “I’ve experienced multiple sections of the Trans Canada Trail, but none have been as stunning as the section near Fort Smith in the Northwest Territories. You can hear the rumble of the rapids from town while following the trail. Mesmerized by the brilliant sunset, one can’t help but feel truly connected to nature … though the Rapids of the Drowned serve as a reminder of how we need to respect Mother Nature’s beauty!”

Stephanie Mayo of Innisfil echoed this sentiment. She told me, “My local section is called the Thornton-Cookstown. I love hiking this section of the Trans Canada Trail for so many reasons: because it proves you can always find a slice of nature to escape to close to home; the varying terrain — from farmer’s fields to charming bridges over winding rivers; and because at either end sit two of Simcoe County’s charming small towns. And nothing beats hiking it in the fall when the trees that cover the trail create a carpet of colorful leaves to walk upon.”

A biker and tricyclist on the trail.

Klod / Shutterstock

2. Conditions Vary

The Trans Canada Trail is not one endless path but actually a cross-country network of more than 400 different community trails. To say that conditions may vary is an understatement! In many cases, the area where you’ll be walking or biking was once a rail line. Former rail lines were donated by the Canada Pacific Railway and the Canadian National Railway to be refurbished as walking trails.

However, not all sections of the trail are so quiet and isolated. Only about 32 percent of the Trans Canada Trail consists of off-road trails like the old rail lines. Some sections of the Trail (more than 3,700 miles worth) are actually waterways, which is great for canoeing but not so helpful for long-distance trekkers or cyclists. As well, a significant portion of the Trans Canada Trail — more than 5,300 miles — is made up of active roadways. These can range from genteel country roads to much busier routes. Critics of the Trail argue, quite convincingly, that these highways were never meant to accommodate hikers and cyclists, nor was the trail ever envisioned as such.

For this reason, it’s imperative that would-be adventurers read up on what their planned route actually entails. You could find yourself on a narrow dirt path, a quiet groomed trail that welcomes horseback riders and cross-country skiers, or something much busier that also hosts snowmobiles and all-terrain vehicles, or even a highly trafficked road.

3. Understand Different Names

The Trans Canada Trail is a network of hundreds of community trails operated at a local level in each jurisdiction it passes through. As such, guidebooks and residents are likely to use the local name. In and around Halifax, Nova Scotia, for instance, you’ll find the Shearwater Flyer Trail, Forest Hills Trail System, Salt Marsh Trail, Atlantic View Trail, Blueberry Run Trail, Gaetz Brook Greenway, and the Musquodoboit Trailway. If you’re making trail-related inquiries, don’t despair if different names keep popping up.

4. “Mile Zero” Is In A Pretty Cool Place

The Trans Canada Trail’s “Mile Zero” is located in Cape Spear, Newfoundland. The most easterly point in North America, Cape Spear offers incredible views of the Atlantic Ocean, is a fine spot for bird watching, and history buffs will enjoy seeing the remains of old gun batteries, part of Canada’s coastal defense system during World War II. It’s hard to think of a more memorable place to embark on a journey.

5. Plenty Of Tourist Attractions Are Connected

Back in 2013, a small honorary section of the Trans Canada Trail was established around Rideau Hall (home of Canada’s Governor-General) and 24 Sussex Drive (the Prime Minister’s residence) in Ottawa, Canada’s capital city. Since then, this part of the Trail has been fully integrated, going from honorary status to a fully fledged component of the route through Ontario. While this may be the best example of how the Trail goes through many of Canada’s tourist attractions, it’s far from the only one. As it makes its way across Canada, the Trans Canada Trail touches many landmarks and attractions that visitors will love.

For instance, the Trans Canada Trail is connected to New Brunswick’s Fundy Trail Parkway, home to the world’s highest tides. It also connects with Saskatchewan’s Good Spirit Lake Provincial Park Trail, home to sand dunes that are five stories high. And in the aptly named community of Trail, British Columbia, the Trans Canada Trail crosses one of the longest pedestrian suspension bridges in the world (1,000 feet, for those curious).

Lauren Yakiwchuk from Mississauga knows firsthand how the Trans Canada Trail can introduce someone to new tourism attractions. As she told me, “I’m very fortunate to have the Trans Canada Trail in my own backyard, and I walk there almost daily! In Port Credit (part of Mississauga), the Trans Canada Trail is part of the Waterfront Trail that runs right along the edge of Lake Ontario. When you’re visiting the tourist area of Port Credit with its many shops, restaurants, and cafes, you can easily pop down to the Trans Canada Trail for a stroll. It also meanders through the Brueckner Rhododendron Gardens in town, so you can go for a walk and admire all of the beautiful flowers, too.”

6. More Changes Are Coming

On August 26, 2017, Canada celebrated as the last sections of the Trans Canada Trail were connected. But that doesn’t mean that work has stopped. The TCT is planning to make segments of the Trail more accessible, repair and maintain some sections, and add new loops and spurs to the existing route in order to include more areas. Replacing interim sections of the trail that are presently roadways with safer greenways is another priority. Hopefully, the Trail will continue to grow and improve for all travelers and residents alike.

Trans Canada Trail Pro Tip

In case you’re feeling ambitious, the journey from St. John’s, Newfoundland, to Victoria, British Columbia would take two years, two months, and one week along the Trans Canada Trail, assuming you’re traveling about 18.5 miles a day. And you won’t be alone in this feat! A few adventurous women, including Sarah Jackson, Mel Vogel (joined mid-adventure by an unexpected companion, Malo the dog), filmmaker Diane Whelan, and Sonja Richmond (together with her partner Sean Morton) have logged tens of thousands of miles and many many years crisscrossing the country. No matter where you go, you’ll be following in fine footsteps.

Related Reading:

]]>
The Ultimate Ocean Adventure: Sleep Under Water On The Great Barrier Reef https://www.travelawaits.com/2561991/cruise-whitsundays-reefsuites/ Tue, 23 Feb 2021 12:44:12 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2561991/cruise-whitsundays-reefsuites/ Imagine boating out to the Great Barrier reef, spending the night underwater, then waking up to a breakfast of hot coffee, fresh fruit, and more “up top” before a few hours of snorkeling in virtual privacy. This experience can be yours when you overnight at ReefSuites Down Under.

]]>

“Watch, and you’ll see, someday I’ll be part of your world,” said Ariel. The Little Mermaid didn’t realize humans might prefer to join her under the sea. Her clamshell bed has never looked inviting, but there are two luxurious ReefSuites Down Under on Australia’s Great Barrier Reef, where humans can sleep 15 feet under the sea (no gills or SCUBA equipment required).

Clownfish on the Great Barrier Reef.

Tourism Port Douglas and Daintree

Sleep With The Fishes

The suites are part of a $10 million pontoon complex called Reefworld moored over The Great Barrier Reef. The floor-to-ceiling windows give new meaning to the saying sleep with the fishes. Guests can eyeball Maori wrasse as big as divers, spot bright orange clownfish — one may well be Nemo — or watch candy-colored parrotfish perform an underwater ballet.

Heart Reef in the Whitsundays on the Great Barrier Reef.

Tourism Whitsundays

Way Out Under The Sea

Underwater hotels are a growing trend, although mostly they are nearer to land than Reefsuites is, considering its location on the Outer Great Barrier Reef, around 45 miles from shore. Tourists reach the complex via a 3-hour cruise from Airlie Beach, whilst taking in the beauty of the Whitsundays Islands. Or they can board a two-hour cruise from Hamilton Island.


Most of the other people onboard are daytrippers. The pontoon itself reminded me of a resort’s aquatic facilities with sundecks, freshwater showers, changing rooms, air-conditioned spaces, a bar, and even massage services.

Room check-in is at 3 p.m., so after arriving in the late morning, you can enjoy the pontoon activities that help you experience and learn about the world’s most famous reef. The Great Barrier Reef (GBR) was declared a World Heritage Area in 1981 because of its outstanding universal value. ReefWorld ensures this beauty is more accessible than ever before.

On-deck relaxation on Reef Sleep.

Tourism and Events Queensland

Experiences For Non-Swimmers

Non-swimmers can still get close to the reef by entering the underwater viewing chamber or taking a semi-submersible boat ride. On these tours, guests see the same views as divers do of tropical fish and colorful coral. Another dry option is a helicopter ride over Heart Reef. This short trip isn’t just about seeing this romantically shaped and much-photographed reef. Flying over the Great Barrier Reef is an unforgettable experience. From the air, the reef looks like a mood ring with its ever-changing blue, green, and aquamarine hues.

Snorkeling And Diving

Snorkelers staying at ReefSuites will enjoy designated areas with ropes anchored to the ocean floor so it’s easy to pull themselves along. They can also join a guided Snorkel Safari to learn about the reef and identify the fish that can be seen later from the panoramic windows of the underwater suites.

I enjoy swimming, but being short-sighted, feel insecure in the ocean as I can’t see what’s beneath me. Reefworld provides optical masks, and this made a massive difference to my experience. The GBR is one of the seven wonders of the natural world and this first sighting of the coral gardens and darting fish was one of my most memorable travel experiences.

Certified instructors teach visitors how to scuba dive with as much hand-holding as they need. Experienced divers can venture further out to explore the canyons and the maze of tunnels, where they may encounter giant clams and even a massive Queensland grouper. His name is George, and he may visit you at the window of your Reefsuite later at night.

Couple in a Reef Sleep room.

Tourism and Events Queensland

Your Own Atlantis

After the daytrippers leave, guests have the pontoon to themselves. No need to dive to access your room. Instead, step down the gleaming white stairwell. Unless you feel claustrophobic in large aquariums, you’ll be fine in your air-conditioned suite. The area holds a queen-sized bed and has a full ensuite. The floor is partly glass so you can spot marine life beneath your feet, and the vast window seamlessly connects guests with the underwater world.

Lie in bed for hours mesmerized by the schools of tropical fish that dart and flit and flee. At night, switch on the UV blue light to illuminate the marine life swimming around you. With luck, you’ll receive a visit from George the grouper, who is so massive he will fill your window frame.

At Your Service

Guests are treated like VIPs from the moment they step onboard the catamaran taking them to Reefworld. A sign marks out their Reefsleep Only seating in the air-conditioned top deck. Once at the pontoon, they have dedicated staff looking after them. Beverages such as wine and beer are included in the package.

At sunset, enjoy drinks and canapes with some of the other guests. This is followed by a starlit dinner seated at a long table on the upper deck. A French chef creates dishes from local produce such as beef from Queensland’s Burdekin region, fruit and vegetables from Bowen (Bowen mangoes are to die for), sustainably caught tiger prawns, and reef fish.

Breakfast includes eggs to order and tropical fruits, plus the chance to sip coffee while staring out at the beauty of the reef. Go snorkeling again in virtual privacy before the daytrippers arrive. Checkout time for your room is midday, but you can spend a few hours after that relaxing on the deck before it’s time to leave the pontoon.

Additional Details

Day trips to Reefworld start at just over $200. The two-day Reefsuite experience, including the overnight stay, starts at just over $600 per person and includes all meals, drinks, morning and afternoon tea, a private guided snorkeling tour, and the semi-submersible tour. Where possible, book these experiences for quieter times after the daytrippers leave.

A less expensive stay is on the deck in one of the 12 specially designed waterproof swags (like tents with mattresses). Guests sleep under the stars with a choice of covers to either stargaze or block out the light. This two-day experience offers meals and drinks but not the chance to sleep under the sea. It starts at just under $500 per person.

For additional GBR and Australian adventure inspiration, consider:

]]>
How To Experience The World’s Highest Cliff Camping https://www.travelawaits.com/2561345/worlds-highest-cliff-camping-experience/ Sat, 06 Feb 2021 12:35:14 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2561345/worlds-highest-cliff-camping-experience/ A portaledge is a raft-like deployable platform that juts out from a cliff face. And yes, if you’re brave enough for camping in the sky, you can spend the night on one.

]]>
Cliff camping at Australia’s Mount Buffalo National Park.

Beyond the Edge is the highest commercial cliff camping experience in the world. Your rock-star moment comes when you look down from your portaledge attached to the side of a sheer 1,000-foot cliff face in Australia’s Mount Buffalo National Park.


What’s A Portaledge?

A portaledge is a raft-like deployable platform that juts out from a cliff face. The invention of this lightweight but robust structure enabled professional climbers to scale new heights. I know this because my son is interested in rock climbing and encouraged me to watch The Dawn Wall, the documentary of how Tommy Caldwell and Kevin Jorgeson free-climb Yosemite’s 3,000-foot Dawn Wall of El Capitan. Their 19-day climb was possible because they could use a portaledge as a base camp.

Adventure tourism companies offer the public less extreme but thrilling portaledge experiences. Tourists can enjoy a Cliffnic (lunch or dinner on a sheer rock face) in Colorado. In Germany, adults can experience rock-a-bye-baby cradle sleeps hanging from tree-tops, and in Wales, they can balance on cliff tops over the Irish Sea looking like teabags ready for dunking. But the Beyond the Edge experience ranks as the world’s highest portaledge tourist cliff-face stay.

How To Reach Your Cliff Camping Portaledge

Participants rappel down around 100 feet to the portaledge. Not all guests have climbing experience, so instructors train people in roping and give them plenty of practice until they’re comfortable enough to descend. Guides are at the portaledge to help guests settle in and remain camped at the top, where they are contactable at all times. They equip guests with radios and a whistle and check that their phones are working before the descent.

Cliff camping at Australia’s Mount Buffalo National Park.

Beyond the Edge

Who Is This Experience For?

Unleashed Unlimited’s Andrew Dawson, who founded the company with his brother, Howie, has 25 years of experience as a mountain climber. I contacted him to find out about any age restrictions. He said, “The experience requires only a moderate level of fitness and physical ability. Most commonly, participants are in their 30s, but we cater for all age groups.”

Room With A View

One participant described the experience as the “perfect balance of adrenaline rush and total bliss out.” There are phenomenal views of dramatic rock formations, imposing granite tors, and of the Ovens Valley floodplains, where you can sometimes see the Victorian Alps, the southernmost point of Australia’s Great Dividing Range. It’s common to see native birds, and you might even see a wedge-tailed eagle, Australia’s largest bird of prey, swoop past.

The sunset is behind the cliff and often creates a beautiful ambiance with the light it casts across the gorge after dinner.

Portaledges are perfect for stargazing because you’re way out in nature. With little light pollution, you can really appreciate the sparkling night sky. And the portaledges’ fly ceilings are optional. Dawson says most people choose not to have one. Without the fly, they can fully immerse themselves in the view.

“The sunrise is usually one of the highlights,” Dawson says, “as participants are treated to an unobstructed view as the sun pops out over the mountains on the horizon while they enjoy their morning coffee.”

Snap the ultimate photos of all this beauty, but don’t, whatever you do, drop your phone!

Cliff camping at Australia’s Mount Buffalo National Park.

Beyond the Edge

Sleeping Arrangements

Don’t argue too much about who gets to sleep on which side of the bed. You have two choices: against the wall or the fall. Initially, it seems like sleepwalkers or those who easily roll out of bed need not apply, but participants are harnessed in and tethered to a rope. In some ways, you are safer here than sleeping on the top of a double bunk — if you could just get the thought of the drop beneath out of your head.

Get Your Life In Perspective

There’s an enormous sense of achievement and a feeling that you can accomplish anything if you can do this. Dawson says the experience is unique as it combines a mix of adrenaline with a peaceful time for reflection and contemplation. The setting offers a silent, private world and has resulted in at least one wedding proposal on high.

Need-To-Know Basis

Yes, nature may call. There are toilets at the top of the cliff and devices on the portaledge.

Cliff camping at Australia’s Mount Buffalo National Park.

Beyond the Edge

How To Get Out Of There

It’s back up in the morning, but for those wishing to continue the adventure, there’s an optional descent where you rappel almost 1,000 feet down to the valley floor. This extreme drop is one of the world’s highest commercial abseils. This adrenalin rush is followed by a strenuous, multi-hour scramble through challenging terrain.

Know Before You Go

The Beyond the Edge cliff camping experience runs from November through to May and is weather-dependent. The cost is $620 per person and includes meals. Should you dare to take on The Descent, the experience costs an additional $345 per person with all equipment supplied.

Mount Buffalo National Park is a four-hour drive from Melbourne. The park offers miles of hiking through stunning scenery, wildlife such as wombats and lyrebirds, and flora, including snow gums and wildflowers. Besides rock climbing, rappelling, and hang gliding, the area is a family-friendly snow play, toboggan, and cross country ski area in winter. There’s also plenty of accommodation that doesn’t involve sleeping on a ledge. For more grounded stays with views overlooking wilderness areas, see my picks for Australia’s seven best luxury lodges.

]]>
Going Underground: Tips For Exploring The World’s Longest Cave System https://www.travelawaits.com/2560537/mammoth-cave-tips-for-exploring/ Sat, 16 Jan 2021 13:34:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2560537/mammoth-cave-tips-for-exploring/ Exploring the world’s longest underground cave system isn’t necessarily for the faint of heart, but surprisingly, Mammoth Caves can be seen many ways, including accessible tours. Here’s what you need to know.

]]>
The entrance to Mammoth Cave in Kentucky.

The guide turned off his flashlight and plunged us into darkness — real darkness. This was a soggy, solid, tarry blackness that had been thrown over us like a heavy, woolen overcoat. I put my hand in front of my eyes. Though only a few inches away, I could not see it. Nothing. It was the weirdest feeling and, had I not known the guide would soon switch on his flashlight, I admit it would have been a bit scary.

I was 200 feet underground in Kentucky exploring a tiny fraction of the world’s longest underground cave system.

Mammoth Cave, 85 miles south of Louisville, Kentucky, is the underground part of the 53,000-acre Mammoth Cave National Park. The cave system actually extends well beyond today’s park boundaries with 365 miles of surveyed passageways and, potentially, the same again yet to be discovered. This makes Mammoth Cave easily the longest cave system in the world — more than double the length of the next longest known system.

Mammoth Cave has been known to humans for quite some time. Archeologists have discovered human activity as far as 10 miles into the cave system from as long as 4,000 years ago. The cave was rediscovered in 1798, established as a National Park in 1941 (when only 40 miles of passageways had been formally surveyed), and was designated a World Heritage Site in 1981. Nine years later, it became part of a larger International Biosphere Reserve joining the likes of Yellowstone. Today, half a million visitors annually visit the cave on guided tours deep below Kentucky’s rolling hills to see spectacular rock formations and evidence of man’s activities here over the millennia. Here are my tips for those who want to experience Mammoth Cave for themselves.

The entrance sign to Mammoth Cave National Park.

Chris Moore

Choose The Right Tour

There are a number of different tours available with varying degrees of difficulty and accessibility. The good news: There is a tour (the “ACCESSIBLE TOUR”) designed for persons with disabilities or limited physical mobility. Access is via an elevator, there are no stairs, and the tour is on a prepared walkway. There is a short “Self Guided Tour” for those who prefer to wander at their own pace and seventeen or so guided tours of varying effort and duration.

The most “extreme” tour offered is a whole day underground crawling on your belly through tight passages, covering six miles and 500 stairs. I didn’t fancy impersonating a worm for six hours and looked for another one. I selected the guided two-mile, moderate, 160-stair “Extended Historic Tour,” and two hours or so later, I knew I had made a good choice.

Inside Mammoth Cave in Kentucky.

Chris Moore

Into The Cave

Having purchased tickets at the visitor center, I waited outside with about 15 of my fellow intrepid explorers for our guides to arrive and walk us the few hundred yards down to the cave’s “Historic Entrance.” Legend has it that around 1797, a local hunter was pursuing an injured bear when he discovered the entrance to the cave. Two hundred years later, I was walking in his footsteps descending into a new, if somewhat dark and not so brave — at least in my case — world. We descended 52 steps complete with handrail to enter the cave. If this was a “moderate” tour, I was liking it already.

The guides (one led and the other was at the back chasing up the laggards) used flashlights, though they really did not need to as the public tour route had dim electric lighting installed. No bright fluorescents here but enough to not only see your way but also strategically placed to effectively illuminate and pick out stalactites and markings on the cave walls. Only when the guide turned off our 20th-century lighting for a few moments and lit his oil lamp did we begin to get a feel of how those first adventurers explored the cave. It took some seconds for my eyes to get used to the dim, yellowy illumination, casting long smoky shadows on the rough cave walls. It was eerily quiet, too, with only the occasional drip of water breaking the silence. In some places we walked on recently man-made paths, at other times we trod the stony paths left behind by previous explorers.

Inside Mammoth Cave in Kentucky.

Chris Moore

From Mining To Healthcare, This Cave Has Seen It All

The guides would stop frequently to point out items of interest. We learned about the history of the mine. Native Americans excavated flint for weapons and minerals and later, as we stood in the cavernous Rotunda, we saw where slaves mined cave soil. They recovered Calcium Nitrate from the soil by leaching it out in large wooden vats before pumping it up to the surface where it was converted to saltpeter — a raw material for making gunpowder. The wooden vats and a string of hollowed-out wooden piping still remain. The saltpeter production has long ceased but in the silence, it’s easy to imagine the throngs of men working in dark, dingy, dusty conditions to make explosives for the war of 1812.

We learned about the first official tour guides, slaves who escorted well-to-do folk around the cave in the 19th century. Their names, including “W.A.Bransford 1899,” are now inscribed on the walls for all to see, and their fame lives on as they were the first to document new passageways and cross the mythically named “Bottomless Pit.”

We learned about another owner, a medical doctor, who in the early 1840s established the first (and only) underground tuberculosis hospital believing the high humidity (95 percent) and constant cave temperature (around 54 F) would be a cure for this prevalent killer. A number of volunteers signed up to live in the cave in small brick structures hoping that life in the damp and dark would cure their ills. After only a few months, a number had died, so the rest left. The brick structures remain and are a grim reminder of this failed experiment.

Amazingly, there are about 150 different species found in the cave, many of which cannot see and are translucent and often very tiny — so don’t expect to see them, either. We did spot a couple of bats but the tours purposefully route visitors away from the main areas bats congregate in order to avoid disturbing them.

Inside Mammoth Cave in Kentucky.

Chris Moore

Take As Little As Possible

Although this tour was described as moderate, it really was not very difficult. Hiking boots are a must as there is walking over rocks. I didn’t have to clamber over rocks or walk bent over (unless you are seven feet tall, then there might be a couple of tight spots) but there was one short section delightfully called “Fat Man’s Misery” where a fast-flowing river had carved about a two-foot-wide passage through thigh-high rock that we had to shuffle through. Much of the two miles I covered was going from one cavernous opening to another, so at no time did I feel claustrophobic.

It’s a good idea to research which tour is best for you ahead of time so you can prepare well. There are a few lockers available just outside the visitor center and the large parking lot is right there, too, so you can leave your belongings behind. Take as little as possible would be my recommendation, having unnecessarily lugged my camera and two lenses around. You cannot use flash photography nor take a tripod, so good photography is challenging. Take only water (food is not permitted) and dress in easy-to-remove layers. Hiking boots will definitely make the trip more comfortable.

Inside Mammoth Cave in Kentucky.

Chris Moore

Once Inside, Leave Everything Behind

Things have changed since the first cave tourists descended here two hundred years ago. Not only are we not allowed to write our names (or anything else for that matter) on the walls, we cannot touch the walls and the reason is simple: The cave is such a delicate ecosystem that our unthinking actions can easily upset the fragile balance. This concern was clearly illustrated when, upon leaving the cave, we had to pass through a shallow disinfectant trough to ensure we weren’t carrying fungal spores on our boots that may spread White Nose Syndrome to other bat colonies.

Would I do it again? Yes, in a heartbeat, and this time I would leave my camera behind. But I’m still not ready to slither six miles on my belly. Fascinated by caves (or headed to Kentucky)? Consider:

]]>
9 Fantastic Experiences During A 3-Day Tour Of The Bolivia Salt Flats https://www.travelawaits.com/2559945/bolivia-salt-flats-experiences/ Mon, 04 Jan 2021 00:32:35 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2559945/bolivia-salt-flats-experiences/ Long hours in a 4x4 bouncing along dirt tracks through the Eduardo Avaroa Andean Fauna National Reserve, stays in salt hotels, and picnics on otherworldly terrain. Here’s what to expect during a bucket-list Bolivian Salt Flat tour.

]]>
The dreamy Uyuni Salt Flats in Bolivia.

A three-day tour of the Bolivia Salt Flats is an unforgettable experience. Starting in Uyuni, Bolivia, the tour includes the surreal expanse of the Bolivia salt flats. Beyond the Salar de Uyuni are colorful lakes, steaming geysers on the Siloli Desert, and plenty of flamingos all viewed with the stellar backdrop of the Andes. The unique natural spectacles witnessed on a three-day tour through this remote region of Bolivia make a vivid and lasting impression.

Read More: New to the Bolivia Salt Flats? Consider our article to find out everything you need to know about How to Visit the Bolivia Salt Flats before you consider planning your three-day trip, then consider these nine fantastic experiences that are included on most three-day tours of the flats.

Know Before You Go

There are plenty of tour operators in Uyuni. It is important to know your non-negotiables before booking. How many people are you comfortable traveling with in the jeep? Are you set on having a double room each night?

In my experience, you have to be willing to go with the flow, but it is important to be clear about your needs when booking. Asking questions about the age of the vehicle you will be traveling in and hotel specifications may help you get a more customized tour. My jeep had seven passengers and one driver/mechanic who spoke no English.

As stated in this article, even if you book with one agency, you may end up traveling with another. It is worth doing some research and reading reviews before booking your tour. Full disclosure: I can’t personally recommend my tour agency as there were many things that went askew but this agency, Late Bolivia, gets strong reviews. So yes, it takes a bit of gumption to head out on this tour as there are some long hours in the 4×4 jeep bouncing along dirt tracks through deserts and the Eduardo Avaroa Andean Fauna National Reserve, past landscapes that are stark and unique. Don’t expect luxury on this tour but the trip of a lifetime that you will be telling tales of for years to come.

Please note that this trip is not wheelchair accessible, and keep in mind that the rainy season on the Salar de Uyuni is from January through April.

Reflections of clouds and cars at the Uyuni Salt Flats in Bolivia.

San Hoyano / Shutterstock

1. Play With Perspective On The Bolivia Salt Flats

The Salar de Uyuni is the largest salt flat in the world at 4,086 square miles. Imagine an endless expanse of blinding whiteness, with hexagonal shapes designed on the salt. This vast whiteness leads to a total lack of perspective that offers photographic opportunities galore! Bring your imagination and a few props such as a plastic dinosaur or a Pringles can, and create some astonishing photos. There are few places in the world to have this much fun playing with perspective!

Pro Tip: In the rainy season, the reflections of the sky and clouds on the flooded salt flats make for another unique way to photograph the Salar de Uyuni.

Isla Incahuasi at the Uyuni Salt Flats in Bolivia.

Olga Gavrilova / Shutterstock

2. Climb Isla Incahuasi, Fish Island

As the 4×4 jeep zooms along the expansive white flat floor of the ancient sea, an island comes into view. This island, Isla Incahuasi, is a rocky outcrop covered in giant cacti and rock formations made of petrified coral. Pay a small fee to climb the steep path to the top of the island. Make sure you are wearing running shoes or hiking boots as the path is narrow and rocky. The path leading to the summit of Isla Incahuasi is full of ideal nooks and crannies to take marvelous photographs across the Salar de Uyuni. Not surprisingly, the sweeping views in all directions from the peak are spectacular.

Pro Tip: During the rainy season (January through April), the Salt Flat is flooded and Isla Incahuasi is inaccessible. Organized tours often replace this stop on the tour with a night of stargazing.

The Stone Tree at the Uyuni Salt Flats in Bolivia.

SL-Photography / Shutterstock

3. Photograph The Stone Tree, Arbol De Piedra

The Siloli Desert at 14,927 feet is the highest and driest desert on the planet. It is known for its unique rock formations, and unbelievably and strangely rising from the shifting sand below is the Stone Tree, or Arbol de Piedra. The stone tree is impressive for both its size, at just over 16 feet tall, and its shape. Erosion and wind, over millions of years, have sculpted this lava rock formation into an unforgettable tree shape with its thin “trunk.” Stand beside one of the most iconic locations in Bolivia and snap away.

Flamingoes at the Uyuni Salt Flats in Bolivia.

Rush Photography Calgary / Shutterstock

4. Observe Flamingos And Other Desert Wildlife

Seeing hundreds of flamingos in their natural habitat is a highlight on this three-day tour through remote Bolivia. Three species of flamingos can be spotted: the Chilean, Andean, and James. The flamingos are seen feeding at the lakes on the algae. Flamingos are born with white and grey feathers which turn pink from a natural pink dye in the food that they eat. No wonder they love the Red Lake, Laguna Colorada!

In the Siloli Desert, the viscacha is another species to be on the lookout for. Its appearance is rather adorable — like a cross between a chinchilla and a rabbit. How on earth do these animals survive in a landscape so dry and stark? Viscachas survive on the water contained in their food and eat lichen, moss, and grass. They are well camouflaged, but if you happen to have a picnic on the Siloli Desert, I bet a viscacha will be curiously peering at you from behind a rock!

Laguna Colorada near the Uyuni Salt Flats in Bolivia.

Elzbieta Sekowska / Shutterstock

5. Stand In Awe By Laguna Colorada, The Red Lake

The most stunning sight on this tour of the Uyuni Salt Flats, besides the salt flats themselves, is the Laguna Colorada. It’s absolutely jaw-dropping. The expanse of colored water reflecting the sky and the Andes is a photographer’s dream. The Laguna Colorada attracts the three types of flamingos mentioned above, which love to feed on its algae. The water, flamingos, and mountains make for a hypnotic sight that is hard to pull yourself away from, despite the howling winds.

The water in the Laguna Colorada changes color between deep blue and dark red. Legend has it that the water is the blood of the Gods, even though scientifically the color is known to be caused by sediments and algae. It is hard not to pause and ponder this legend standing before blood-red water in this isolated location in southwestern Bolivia.

Pro Tip: Protect your camera and cover your legs and arms, as the blasting winds will cover you in a layer of sand.

A hotel built of salt blocks at the Uyuni Salt Flats in Bolivia.

Alberto Loyo / Shutterstock

6. Stay Overnight In A Salt Hotel

Imagine staying in a hotel made of salt blocks where the furniture, walls, and floors are all created from the local environment. The most luxurious of the Salt Hotels, Palacio de Sal, is on the edge of the Bolivia Salt Flats, not too far from Uyuni.

On the three-day Salar de Uyuni tour, the accommodation each of the two nights is in a salt hotel. The floors are made of loose salt, which is reminiscent of walking through sand, and the walls are clearly made of solid blocks of salt. It is quite the experience and one not to be missed in this part of the world.

When booking your tour, inquire about the quality or set up of the salt hotels where you will be staying. The more remote the town, the less luxurious the salt hotel. The sleeping arrangements, ranging from double rooms to dorm rooms shared with other jeep0loads of travelers, make for part of the adventure. Each stay in a salt hotel contributes to the livelihood of the locals in these remote communities.

Pro Tip: Upon arrival each evening, there is a welcome snack, tea, and coffee. Dinners at the hotel are included in the price of the tour.

Geysers at Sol De Manana near the Uyuni Salt Flats in Bolivia.

rbuchber / Shutterstock

7. Marvel At Shooting Geysers At Sol De Manana

Named after the morning sun, these geysers are best viewed as the sun rises. Be prepared to rise very early in the morning to arrive just in time to marvel at this geyser and geothermal area at 16,145 feet. The spectacle and sound of hissing steam shooting up from the ground to 50 feet high are remarkable. Bubbling mud pots and the smell of sulfur complete this otherworldly experience.

Pro Tip: There are no boardwalks at Sol de Manana, thus it is up to the visitor to carefully navigate walking past the mud pools and fumaroles.

Laguna Verde near the Uyuni Salt Flats in Bolivia.

javarman / Shutterstock

8. Be Amazed By Laguna Verde, The Green Lake

Laguna Verde, a striking emerald green lake, is in the extreme southwest corner of Bolivia close to Chile and is the last stop before the jeep drops travelers off at the Chilean border and heads back to Uyuni.

This glistening emerald lake is yet another picturesque landscape on the trip made even more remarkable by the massive Volcano Licancabur looming behind. The color of the water is once again created by a concoction of minerals it contains. One of those elements is in fact arsenic which is the reason you won’t find any flamingos at Laguna Verde.

Marvel at Volcano Licancabur, which soars skyward and reaches a peak of 19,409 feet. NASA experiments have been carried out on its peaks, as scientists believe that the atmosphere and temperatures here are similar to those on Mars.

The Salvador Dali Desert in Bolivia.

saiko3p / Shutterstock

9. Get Surreal In The Salvador Dali Desert

It’s the colors. Gorgeous ridges along the mountains with shades of gold, purple, and rust. The Salvador Dali Desert is found within the Eduardo Avaroa Andean Fauna National Reserve and is just like a Dalí painting. Surreal. Stand in the barren wind-swept desert and marvel at the shades of color.

Pro Tips

  • Water: Bring water and a water bottle. Water is available at mealtime, but it is a good idea to bring a 5-liter bottle from Uyuni so that you can replenish your water bottle as needed.
  • Language: Make sure that your guide speaks some English.
  • Return Trip: Some travelers make the long, bouncy journey directly back to Uyuni while others cross into Chile. Entering Chile is an option that is prearranged when booking the tour.
  • Border Crossing And Leaving Bolivia: Make sure you have the piece of paper from Immigration that you received on entering Bolivia and a small amount of Bolivian money left to exit the country. At this remote border crossing, all the travelers exiting Bolivia were asked to pay 15 BOB ($2 USD).
  • Entering Chile: The Chilean driver will meet you, guide you through the border crossing, and drive you to San Pedro de Atacama, Chile.
]]>
Adventures Await At Mexico’s Xcaret Parks: Everything You Need To Know https://www.travelawaits.com/2559856/xcaret-parks-best-things-to-experience/ Tue, 22 Dec 2020 00:40:13 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2559856/xcaret-parks-best-things-to-experience/ Xcaret parks are fantasy wonderlands backdropped by serpentine waterways and lush tropical jungle. Here’s what to enjoy and when to go.

]]>
The Scenic Lighthouse waterslide at Xel-Ha.

Six nature-driven theme parks in Riviera Maya promise extraordinary experiences from leisurely to bold. Imagine yourself zip-lining through rings of fire, rafting in underground caves, floating in a river of mud, or holding onto your wits and balance through a maze of optical illusions. These are fantasy wonderlands backdropped by serpentine waterways and lush tropical jungle. They are daring and, OMG, they are fun! Don’t hesitate — all the experiences are perfectly safe.

Created by Grupo Xcaret, the six stunning, eco-friendly parks are Xcaret by Mexico!, Xel-Ha, Xplor, Xplor Fuego, Xenses, and Xoximilco. (The X is pronounced “sh.”) Each one offers totally different experiences on land and water. The parks are scattered throughout Riviera Maya between Cancun and Tulum in the Mexican state of Quintana Roo.

First, a recommendation: Anchor your stay at the all-inclusive Hotel Xcaret Mexico in Playa del Carmen, and you’ll have free admission and transportation to and from all the parks. Reservations are required at some of the parks, so check with the hotel concierge.

Hotel Xcaret Mexico is a sprawling resort nestled between the Caribbean Sea and verdant flora, and ribboned with pools and rivers. Swathed in contemporary Mexican art and architecture, the 900-room complex is interspersed with 10 restaurants, eight bars, and Muluk Spa. Accommodations include family suites and adult-only buildings. My garden suite balcony, appointed with a low-slung hammock and stone bathing tub, invited serious lounging as I gleefully watched monkeys playing in the trees.

Here’s a rundown on the Xcaret parks and what you should know to plan your itinerary:

Aerial view of Hotel Xcaret Mexico.

Grupo Xcaret

Xcaret By Mexico!

The original and most emblematic of the Xcaret parks, Xcaret By Mexico pays tribute to the country’s culture and heritage. More than 50 attractions capture a wide variety of interests. Among them are recreational pursuits, animal and bird exhibits, conservation programs, archaeological sites, live musical and theatrical entertainment, a replica Mayan village, and specialty restaurants and shops. Plus, you’ll find hiking trails and sandy beaches. Food and beverages are included with Xcaret Plus admission. If you’re staying at Hotel Xcaret Mexico, you can ride the canal boat to the park.

Can’t-Miss Adventures

Visit the sea turtle rescue and rehabilitation center, and stroll through the open-air aviary home to more than 1,500 exotic birds. Browse the Museum of Mexican Folk Art and hop aboard a raft on the Paradise River for a meandering cruise through the landscape. In the evening, head over to the Gran Tlachco theater for a dazzling performance of Xcaret Mexico Espectacular. The stage production features 300 dancers and musicians enacting Mexico’s story from pre-Hispanic days to the present.

Daring Adventure

Don a life jacket and jump into any of three underground freshwater rivers. A gentle current guides you through labyrinths of caves and tunnels. Openings in the rock formations provide natural light, so you can see where you’re headed.

The Scenic Lighthouse waterslide at Xel-Ha.

Grupo Xcaret

Xel-Ha

An eco-adventure waterpark built around an inlet of the Caribbean Sea, Xel-Ha just might be the world’s largest natural aquarium. Aquatic activities are the focus here, primarily swimming and snorkeling, but there are also slides, high jumps, and water zip-lines. You also can visit the manatee sanctuary and the remains of an ancient Mayan port city. When it’s time for a break, seek out the tranquility of the hidden beaches and hammock gardens. Life vests, snorkel gear, and bicycles are provided. Buffet, snacks, and nonalcoholic beverages are included with admission.

Can’t-Miss Adventures

Hike or take the Jungle Train to the start of the river, then step into a one- or two-person inner tube for a relaxing mile-long float. If you like, stop along the way to climb up a cliff and jump into the water, traverse a rope bridge, or grab onto a zip-line. A snorkeler’s paradise, Xel-Ha is a memorable destination with more than 70 diverse aquatic species, including sea turtles and stingrays. Look for the red flags that mark areas especially rich in marine life.

Daring Adventure

Climb the 160-plus stairs to the top of the Scenic Lighthouse for a panoramic view of the park and the sea beyond. Choose one of four spiral waterslides, two slow-moving and two fast, that shoot you into a cenote (the pond-like openings to the area’s subterranean bodies of water) at the bottom. The faster the slide, the more intense the ride.

River exploration at Xplor in Mexico.

Grupo Xcaret

Xplor And Xplor Fuego

Xplor and Xplor Fuego are dual identities of a day and night adventure playground. The park is carved into a rocky landscape millions of years in the making, helped along by a charging asteroid. Adrenaline-rushing thrills beckon on land, in water, above the treetops, and down to subterranean wonders. The adventures intensify at sunset, when Xplor becomes Xplor Fuego. Torches and bonfires illuminate the park’s same attractions for dramatic and mysterious effect. Safety harnesses, life jackets, and helmets are provided. A buffet, snacks, and nonalcoholic drinks are included with admission.

Can’t-Miss Adventures

Take the wheel of a powerful amphibious vehicle, and feel the speed as you travel through rugged jungle trails, across hanging rope bridges, and into flooded caverns. Swim or raft along underground rivers, where the millenary rock formations and galaxies of stalactites are breathtaking. Soar above the treetops on the highest zip-lines in Riviera Maya, and end with a vigorous plunge into a cenote. If you’re new to zip-lining or just cautious, try the Hammock Splash, which seats you upright in a hanging mesh cocoon.

The Underground Expedition at Xplor in Mexico.

Grupo Xcaret

Daring Adventures

Xplor’s newest activity, Underground Expedition, is a trek through spectacular underground scenery, shallow rivers, water slides, and surprising obstacles. Choose between two paths, one physically challenging and the other one contemplative. Bring your water shoes.

Xplor Fuego’s zip-line circuit, the only one open at night in Riviera Maya, flies you through a ring of fire. It’s okay if you scream.

The enormous boulder fountain at the entrance to Xenses.

Pamela Dittmer McKuen

Xenses

The first clue you are entering an unusual world is at the Xenses entrance: An enormous boulder seems to be supported by a water jet spouting from a shallow pool. It’s only one of many sensory deceptions and delights at Xenses amusement and activity park, where nothing is as it seems. Your visit is filled with aquatic, terrestrial, and aerial conquests, and crazy photo ops. How about a clean-water drinking fountain built into a toilet fixture — will you imbibe?

A mud bat at Xenses in Mexico.

Grupo Xcaret

Can’t-Miss Adventures

Float lazily down a mud river or a salt river, or both. Stroll the Town at Xenses, where walking along a charming streetscape feels like an arduous uphill climb. Your quadriceps are quivering, and you’ve stumbled a few times — only to discover you’ve been on level ground all along!

The Xensatorium is a pitch-dark tunnel that bores through various ecosystems like forest, desert, and savanna as perceived by senses other than sight. Go barefoot — all the better to feel the sand, smooth rock, and water beneath your feet. The tunnel is a tad scary if you’re claustrophobic, but secluded staffers are watching and will lead you out if you need help.

The writer in the Bird Flight harness at Xenses.

Grupo Xcaret

Daring Adventure

You’ll literally feel like you are flying while strapped horizontally into the Bird Flight harness. Spread your wings — I mean your arms. Fortunately, you don’t have to flap them. The zip-line does the work and ends with a splashdown.

A floating fiesta at Xoximilco in Mexico.

Grupo Xcaret

Xoximilco

When you’re ready to party, Xoximilco promises a floating fiesta. It’s a dinner cruise, Mexican style. Start the evening with carnival games and live entertainment on the boldly decorated plaza. Then board a brightly lit trajinera, or flat-bottomed boat, that floats along scenic canals through the park. As you dine on traditional Mexican fare and perhaps down a tequila shot or two, you are serenaded with musical genres like mariachi, ranchero, and norteno. Congenial hosts keep up the steady banter with fun facts, jokes, songs, dance moves, and drinking games. The event runs about three hours.

Dinner consists of tasting portions of more than two dozen traditional foods including ceviche, chicken tamales, shrimp with tamarind sauce, and Oaxacan milled chocolate. The bar, consisting of tequila, beer, soft drinks, and fruity beverages, is open all night. Request the vegetarian option when you purchase your tickets. Each boat seats 20 guests. Wheelchair service is available.

Can’t-Miss Adventure

The entire Xoximilco experience is an adventure in Mexican gastronomy, music, and tradition. You’ll be singing and dancing the night away!

Daring Adventures

Eat the chapulines, also known as fried baby crickets. They are one of the most popular snack foods in Mexico and considered a delicacy. Another adventure: Try tequila in a new way, perhaps changuirongo-style, which mixes tequila with orange soda.

Pro Tips

Don’t bring a camera, which can easily be damaged or water-logged. Instead, buy an Experience Photo Pass. You get a coded wristband and a map of strategic photo spots. When you come upon one, scan your wristband and strike a pose. Your “Xelfies” are taken automatically. Some parks also have photographers stationed at scenic settings. If you do carry your own electronics, secure them in waterproof cases.

When To Go

Riviera Maya’s near-perfect weather is popular with vacationers year-round, especially in the summer and winter. To avoid the peak crowds at Xcaret parks, plan your visit in the fall or spring, except around Easter.

A Note About Accessibility

Many areas of the parks are wheelchair accessible, including one lane of the Xenses Xensatorium. For water activities, private lifeguards may be available for hire. Inquire when making reservations.

]]>
How Much It’ll Cost You To Visit The Titanic In 2021 https://www.travelawaits.com/2479052/how-much-to-visit-titanic-in-2021/ Thu, 03 Dec 2020 21:53:49 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2479052/how-much-to-visit-titanic-in-2021/ Wondering how to visit the Titanic, or if it’s even possible? OceanGate Expeditions has an answer for you, and it could lead to the adventure of a lifetime.

]]>
RMS Titanic wreckage.

It’s the adventure of a lifetime: a journey through the chilly depths to the wreck of the RMS Titanic. The Titanic has captivated us since April 14, 1912, when the “unsinkable ship” collided with an iceberg in the North Atlantic and was lost beneath the chilly waves.

She wasn’t discovered until 1985, and now, 36 years later, the OceanGate Titanic Survey Expedition is making it possible for you to see the Titanic with your own eyes. Starting in 2021, you can descend to the wreck site in a state-of-the-art submersible and explore the remains of the most famous ship in modern history.


How Much Does It Cost Per Person?

If you want to explore the Titanic firsthand, planning ahead is key. You need to apply to be a Mission Specialist, OceanGate’s term for someone who is part of the submersible team. You’ll also have to pay $125,000 for the entire journey. Although the cost is arguably steep, what OceanGate is offering is an experience that has been impossible until now, and space will likely be very limited.

Your adventure starts in St. John’s, Newfoundland. You will be trained and coached before and during the entire 10-day journey. As a Mission Specialist, you will have multiple opportunities to help crewmembers onboard, support the expedition and diver operations team, and be a team member to all onboard.

The crew consists of mission specialists, content experts, pilot and support crew, vessel crew, technical experts, film crew, and a doctor, all totaling about 50 or 60 people on board during the mission.

What Do You Get For The Price?

Every Mission Specialist will have their own private room. Dive Support Ships are built for comfort and efficiency, but they are also fairly spartan. OceanGate’s Titanic Survey Expedition is focused on giving Titanic enthusiasts a meaningful, personal interaction with the wreck, and the dive support ship will reflect that singular goal.

You’ll have all of your meals covered on the dive support ship, as well as accommodation, gear, and ground transportation in St. John’s. Your airfare to St. John’s is not included in the price. You’ll be intensely briefed on how to support the mission, have a chance to chat one-on-one with Titanic experts and enthusiasts, and — the highlight of the trip — dive down to the Titanic itself. OceanGate offers cancellation credits that vary depending on the circumstances.

What Else Will You See During A Dive?

The waters surrounding the Titanic are home to many bioluminescent animals that glow brighter as you get away from the light at the water’s surface, and one of the most interesting aspects of the Titanic dive is how the wreck itself has been repurposed.

Several different species have taken up residence in the wreck, transforming it into a deep-sea reef. In a way, it’s a lovely footnote to the Titanic story — that life can flourish in her corridors and rooms once again.

The inaugural OceanGate Titanic Survey Expedition promises to be an incredible adventure, a chance to see the monumental sunken Titanic before she succumbs to the harsh environment of the ocean floor. If there was ever a bucket list trip, this is it!

Want to visit magically eerie waters closer to home? Explore Florida’s glowing coastline in a see-through kayak.

]]>
Incredible Ways To Experience Africa’s Victoria Falls, Plus Where To Stay https://www.travelawaits.com/2557943/incredible-ways-to-experience-victoria-falls/ Thu, 29 Oct 2020 14:48:00 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2557943/incredible-ways-to-experience-victoria-falls/ Victoria Falls -- a UNESCO World Heritage site, one of the Seven Natural Wonders of the World, and the greatest curtain of falling water on the planet -- is truly a bucket-list destination. There are numerous activities in the area to keep even the most ardent adventure seeker busy.

]]>
Victoria Falls on the border between Zambia and Zimbabwe.

The Zambezi River forms the border between Zambia and Zimbabwe. Starting as a tiny bubbling spring in far northwestern Zambia, the river flows through flood plains, swamps, and rapids. About 745 miles into its journey, the river grows to a great water course, almost 1.5 miles wide.

It is here that the Zambezi reaches Victoria Falls, a UNESCO World Heritage site, one of the Seven Natural Wonders of the World, and the greatest curtain of falling water on the planet. Twice as wide and twice as deep as Niagara Falls, Victoria Falls spans the width of the Zambezi River, where it crashes over a sheer precipice, plummeting 355 feet into the gorge below. In the height of the rainy season, 287,476 gallons of water per second surge over the edge, and tall columns of spray can be seen from miles away, giving rise to the traditional Zambian name, Mosi-oa-Tunya, or “the smoke that thunders.” The sheer scale and power of the falls never cease to awe and astound.

The Zambian and Zimbabwean sides offer very different views of the falls, so if you have time, it’s worth visiting both sides to fully appreciate the natural wonder.

Aside from the lure of the falls themselves, there are numerous activities to keep even the most ardent adventure seeker busy.

White water rafting at Victoria Falls.

Sarah Kingdom

Things To Do On The Zambian Side Of The Falls

Whitewater Rafting

Spend a day rafting down what is probably the wildest commercial whitewater in the world. A rafting adventure on the Zambezi River provides an adrenaline rush that’s not to be missed. Downstream from Victoria Falls, the Zambezi River boasts miles of deep, zigzagging channels, and the incredible volume of water guarantees an exhilarating day of whitewater rafting.

Your day will start with a hike down to the Boiling Pot, a massive whirlpool at the base of the falls, where you will clamber aboard your raft and set off. Although stretches of the route are designated high-octane Class V rapids, there are several areas of scenic, calm water where you’ll get the chance to swim alongside the raft for a bit. Good fitness levels are essential for this activity.

The African Queen on a sunset cruise.

Livingstone’s Adventure

Sunset Cruise

A visit to Victoria Falls would not be complete without a river cruise, preferably at sunset, and The African Queen is a wonderful one. You’ll travel at a stately speed up the Zambezi River above the falls, catching glimpses of hippos and crocodiles while being plied with cold drinks and tasty snacks by your ever-attentive waiter.

Microlighting over Victoria Falls.

Batoka Sky

Microlighting

If flying over the falls in something resembling a couple of garden chairs attached to a beach umbrella with a lawnmower engine for propulsion is your cup of tea, then microlighting is definitely for you! While a microlight may look as fragile as a dragonfly, it is far stronger than it appears, and in the hands of a passionate and experienced pilot, it is one of the most breathtaking ways to see Victoria Falls. This is an activity for the adventurous.

Helicopter rides over Victoria Falls.

Batoka Sky

Helicopter Ride

If microlighting sounds a little too adventurous for you, then you can always opt for a spectacular helicopter flight, a definite bucket-list activity. The views are breathtaking and will give you a new perspective of the landscape below. You’ll have a bird’s-eye view of elephants crossing the river and pods of hippos lazily floating in the water below, and, as you fly over the Mosi-oa-Tunya National Park, you’ll look directly down on its wildlife.

Canoeing near Victoria Falls.

Makora Quest

Canoeing

If you prefer a moderate dose of adventure, sign up for a privately guided canoeing safari on the Zambezi, upstream from the falls. Paddling between the Mosi-oa-Tunya National Park on the Zambian side and the Zambezi National Park on the Zimbabwean side, you’ll glide past elephants, pods of hippos, and plenty of birds. As you head downstream, going with the flow of the river, you won’t even need to paddle much!

The Royal Zambezi Express on the Victoria Falls Bridge.

Bushtracks Adventures

Dinner On A Steam Train

A ride on the Royal Livingstone Express is an incredible experience and a trip back in time to the luxury and grandeur of the era of steam trains. A red-carpet welcome awaits as you mount the stairs to the train. Wandering through the beautifully restored carriages, you’ll start the journey in the elegant lounge car. As the train sets off, you’ll nibble on smoked salmon canapes and enjoy a fascinating, humorous, and informative talk about the history of the train, the bridge, Livingstone, and Zambia in general. The train makes its way to the Victoria Falls Bridge, where you’ll disembark to view the falls, and those who are interested can visit the driver in his compartment. Boarding the train again, you’ll move into the dining car for a delicious five-course dinner as the train gathers speed and heads off into the night.

Bungee jumping at Victoria Falls.

Sarah Kingdom

Bungee Jumping

Bungee jumping off the Victoria Falls Bridge provides the ultimate adrenaline rush. At 360 feet, it is the highest commercial bridge jump in the world, and the setting is spectacular. Even if you are not brave enough to make the jump yourself, it is worth stopping to watch those who are!

The Victoria Falls Bridge in Africa.

Royal Livingstone Hotel

Bridge Tour

Take a behind-the-scenes look at the famous Victoria Falls Bridge on a guided tour. While he never visited the falls and died before construction began, Cecil Rhodes (the instigator of the Cape to Cairo Railway Project) was presented with plans for a Zambezi River crossing, drew a line across the Boiling Pot (the point directly below the falls), and declared that that was where he wanted a bridge. Rhodes envisaged the spray from the falls landing on the trains as they crossed the bridge, and for many years after the bridge’s completion, trains would stop for a few minutes in the center of the bridge so that his dream could be realized.

On the guided bridge tour, you’ll be attached to the bridge by a series of cables and will walk beneath it with your guide on the original catwalk while learning about its construction and history. This is not a strenuous activity, but it is not advised if you are nervous about heights.

Day Trip To Botswana’s Chobe National Park

Chobe National Park has some of the greatest wildlife of any African park. The park is best known for its elephants, numbering around 120,000. On this unforgettable day trip, you will enjoy a 3-hour boat cruise through the park, lunch at a riverside restaurant, and then a 3-hour game drive inside the park.

The Thorntree River Lodge near Victoria Falls.

African Bush Camps

Places To Stay On The Zambian Side Of The Falls

Thorntree River Lodge

The minute you arrive at the Thorntree River Lodge, you’ll know you are in for a treat. The luxury river lodge has perfectly appointed rooms right on the banks of the Zambezi. Sundowners beside your private swimming pool and waking up in the morning to drink tea in bed, all with the river stretching out before you… this is all part of the Thorntree experience. The lodge is located in the Mosi-oa-Tunya National Park, home to buffalo, zebras, giraffes, elephants, warthogs, endangered white rhinos, and much more.

Royal Chundu

The Royal Chundu is located 37 miles from Livingstone and is a taste of paradise. The main lodge is right on the banks of the Zambezi, and there is an even more exclusive island lodge just a short boat ride away. Luxurious rooms complete with veranda bathtubs make relaxation easy. During your stay, you will be treated to the lodge’s special tasting menu, which features traditional Zambian ingredients. This could include the chef’s ingenious take on chibwantu (a traditional beer) served in a giant snail shell or the imaginative use of such ingredients as wild spinach and vinkubala (caterpillars). It’s a really novel way to immerse yourself in the local culture.

Royal Livingstone Hotel

A stay at the Royal Livingstone Hotel wouldn’t be complete without sampling their extravagant high tea, featuring a three-tier cake stand loaded with goodies, your choice of any number of tea varieties, and some sparkling wine. The Royal Livingstone also offers a delicious champagne breakfast with all the trimmings on the banks of the Zambezi. The falls are only a short walk from the hotel.

The Zambezi House near Victoria Falls.

Sarah Kingdom

Things To Do On The Zimbabwean Side Of The Falls

Zambezi House

Lunch at the funky Zambezi House, constructed from old shipping containers and located on the banks of the Zambezi, is a must. The quirky retro decor, great vibe, riverside location, and delicious food are fantastic. The Zambezi House also offers evening entertainment with music and live comedy nights.

High tea at the Victoria Falls Hotel.

Sarah Kingdom

Victoria Falls Hotel

Built by the British in 1904 and one of the oldest hotels in Africa, the Victoria Falls Hotel originally served as an accommodation for workers on the Cape to Cairo Railway Project. Today, it’s a luxury hotel. Even if you’re not staying here, you should make time for high tea on the veranda of the hotel, with its dramatic views down the gorge to Victoria Falls and the famous bridge.

A sunset cruise on the Ra-Ikane.

Ilala Lodge

Sunset Cruise

A sunset cruise on the Ra-Ikane, named for one of the guides who led David Livingstone to the falls, is a great experience. The small luxury cruise boat carries only 16 people and is outfitted with period decor, so you’ll really get the feeling of a bygone era. Traveling upstream as the sun sets, you’ll see a great variety of wildlife in a peaceful setting.

Whitewater rafting, bungee jumping, river cruises, helicopter flights, and day trips to Chobe National Park are also available on the Zimbabwean side of Victoria Falls.

Chundu Island near Victoria Falls.

Sarah Kingdom

Places To Stay On The Zimbabwean Side Of The Falls

Chundu Island

Accessible only by boat, Chundu Island is a tiny teardrop-shaped island in the Zambezi River, 13 miles upstream from Victoria Falls in Zambezi National Park. To reach the island, you must drive through the national park — home to elephants, lions, buffalo, leopards, and more — before taking a short boat ride across to the island. The lodge has a fun atmosphere, great food, and a really special setting. It’s perfectly located for game viewing, boat trips, fishing, and canoeing.

Ilala Lodge

Ilala Lodge in the town of Victoria Falls is just a stone’s throw from the falls themselves — so close, in fact, that from most rooms, you can see the spray from the falls without having to leave your bed! Aside from the proximity to the falls, there are two other definite highlights of a stay at Ilala. The first is the wildlife roaming about the hotel grounds, including mongooses, hippos, warthogs, baboons, and monkeys. The second is the hotel’s restaurant, where you’ll be spoiled for choice with exotic items like warthog, crocodile, kudu, and ostrich.

Victoria Falls Safari Suites

The Victoria Falls Safari Suites are located away from the hustle and bustle, yet still close to the falls. The focus of the lodge is definitely on wildlife, with animals roaming about the grounds and visible from the rooms. Guests can even witness the daily feeding of the local vultures. The lodge’s own restaurant overlooks a watering hole, providing an ideal vantage point from which to watch the wildlife while you eat.

What To Know Before You Go

Tourists from more than 65 countries (including the United States) can obtain a KAZA UNIVISA, which is valid for 30 days and allows you to cross between Zambia and Zimbabwe so that you can visit both sides of the falls. The visa also allows for day trips to Botswana, provided you return to Zambia or Zimbabwe on the same day.

Peak flow is from March through May, after the rainy season has ended. The spray can be so dense that it quite literally rains down on you, so bring a raincoat and be prepared to get drenched! Medium to high flow is from January through February and June through August, and this is one of the best times of year to view Victoria Falls. Low flow is from September through December and is a good time to photograph the falls with much of the cliff face exposed. During this time, you’ll find less spray and fewer visitors.

]]>
7 Thrilling Outdoor Adventures Around The World https://www.travelawaits.com/2553161/outdoor-adventures-around-the-world/ Mon, 24 Aug 2020 19:46:55 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2553161/outdoor-adventures-around-the-world/ These are the best outdoor adventures for women who want to go international, from deepelling and ice caves to Machu Picchu and kayaking the Danube.

]]>
An excursion on a cruise to Antarctica.

Climb a volcano in Guatemala. Trek through the jungle in Peru. Go glacier caving in Iceland. These aren’t your run-of-the-mill bungee jumping or skydiving adventures. These are unique experiences, some — such as deepelling — you might not have even heard of before. Many are just for women — or led by women. All are exhilarating opportunities to see the majesty of the outdoors from a front-row seat.

All seven of these thrilling outdoor adventures are doable for the 50+ traveler, but that doesn’t mean they’re lacking in thrill factor. Each will have your heart pumping as you navigate some of the most spectacular natural elements in the world.

Deepelling in New Brunswick, Canada.

Janice Holly Booth

1. Deepelling In New Brunswick, Canada

You’ve probably heard of rappelling, the process of descending a steep cliff or slope using ropes. Deepelling, on the other hand, is a face-forward version of rappelling.

Janice Holly Booth, author of Only Pack What You Can Carry, a National Geographic memoir about solo adventure travels taken in her late 40s and beyond, told us that deepelling was one of her most hair-raising, awe-inspiring adventures. “I’ve done a lot of rappelling, but this was a literal complete 180! You ‘rappel’ face forward down a ramp until you get to a launching spot. Then you jump! Every time your body returns to the face of the cliff, you push yourself off again, and make your way down to the ground. Totally exhilarating! And initially terrifying!”

There are only a few places in the world you can do this. In New Brunswick, Canada, Open Sky Adventures offers thrill-seekers the opportunity to deepell down a 135-foot rock wall in the Grand Falls Gorge. No climbing skills are required; you’ll be trained on-site for deepelling by instructors who have passed the Canadian Association of Deepelling training course.

A women's expedition in Morocco.

Femscape Sojourns

2. Women’s Expedition From Marrakech, Morocco, To Barcelona, Spain

Femscape Sojourns, a mother-daughter owned-and-operated boutique women’s travel company, specializes in small group adventures for three age groups. This particular trip is for women over 40.

In addition to taking women on guided adventures, Femscape Soujourns makes every effort to do business with women-owned establishments, hire female guides, locate female artisans, and engage with women who are supporting and encouraging women in their communities.

Latifah Al-Hazza, cofounder of Femscape Soujourns said, “Each trip is unique in that we offer one or more activities with local women in the community. These activities are designed to make us aware of women in other cultures, how they live, and their struggles to be heard and to become successful in their country.”

In 2021, they’ll trek from Marrakech to Barcelona. The adventure begins with four days and three nights in Marrakech, followed by a night of glamping in the Agafay Desert, then on to Barcelona to complete the 10-day, nine-night adventure.

Volcano views in Guatemala.

Lucy Ruthnum / Absolutely Lucy

3. Climb A Guatemalan Volcano At Sunrise

Lucy Ruthnum, author of a solo female adventure travel blog, told us if you want an adventure you won’t forget, climb a volcano in Guatemala for sunrise.

Volcano Acatenango towers over the colonial city of Antigua and overlooks nearby active volcano Fuego, which erupts every 10 to 15 minutes. “It’s physically demanding and the adventure of a lifetime. After climbing for six to eight hours, you arrive at ‘base camp,’ where you stay for the night and watch as the sun sets and you stand high above the clouds. As darkness falls, the sky is lit up by thousands of stars twinkling above you — the Milky Way has never looked so clear.”

“Throughout the day, Fuego has erupted every 15 minutes with a rumble and a spire of smoke, but after dark is when the volcano really comes to life, spewing smoke, ash, and red-hot lava from the summit and explosions throughout the night. After a few hours of sleep and a 4 a.m. wake-up call, you make your way to the summit for sunrise. From the top, you can see the summits of five other nearby volcanoes from above the clouds,” Ruthnum said.

As far as the difficulty of the climb, Ruthnum adds that while it is a physical challenge, it’s still accessible for people of all ages, and several 50+ adventurers completed her climb.

Pro Tip: Ruthnum suggests spending some time in the area to acclimatize to the altitude before attempting the climb.

4. Fly Cruise To Antarctica

SouthAmerica.Travel offers 15 guided adventures to South America and Antarctica. For a once-in-a-lifetime experience, their Fly Cruise to Antarctica allows you to skip some of the roughest waters in the world (the Drake Passage) with a two-hour flight from Punta Arenas, Chile, to King George Island, where you’ll begin your Antarctica journey.

Choose a seven- or nine-day expedition cruise that can take you as far as the Polar Circle. You’ll get off the boat once or twice a day (weather depending) for different levels of activities.

SouthAmerica.Travel’s CEO and cofounder Juergen Keller filled us in on what makes the trip special: “Antarctica is really the last of the frontiers to explore. For many travelers, this is knocking the seventh continent off their list. It is truly like traveling to Mars, with almost no vegetation and extreme iceberg shapes.”

Pro Tip: The guides give three options for routes — easy, moderate, and difficult — so that every traveler feels comfortable. Note that you’ll need to be able to walk on uneven terrain and get in and out of zodiacs.

For more Antarctica inspiration, read up on

Glacier hiking in Iceland.

Melrakki.com

5. Glacier Hiking/Caving In Iceland

Many have the misconception about glaciers — according to Oddur Ari with Melrakki Adventures — that they are so dangerous that nobody except “crazy adventurers” go on them. Instead, he told us, glaciers are indeed dangerous, but going on the outlet glaciers can be done in a completely safe way.

Hiking the glaciers is for almost everyone who is able to walk three-plus miles. “I’ve even seen an 86 year old man complete a glacier hike without any problems,” Ari said.

Hiking along hundreds of feet of a few-hundred-year-old ice, through the crevasses, moulins, blue lakes, and other ice formations is something that most people never get to experience.

“The glaciers are a constantly changing wonder, so no tour is ever the same; some interesting formations that are on the glacier today might not be there tomorrow, or something else has appeared — so every adventure is unique.”

Glacier hikes are available throughout the year, but during the winter season, when the temperatures get colder, ice caves become accessible. These amazingly blue caves are sometimes formed in the same areas year after year, but in some cases they just last a few weeks, allowing only a few people to see them before they melt away. “Combining a glacier hike with an ice cave tour is an amazing experience,” Ari told us.

Want to hike on a glacier without leaving the United States? Consider these five fabulous glaciers to visit in Alaska.

Hiking a jungle trail in Peru.

Kevin Groh

6. The Inca Jungle Trek In Peru

You often hear talks about hiking the Inca Trail to Machu Picchu, but if you’re looking for a unique, high-adrenaline way to get to Machu Picchu, then the Extreme Inca Tour could be the outdoor adventure for you.

Kevin Groh, an owner at Cachi Life, a Peru travel company specializing in Machu Picchu tours and trekking tours, said, “If you have an adventurous athletic woman who is 50+, an amazing trip is the Extreme Inca Tour, which is one of the most thrilling ways to trek to Machu Picchu.”

The trek starts on the first day with a two-mile descent down a mountain on mountain bikes. That evening, you’ll spend a thrilling two hours whitewater rafting on mostly class III and IV rapids.

The second day brings a nine-mile hike that takes you past small Quechua villages and coffee plantations. You’ll interact with monkeys and drink Inca tequila, which is liquor infused with a snake.

Then the third day is zip lining on the way to Machu Picchu, followed by a two-hour hike to Aguas Calientes, which is at the base of Machu Picchu.

And the fourth day culminates in a tour of Machu Picchu.

Pro Tip: The only skills you need are to have a good level of fitness and the willingness to withstand some adrenaline!

Kayaking the Danube.

Marcel Bancila

7. Kayak The Danube From Source To Sea

One extraordinary adventure, according to travel blogger Olivia-Petra Coman, is kayaking the Danube from source to sea.

“Apart from being the longest European river, it is not that challenging — compared to other rivers — not even at its source; moreover, it is stunningly beautiful; it crosses 10 countries and four capital cities, ending with one of the most beautiful deltas on Earth,” Coman told us.

To see what it would be like to kayak from source to sea, read about Danube Source2Sea, four friends who made the expedition.

For more adventures, consider these 10 thrilling outdoor adventures in the U.S. for women (and men).

]]>
10 Thrilling Outdoor Adventures In The U.S. For Women (And Men) https://www.travelawaits.com/2553048/outdoor-adventures-for-women-in-us/ Sun, 23 Aug 2020 16:51:52 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2553048/outdoor-adventures-for-women-in-us/ Pack your bags and your sense of adventure! These are the best outdoor experiences for women (and men) all around the U.S.

]]>
River rafting in West Virginia.

Thrill-seekers abound, but what constitutes adventure varies person to person. While some seek the biggest rush — activities such as skydiving, bungee jumping, or white-water rafting — others may feel that any activity that allows them to step outside their comfort zone (think flying, traveling solo, or mountain climbing) is a great adventure. It’s all relative.

Heide Brandes, a friend I travel with sometimes, is, at least compared to my personal gauge of adventure, fearless. In Mobile, Alabama, when we were offered a chance to kayak with alligators and told that we would see them sliding off the banks and lurking just below the surface, she was first in line to sign up. No matter what adventure is offered, she excitedly jumps without thinking and says yes! I’ve seen pictures of her paragliding over Cape Town in South Africa, riding a camel to the Pyramids of Giza in Egypt, ice climbing, and more.

Given her unbridled enthusiasm for any adventure, I was surprised to learn that Brandes’s bravery didn’t come naturally. She told me that she used to think she was afraid of heights but realized she’s really afraid of falling. So as long as she feels like whatever is holding her is secure — like when zip-lining or inside a small engine airplane — she feels safe. It helped her to overcome this fear and move beyond it.

Adventure travel is booming, especially for older demographics. In its Industry Snapshot Report, the Adventure Travel Trade Association said that the largest group of adventure tour operator clients (41 percent) are between the ages of 50 and 70. The average age of the adventure traveler is 49 years old.

Since everyone’s idea of adventure will vary, I decided to go big in choosing these thrilling outdoor adventures in the U.S.

Heide proudly shows off her catch.

Jill Dutton

1. Sport Fishing On Noyes Island, Alaska

One of my greatest adventures was sport fishing in remote Alaska at the Steamboat Bay Fishing Club. Since my fear used to be of flying (after taking so many flights the past few years I now love it) I was still a little hesitant about the seaplane ride we would take to get to the island. Instead, it was an absolute thrill to watch the beautiful terrain below as we took the 40-minute flight. And surprisingly, the water takeoff and landing were much smoother than in a large aircraft.

Three days fishing with a group of four women was a dream vacation that I’ll never forget. There was a sense of accomplishment that came from the physicality of catching (and later eating) my food source.

Pro Tips: Book well in advance as the lodge is limited to four groups of four. Also, read up on my top eight reasons to book a women’s sport fishing trip for detailed advice and inspiration.

2. Swimming With Manatees In Citrus County, Florida

While manatees are no longer considered endangered, they are still listed as threatened. Currently, there is only one place in the Southeast of the United States where you can legally swim with these amazing creatures. That place is Citrus County, Florida.

Rose Braggs knew she wanted to have this incredible opportunity. She said while the act itself wasn’t extremely dangerous or difficult, it “was amazing to be so close with an often-aloof animal.”

“I was able to come at the start of ‘Manatee Season’ in November, and these quiet swimmers all but surrounded me, often without my knowledge. This experience was so vividly otherworldly and impactful that I’ve rewatched my own footage of it many times. Watch the video of Bragg swimming with the manatees to see these gentle giants up close.

Bragg said all you need to experience it for yourself are a paddle craft (she rented hers from Crystal River Kayak Company), a snorkel, a wetsuit, and a life jacket. When the springs are open you can swim at your leisure and be captivated by the manatees that glide below you.

Pro Tip: Bragg recommends following the Three Sisters Springs Facebook page to know when the springs are open to visitors.

Deep diving in Panama City Beach, Florida.

Jeremy Scott Foster

3. Deep Dive The Wreck Diving Capital Of The South In Panama City Beach, Florida

Known for some of the best shipwreck diving on the Gulf Coast, Panama City Beach is a premier diving destination for both beginner and advanced divers. Guests can become scuba certified with Dive Locker and discover hidden, underwater treasures, including the destination’s newest artificial reef, the El Dorado cruise liner.

This 157-foot former luxury cruise liner was destroyed in Hurricane Michael and was later sunk (in May 2019) to improve the marine life conditions and provide an exciting new destination for area anglers and divers. Whatever a person’s level of diving experience, the ideal underwater adventure awaits as divers will get up close and personal with octopus, grouper, and other colorful wildlife that frequent these waters.

4. River Rafting In Lansing, West Virginia

In Southern West Virginia, you’ll find Adventures on the Gorge, a multi-faceted adventure resort.

Mona Mesereau said she will never forget rafting Gauley River during “Gauley Season” with the tour company. She said that most of the year, the Gauley River — one of two raft-able rivers in Southern West Virginia — is a thrilling adventure, with 24 miles of dynamic and unpredictable challenging rapids. In the fall, though, the famous river turns into the “Beast of the East” with nine Class V rapids and 97 total rapids Class III and above. (Class V rapids are the largest navigable rapids.) The rapids are created when water is released on a set schedule from the Summersville Dam on 22 days (weekends and select Mondays and Thursdays).

Adventures on the Gorge offers a two-day Gauley River Deluxe River Overnight trip that includes two days of river rafting, one night of riverside camping, and a gourmet meal. After a day on the river, the guides and staff prepare a gourmet meal, pour adult beverages, and build campfires. Mesereau said that after an invigorating day of rafting, “It is pure luxury to sit in a chair and watch the river while the staff sees to your comfort.”

Then after getting off of the river, there are two zip lines, a challenging aerial adventure park, and a thrilling bridgewalk on a 24-inch catwalk high above the New River.

“As a 50+ adventurer who is generally a nervous rafter, Gauley Season river rafting taught me lessons about facing my fears head-on. Although I’ve done many adventurous things over the years, rafting the Gauley River remains the most intense and thrilling adventure I’ve ever had. And even now a few years later, I recall the adventure with a sense of accomplishment and pride,” Mesereau said.

5. Trek With Llamas From Vail To Aspen, Colorado

Vail has long been an adventurer’s getaway brimming with hundreds of miles of outdoor trails and rivers for hiking, biking, fishing, and more. One way to explore the wilderness on foot is with a llama assisted backcountry hike. Paragon Guides, a local outfitter and guide company, offers day and overnight backcountry hikes that can be tailored to hikers of any level. Adventurous spirits can embark on a multi-day hut hike, hiking to some of the areas backcountry huts that are part of the 10th Mountain Division Hut Association.

On a five-day llama trek, you’ll travel by day with a small pack of llamas who carry personal gear and the group’s food. At night, enjoy a meal together with fellow hikers, play a game of cribbage, or read a book by the fire. The trip includes two guides, hut and lodge accommodations, all meals, a sleeping bag, and the llamas.

Editor’s Note: Paragon Guides’ llama experience also made our list of the best things to do near Vail in the fall, along with Turtle Tubing and whitewater rafting.

6. Helicopter To Santa Catalina Island, California

Hop aboard an exclusive helicopter flight with IEX Helicopters, arrive on Catalina Island, then check in to coastal casual Hotel Atwater, just a block from the beach and located walking distance from everything you need. Explore the backcountry of Catalina on a biofuel Hummer expedition for a chance to spot a bison. Or, for more adventure, take to the trees on the exhilarating Zip Line Eco Tour. (Their oldest participant was over 90, so this adventure isn’t just for kids!)

Kristin Leigh Metcalfe said, “One of my personal favorite things to do is cruise along the coast on the Cyclone powerboat to the rustic town of Two Harbors and enjoy paddleboarding, kayaking, miles of hiking trails, and more! Two Harbors is a true outdoor adventurer’s paradise.”

The view of the Horseshoe Fall, Niagara Falls, Ontario, Canada
Horseshoe Fall
Photo credit: Igor Sh / Shutterstock.com

7. Skydiving Over Niagara Falls, New York

Skydive the Falls in Niagara Falls U.S.A. offers a once-in-a-lifetime experience — a tandem skydive jump over majestic, roaring Niagara Falls. Beginners are more than welcome with their first-time skydiving package, which includes a short class upon arrival and an expert-led harness and gear fitting. Then, you climb up to an altitude of 12,000 feet. The freefall lasts about 45 seconds, followed by a scenic, five- to eight-minute parachute ride down, during which you’ll have views of rainbows and Class-5 water rapids, the Buffalo and Toronto skylines, Old Fort Niagara, the Great Lakes, and, of course, the incredible falls themselves.

8. Cliff Camping In The Rocky Mountains

Spend the most memorable night of your life with a big wall experience cliff camping in the Rocky Mountains in Estes Park, Colorado. Sleeping on a portaledge used to be reserved for “big-wall” climbers with years of experience. Over many years, Kent Mountain Adventure Center guides, many of whom are elite big-wall climbers themselves, have helped create an experience that makes cliff camping far more accessible. Not only will you spend a night like a big wall climber, but you’ll have niceties mountain climbers could only dream of: steak dinner with wine and omelets and lattes for breakfast, all served from your room in the sky.

9. Helicopter Flight Training In Westchester, New York

Helicopter flight training with Wings Air is a great adventure for women (and men).

No prior flying experience is required, and there is no upper age limit. The ability to fly depends on the individual’s physical and mental ability. This once-in-a-life-time adventure combines stunning aerial views with the thrill and challenge of learning to fly a helicopter.

The lesson begins with a ground briefing covering helicopter flight controls, flying techniques, and safety procedures. During the 30- or 60-minute flight with a professional flight instructor, you’ll take the controls of one of the Robinson helicopters while taking in the stunning view of Westchester County, New York, the Connecticut coastline, and the Hudson River.

10. Parahawking In San Diego, California

Fly above the coast with a raptor. La Jolla’s coastal cliffs offer the best and most consistent flying conditions on earth — this is why they are a popular paragliding spot for thrill-seekers who dare to jump off the bluffs and soar high above the Pacific waters. But what makes this experience unique in San Diego is doing so alongside a falcon. Parahawking is a once-in-a-lifetime experience offered at the Torrey Pines Glideport by Fly With a Bird. A trained raptor freely leads the way alongside a tandem glider, whenever both the weather and bird agree the time is right.

]]>
How To Visit 6 Lovely Volcanoes In The Cascades https://www.travelawaits.com/2548432/how-to-visit-volcanoes-in-the-cascade-mountains/ Sat, 20 Jun 2020 20:44:01 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2548432/How-To-Visit-Volcanoes-In-The-Cascade-Mountains/ Here’s how to visit some of the most beautiful peaks in the Cascade Mountain Range for unparalleled Pacific Northwest experiences.

]]>

About 700 miles long, the Cascade Volcanic Arc stretches from the southern tip of Canada’s British Columbia through Washington, Oregon, and the northern part of California. Taking its name from the Cascade Range, the arc has 18 volcanoes in all, many of them still active and the rest considered potentially active.

When we lived in Seattle, we were blessed with the beauty of one of them, Mount Rainier, whenever she appeared from behind the clouds. When we were RVing North America, we frequently went back to Seattle to visit my daughter and her family. From Interstate 5, either down from Canada where another of my daughters was living, or up from Phoenix, where we were snowbirds in the winter, we invariably saw Mount Baker, Mount Saint Helens, Mount Hood (and the Three Sisters), Mount Lassen, and Mount Shasta from different angles and during various seasons. Here are our tips for visiting.


Mount Baker in the Cascades.

karamysh / Shutterstock

1. Mount Baker

If you’re road tripping from Canada, you will encounter Mount Baker first. It rises 10,781 feet high and is the youngest (no more than 140,000 years old) in its volcanic field. In the arc, it is the second-most heavily glaciated after Mount Rainier and the second-most thermally active after Mount Saint Helens. And the volume of snow and ice on Mount Baker is greater than that of all the other Cascades volcanoes (except Rainier) combined. It is also one of the snowiest places in the world, setting the world record for snowfall in a single season at the Mount Baker Ski Area in 1999.

My husband loved to ski there, especially because of its very good long runs. He has even taken his son’s Boy Scout troop and stayed at the Mountaineers’ Baker Lodge up on the mountain. Mount Baker has a commanding presence. As the third-highest mountain in Washington and the fifth-highest in the Cascade Range, it’s visible as you travel down across the U.S. border from Vancouver in British Columbia and even from Seattle (and, on clear days, Tacoma) in Washington. We saw this every day when we camped in Blaine, Washington, 23 miles away, and played in nearby Bellingham.

Mount Rainier in the Cascades.

Real Window Creative / Shutterstock

2. Mount Rainier

Mount Rainier is the Cascade Volcanic Arc’s leader in beauty and risk. An active volcano (the last eruption was in 1894), it is the most glaciated peak and most prominent mountain in the contiguous U.S. It is also the tallest in the Cascades at 14,411 feet. The area around it is so beautiful that it has been preserved as the Mount Rainier National Park. But it is also considered one of the most dangerous volcanoes in the world, listed on the Decade Volcano list because of its large amount of glacial ice that could produce massive lahars that would threaten a lot of life and property, especially considering the city of Seattle is just 59 miles southeast of its peak.

There is still fun to be had here, though, and we cannot forget the wonderful experience had when we brought my oldest grandchildren to Paradise, Washington, located at an elevation of 5,400 feet, where the main visitor center for the national park is located. We went in winter and had so much fun playing in the heavy snow — one of my granddaughters even got her boot stuck in the deep. Those who want to stay overnight can check into the historic Paradise Inn, open from May to October. There are a host of trails, including the picturesque Nisqually Vista Trail, a 45-minute loop trail that affords views of Mount Rainier and the Nisqually Glacier.

In summer, you can also reach several areas by car via the one-way Paradise Valley Road, which begins at the Paradise Inn and weaves through a beautiful meadow-filled valley, providing a view of Mount Rainier’s reflection in the subalpine lakes. Paradise is located 19 miles east of the Nisqually Entrance and 12 miles east of Longmire.

Sunrise is the other Mount Ranier vantage point. It’s higher at 6,400 feet in elevation and 60 miles northeast of the Nisqually Entrance. Sunrise Road is open only in July, August, and September. There is a visitor center and a day lodge. Longmire, which is located in the southwest corner of the park, a little more than six miles east of the Nisqually Entrance, is open year-round. There, you can visit the Longmire House museum.

Mount Saint Helens in the Cascades.

Carol Colborn

3. Mount Saint Helens

Mount Saint Helens is just 50 miles northeast of Portland, Oregon, and 96 miles south of Seattle. It is the most active volcano in the Cascades Volcanic Arc, most known for its major eruption — the deadliest and most economically destructive volcanic event in U.S. history — on May 18, 1980. In fact, it reduced the elevation of the mountain’s summit by more than 1,000 feet, leaving a mile-wide horseshoe-shaped crater.

In 1983, the Mount Saint Helens National Volcanic Monument was opened to preserve the volcano and allow for the scientific study of the aftermath of the eruption. Since then, trails, viewpoints, info stations, campgrounds, and picnic areas have been built to accommodate the growing number of visitors each year. In fact, people are able to drive to Windy Ridge, which is just four miles northeast of the crater. We did. You can also reach the summit by mountain climbing, which has been allowed since 1986.

Mount Hood in the Cascades.

Michal Balada / Shutterstock

4. Mount Hood And The Three Sisters

Mount Hood is located about 50 miles east-southeast of Portland. It is one of the loftiest mountains in the nation, offering the only year-round lift-served skiing in North America. Standing 11,240 feet high, it is the highest point in Oregon and the fourth-highest in the Cascade Range. The volcano is considered the most likely to erupt in Oregon. The odds of an eruption in the next 30 years are estimated at between 3 and 7 percent, making it what scientists call “potentially active.”

Mount Hood’s prominence hovered around us every day during our week with my husband’s high school friends at a nine-bedroom villa in the upscale vacation community of Sunriver, Oregon. The artsy and touristy town of Bend is only 20 minutes away. During our stay, it was the South Sister — the lowest among the Three Sisters, which are three closely spaced volcanic peaks, each one about 10,000 feet high — that we climbed. We just loved Mount Hood’s daily presence in all of our activities.

Mount Shasta in the Cascades.

Louise Lopez / Shutterstock

5. Mount Shasta

We have not really seen Mount Shasta up close. Once we stayed overnight in the town of Redding, California, which is quite near it. Sadly, we did not have the time to stop and explore. But it is always such a beautiful presence whenever we pass by, with and without the glaciations, going up to or down from Seattle. It is a potentially active volcano at the southern end of the Cascade Range in northern California with an elevation of 14,179 feet, second only to Mount Rainier in height. But it is the biggest in the Cascade Volcanic Arc, with an estimated volume of 85 cubic miles.

Mount Lassen in the Cascades.

Anton Foltin / Shutterstock

6. Mount Lassen

Lassen Peak, commonly referred to as Mount Lassen, is the southernmost active volcano in the Cascade Range. It reaches an elevation of 10,457 feet. It is also different in that it isn’t a stratovolcano like the others but a lava dome. In fact, it is the largest lava dome in the world. On May 22, 1915, a powerful explosive eruption devastated nearby areas and a series of eruptions (that actually lasted from 1914 to 1917) spread volcanic debris 280 miles to the east. Lassen Peak and Mount Saint Helens were the only two volcanoes in the contiguous United States to erupt during the 20th century. Mount Lassen is still considered alive, just dormant, and it has a magma chamber that’s still capable of erupting.

After the eruption, the whole area was named Lassen Volcanic National Park, as with Mount Saint Helens, to preserve its 100,000 acres for observation and study, to protect the nearby volcanic features, and to prevent anyone from settling too close. The park has become popular for recreational activities and has already developed more diverse flora and fauna than Mount Saint Helens. We drove through the entire park from the north, where a visitor center stands at the entrance. We had the most fun at the southern exit, where the grounds were like a mini Yellowstone Park. Interstate 5 is nearby as you exit, and we easily found our campground for the night.

These six lovely volcanoes of the Cascades have always made our drives through the Pacific Northwest such a pleasurable experience. Having stayed around some of them, our trips on Interstate 5 have more than come to life.

]]>
The Need For Speed: 7 Ways To Have A Fantastic ‘Top Gun’ Vacation Experience https://www.travelawaits.com/2547803/how-to-have-a-fantastic-top-gun-vacation-experience/ Fri, 12 Jun 2020 12:55:13 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2547803/How-To-Have-A-Fantastic-Top-Gun-Vacation-Experience/ These are the best Top Gun experiences in Nevada, from flying fighter jets over the stunning desert landscapes to drifting in a hot air balloon.

]]>
Two hot air balloons in Nevada.

Lieutenant Pete “Maverick” Mitchell’s (Tom Cruise) statement, “I feel the need — the need for speed” in the 1986 film Top Gun sums up the desire ignited in a nation of the film’s fans.

Viewers expressed their needs as bomber jacket and Ray-Ban Aviator sunglasses sales jumped by 40 percent after the film premiered. The film was heralded as the highest-grossing film of the year, raking in $179.80 million. Then in 2015, the United States Library of Congress selected Top Gun for preservation in the National Film Registry, which indicates a film is “culturally, historically, or aesthetically significant.”

With the release of Top Gun: Maverick, the sequel to the cult classic, coming this December, fans will be looking for ways to get their own aerial excitement. Many of the scenes in both Top Gun and Top Gun: Maverick were filmed in and around Fallon, Nevada, and the Naval Air Station (NAS), a United States Navy air-to-air and air-to-ground training facility that’s southeast of Fallon.

Fans can experience the euphoria and adrenaline rush that comes with aerial experiences and satisfy the need for speed themselves during a Top Gun-inspired vacation. Head to Nevada to enjoy these unique aerial experiences that will take you from the silver screen to the Silver State.

Sky Combat Ace / Neon Public Relations

1. Fly A Fighter Jet

Like Maverick, you too could say, “…because I was inverted” when you pilot your own fighter jet — no experience necessary at Sky Combat Ace as an experienced instructor pilot has an identical set of flight controls to back you up. Their two Nevada locations take you to the skies above either Minden-Tahoe or Las Vegas.

The most popular experience at Sky Combat Ace? Of course, it’s the Top Gun Experience, a 2.5-hour flight that includes loops, rolls and stalls, upright or inverted spins, torque rolls, and more for $699. Not for the faint of heart, you’ll fly the plane through a complete aerobatic routine.

Or partake in so-called aerial dogfighting against another team as you practice aerobatics with your teammates. You’ll wage a battle for aerial dominance while flying with a trained Sky Combat Ace fighter pilot for $999 per customer.

Take it up another notch, and for $1,299 per person, try it all: aerobatics, air-to-air combat, and a dynamic low-level bombing run. It may leave you saying, “That’s right, Iceman. I am dangerous.”

Hot air balloons reflected in a lake Reno, Nevada
Hank Shiffman / Shutterstock.com

2. Get A Bird’s-Eye View In An Air Balloon

If going full-on Maverick is a little too intense, you can still take in amazing Nevada scenery from the skies with Vegas Balloon Rides. You’ll go beyond the city to get a spectacular bird’s-eye view of the Nevada desert and mountainous surroundings — Nevada is, after all, the most mountainous state in the Lower 48.

Arrive before sunrise to watch as they inflate the balloon. Then, just after the sun rises, you’ll lift off for a peaceful sky journey rising as high as 10,000 feet. The ride lasts about an hour and is followed by a champagne or sparkling cider celebratory toast, a light continental breakfast, and a commemorative flight certificate to memorialize your flight.

Join a group flight for about $199, or with a minimum of two passengers, book a private flight for $400 per person.

3. Blast Off In A Jetpack

Fifty miles from the Vegas Strip in Pahrump, thrill seekers find the world’s first jetpack oasis at Jetpack America. Soar up to 40 feet above the freshwater Lake Spring Mountain at Spring Mountain Motor Resort and Country Club. Dive into the lake and then blast off with a water-powered jetpack to see the sights from above the water. You’ll hover, spin, walk on water, and can even submarine like a dolphin.

The flight experience includes a brief instruction period — typically under 10 minutes long — for the average user to learn the basic maneuvers. Choose from a Flyboard Jetpack, or hover with a Jetboard for 30 minutes; rates run from $139 to $179. Or choose a combo flight for 40 or 60 minutes and try both hydroflight devices for between $269 and $349.

If you fall in love with the sport, you can purchase a Jetpack, Jetboard, or Jetbike and accessories to continue the experience on your own.

4. Take To The Skies With An Engineless Aircraft

Soar like a bird with Soaring NV in Minden. Pilot a glider with climb rates exceeding 1,500 feet per minute with both thermal and wave lift. See the beautiful Sierra Nevada Mountains, Yosemite National Park, and the White and Inyo mountain ranges while soaring. Bring your glider or rent one of theirs.

If you’re new to flying a glider, Soaring NV can help you earn a glider pilot certificate or an add-on rating to a private pilot certificate. Their instructors have thousands of hours of experience both with gliding and instructing. Learn to fly at the Minden-Tahoe Airport. Costs run from $7,000 to $10,000 and include instruction, glider rental, tows, ground study material, the written test fee, and the check ride over a six- to 12-week period of training.

You don’t need a pilot certificate to fly on one of the guided adventures, such as the Tahoe Sky Ride for $269, during which you’ll fly a mile above the ground over the Great Nevada Basin for a view of Lake Tahoe. You can even have your FAA-certified ride pilot guide you through taking control of the glider yourself. Or take the Emerald Bay Adventure for $480 and soar over the epic Sierra Nevadas down into the Tahoe Basin, over the casino corridor, past the Tahoe Keys, and over Desolation Wilderness and the spectacular Emerald Bay. Their most spectacular ride, you’ll even receive edited video of your flight to relive the experience at home.

5. Free Fall From An Airplane

Skydive for the ultimate adrenaline rush. Skydive Lake Tahoe in Minden operates out of the Minden Airport in Carson Valley and offers tandem skydiving for stunning views of Lake Tahoe, the Sierra Nevada Mountains, and the Carson Valley below.

What to expect: On the way up, you’ll experience the best views of Lake Tahoe and the Sierra Nevada Mountains from their Cessna aircraft. You’ll fly to heights of over 12,000 feet above the ground to prepare for the jump. Leap from the aircraft and experience speeds increasing to over 120 miles per hour. Feel the sensation of falling through the sky and spend nearly a minute in an exhilarating free fall. The instructor will deploy the parachute at an altitude of 5,500 feet above the ground. Float under the canopy for the five-minute parachute ride and enjoy the views as the instructor guides you to the ground for a touchdown in the landing area. After, view your photos and the video of your skydiving event. The weekend cash price is $200.

6. Take A Helicopter Tour

Whether you prefer to see the Las Vegas Strip from above or want to venture to the Grand Canyon by helicopter, GC Flight can provide your ideal experience. For $98, take a 15-minute flight over the world-famous Las Vegas Strip to see the neon lights and resorts. You’ll arrive at the private helicopter terminal and enjoy a pre-flight glass of champagne before boarding the jet helicopter. The flight will take you past historic Downtown Las Vegas and its 1,149-foot Stratosphere Tower and over the resorts and bright light of the Luxor Sky Beam.

Or choose one of several Grand Canyon flights, such as the Grand Canyon Rim Helicopter Landing Tour for $387. This approximately four-and-a-half-hour tour flies below the West Rim of the Grand Canyon to land at the Grand Canyon West Airport. The flight there is narrated by your pilot, who will point out sites such as Hoover Dam and the stunning Mojave Desert before your arrival at the Grand Canyon. Once there, the helicopter will descend below the rim for a 15-mile aerial tour through the Grand Canyon before landing at the airport for the ground tour. There, you’ll explore the rim and the views of the Grand Canyon. Explore Eagle Point, home of the Grand Canyon Skywalk, for 30 to 45 minutes before boarding the helicopter to return to Las Vegas.

7. See Nevada From Above Via Drone

View the breathtaking beauty from above in Reno, Lake Tahoe, Las Vegas, and more in these drone videos. Appreciate the fiery red landscape of the Valley of Fire, view the natural wonders of Mount Rose and the Washoe Valley, or explore the desolate ghost town of Nelson from the comfort and convenience of your home, hotel, or vacation rental.

Want more on Vegas, specifically? Here’s what you need to know about Sin City reopening, plus our advice for relaxing in Las Vegas: the best spas on or near the Strip.

]]>
How To Spend A Day At Royal Gorge https://www.travelawaits.com/2490048/royal-gorge-how-to-spend-a-day/ Thu, 13 Feb 2020 19:10:25 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2490048/Royal-Gorge-How-To-Spend-A-Day/ These are the best things to do at Royal Gorge, whether you’re an adventure seeker or simply want to experience the area’s natural beauty for a day.

]]>

“Fortune favors the bold,” the proverb says. At Royal Gorge Bridge and Park, the bold can find high-flying adventure without spending a fortune. The 1,050-foot deep Royal Gorge, 12 miles west of Canon City, Colorado, is spanned by one of the world’s highest bridges. And a park full of bold adventures has grown up around it. Plan to stay all day, and build your itinerary around our Royal Gorge suggestions.

Dawn's First Light Royal Gorge Bridge
Bridget Calip / Shutterstock.com

Morning

Get A Taste Of Royal Gorge

Start your Royal Gorge day at the Elkhorn Loop Picnic Area and overlook. The free Overlook Trail enables visitors to see the gorge and get a taste of what they are about to experience. The trail is easy and offers beautiful views of the gorge and bridge. To reach the trail, turn left at the Royal Gorge Bridge and Park turnoff and follow County Road 3A until you reach the trailhead. The overlooks offer good photo and selfie opportunities with the gorge and/or bridge as a backdrop. Stretch your legs in preparation for the adventure to come.

Enter The Royal Gorge Bridge And Park

Once you’ve taken some pictures, head into the park proper. The park offers free parking on the north side of the bridge. Oversized vehicles may park in Upper Parking Lot B. Accessible parking is on the visitor center’s north side.

During warm weather, visit the park’s fascinating Water Clock behind the visitor center. Cascading water drives the clock’s gears.

Red gondolas at the Royal Gorge in Colorado
Gino Santa Maria / Shutterstock.com

Glide Through The Sky On The Aerial Gondola

Begin your tour on the Aerial Gondola behind the visitor center. Enjoy the gondola’s serene gliding as it rolls 1,200 feet above the Arkansas River. The ride spans 2,200 feet and only lasts a few minutes. On your ride, you’ll be entranced by the gorgeous 360-degree view of the river, gorge, park, and surrounding mountains. For the best photos, place your camera lens directly onto the gondola’s glass to avoid reflections.

The gondola has six eight-person cars and lines can be long. While waiting, watch the cables pull the gondolas across the gorge. Their propulsion mechanisms, called bullwheels, are exposed below the towers.

Check Off The Top Colorado Bucket-List Item: Royal Gorge’s Zip Line

Travel Channel named the “heart-racing” Cloudscraper Zip Line the number one thing travelers must do in Colorado. You’re guaranteed an adrenaline kick when you fly 1,200 feet above the Arkansas River. The ride provides a jolt of exhilaration you’ll always remember.

The cost is $45 per rider. Save 10 percent when you buy online. Weight, height, and age limits apply. High winds can change the weight requirements.

Especially in summer, mornings are the best time to ride, climb the Via Ferrata, or experience the park’s trails. The weather is cooler and fewer thunderstorms arrive in the morning.

Boldly Free Fall On The World’s Scariest Skycoaster

If you are a true adrenaline junkie, you’ll also want to ride the Royal Rush Skycoaster. Bon Voyage called it the world’s scariest skycoaster.

Note: Skycoasters combine skydiving and hang-gliding, and Skycoaster’s manufacturer says that the ride, which involves flying 70 miles per hour over 1,200-foot Royal Gorge means “a one-of-a-kind thrill ride experience.”

Up to three people can ride together. Height requirements apply. Small children must try on flight suits to determine what type of ride they’re eligible for. Cost is $30 for one rider, $55 for two, and $75 for three.

Climb The Royal Gorge On The Via Ferrata

Channel Spiderman during a bold adventure along Royal Gorge’s Via Ferrata. A via ferrata (Italian for “Iron Path”) is a protected climbing route where relatively inexperienced climbers can safely climb. Royal Gorge offers two levels of Via Ferrata tours. The easier Revelation Tour lasts 2.5 to 3 hours. The more strenuous Royal Tours last all day. The Revelation Tour costs $135 per person and the Royal Tour costs $165. All tours require a short training session and familiarization run.

Hike Royal Gorge’s Park Trails

If you prefer hiking, hit the trails in Royal Gorge Park. The Canyon Rim Trail parallels the Overlook Loop for part of its route, but it offers a more expansive view of Royal Gorge. The trail is rated intermediate. The trail system includes 10 more trails, which are rated from beginner to advanced.

Afternoon

Grab Some Lunch

When lunchtime arrives, the park offers plenty of options. The park offers one year-round restaurant, Cafe 1230, and three seasonal ones.

Cafe 1230 in the visitor center is named for the restaurant’s height above the Arkansas River. Enjoy great views while you try a pizza or a bacon burger.

Cliff Side Patio looks across the gorge from the visitor center. Take some pictures while you’re eating a twisted ice cream cone.

On the south side of the bridge, follow your nose to Bridge View BBQ. Try ribs with a stuffed potato and baked beans, washed down with a root beer float. Or drink a beer from Colorado Springs’ Bristol Brewing Company.

When a band is playing in the Elk Park Amphitheater, listen to the musicians while you eat Italian sausage at Grill on the Hill.

Learn The Park’s Story At The Plaza Theater

Royal Gorge’s history ranges from dinosaurs to the Royal Gorge Railroad War to a devastating fire in 2013. The Plaza Theater tells that history. Watch the mini-documentary and see park artifacts. The theater also has restrooms and a concession stand. Allow for about 45 minutes here.

Play At Tommy Knocker Playland

Let the kids and grandkids burn off energy at Tommy Knocker Playland near the theater. Ropes, slides, nets, tunnels, and towers are always ready at this kid-centric dream destination. The playland is home to a seasonal splash pad and carousel, which adults can ride with the children.

Tourists cross Royal Gorge suspension bridge
Gary C. Tognoni / Shutterstock.com

Find Bold Thrills On The Highest Suspension Bridge In The United States

The park’s central attraction is the bridge. When it opened in 1929, it was the world’s highest suspension bridge, and it kept the title for 75 years. It is still America’s highest bridge.

CBS Denver called it one of the world’s most-frightening bridges, but that designation is misleading. Yes, the lack of stiffening trusses makes the bridge shake and jiggle in high winds, but don’t worry. The builders made sure the bridge would be safe.

As you walk the bridge, find signatures on the planks. People signed them during the bridge’s 90th birthday celebration in 2019. Look down at the Arkansas River running 956 feet below. Imagine the Empire State Building standing below with enough room for a 3-foot-tall flagpole. Appreciate the various colors and forms in the gorge walls. State flags are attached to bridge cables all along the bridge span.

Make sure to examine the bridge’s structure above and below the bridge deck. The structure’s sculptural forms are fascinating.

Away from the bridge, examine some of its cable anchors. The ascending cables make for interesting images for those feeling creative and wanting to document their visit in photographs.

Evening

Enjoy Sunset On Skyline Drive

On your way out of the park, watch the sun set along Canon City’s Skyline Drive. Skyline Drive is a 2.6-mile one-way paved road west of Canon City. The route starts with a steep hill headed to a narrow road flanked by sheer cliffs on both sides — and no guardrails. Skyline Drive will reward your boldness with thrilling views. Allow about 20 minutes to drive from Royal Gorge.

Make sure to arrive well before sunset, especially on summer weekends. Traffic can be bumper-to-bumper with nowhere to turn around. Drive only small cars, trucks, or vans. The route is not fit for motorhomes. Hike up to the trail on top of the ridge for even better views. Make sure to bring a flashlight. Allow at least an hour to explore, more if traffic is heavy.

Get A Bite To Eat In Canon City

Skyline Drive ends in Canon City’s Downtown Historic District. While exploring downtown, try hand-tossed Colorado pizza or The Big One at Pizza Madness, open from 11 a.m. to 9 p.m. daily.

Colorado's Royal Gorge as a train rounds the bend
Martin Haas / Shutterstock.com

Enjoy Royal Gorge From The Bottom Up

If you have an extra day, reserve 2.5 hours to ride the Royal Gorge Route Railroad from Canon City. The train leaves daily at 12:30 p.m. from the Santa Fe Depot a block south of the intersection at Highway 50 and 3rd Street in Canon City. The railroad adds additional departure times to its schedule from April to October. Check the schedule for departure times. Ticket prices begin at $49 for adults and $44 for children. If you ride coach, make sure to bring a blanket and wear a jacket.

Where To Stay

For a unique experience, stay at Royal Gorge Cabins. Rent luxury vacation cabins or glamping tents with 21st-century comforts. The tents even include electrical outlets and in-floor radiant heat. Tents start at $179 per night. Cabins start at $355 per night.

Stay at Bighorn Mountaintop Lodge and you’ll get a ticket discount and not even have to leave the park at night. Prices range from $175 per night during off-peak season and $250 per night during peak season.

Canon City has many other lodging options available, from budget to luxury.

Royal Gorge Pro Tips

Before you leave, visit the Tasting Room at The Winery at Holy Cross Abbey. The Canon City winery has won numerous awards, including 2018 Colorado Winery of the Year. The winery is open 10 a.m to 5 p.m. daily, except for Sundays. Sunday hours are noon to 5 p.m. Most wines are free to taste, but reserve wines cost $1 each. Book VIP tastings from May to September with 24 hours’ advance notice.

An entire day at the park costs $25 per adult and $20 for children from 6 to 12 years old. Prices are $2 less per person during off-peak season, October 1 to April 31. However, since peak season’s hours are longer, peak prices offer the most time and options to enjoy the park. Tickets include a second day. Save an additional $2 by purchasing tickets online.

More To Know

  • Park closing times vary. The park always opens at 10 a.m. but may close as early as 4 p.m. depending on the time of year. Check the schedule before making your plans.
  • Afternoon thunderstorms are common, especially in the summer. To avoid them, arrive in the morning and plan your activities accordingly.
  • Wear flat, sturdy shoes, since the park has stairs and some rough surfaces.
  • Leashed dogs may walk around the park but bring a water dish. Dogs are not permitted in buildings or on rides, but the park does have five kennels.
  • Visitors may bring their own food and water.
  • While you are at altitude, drink plenty of fluids to avoid altitude sickness. Limit alcohol and caffeine.
  • Wear plenty of sunscreen and use lots of lip balm.

Want to stay somewhere nearby? Consider how to spend 48 hours in Colorado Springs.

]]>
Zip-Lining In Costa Rica: Tried It, Loved It, But I Don’t Need To Do It Again https://www.travelawaits.com/2489551/zip-lining-in-costa-rica/ Wed, 05 Feb 2020 16:24:30 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2489551/zip-lining-in-costa-rica/ Curious about zip-lining but too scared to give it a shot? Here's how one traveler overcame her fears and stepped outside of her comfort zone.

]]>

As my driver shuttled me from Liberia to Guanacaste on my first trip to Costa Rica, I was enjoying the warm January weather. We passed homes, cows, and lush vegetation. At one point I saw a sign on the side of the road. It read Zip-Lining. I’d never heard of it, so I asked my driver what it was. He explained that you climb up high and hold on to a cable, hundreds of feet above the ground, and slide down. I was flabbergasted. “People really do that?” I asked. It seemed completely stupid, and I made a mental note that I’d never do anything so dumb!

I eventually made my way from Guanacaste to La Fortuna on an Interbus shuttle. We changed buses along the way, and that’s where I had the pleasure of meeting Lloyd and Maggie, who were going in the same direction. We became instant friends and learned we’d all be traveling to Monteverde after La Fortuna.

Hanging bridges in La Fortuna, Costa Rica.

Heather Markel

While in La Fortuna, we decided to meet up and take a tour of the area’s spectacular hanging bridges. We heard screams all around us. Nobody appeared to be falling off the bridges, and we couldn’t place the sounds, since they were a minute or two apart. Then we looked up. That’s when we saw the zip lines overhead. The screams sounded happy and felt so full of life that after listening to 10 minutes of them, we decided we had to try zip-lining for ourselves in Monteverde. I was relieved that we weren’t going to try it in La Fortuna, because there were eight cables there, and I thought one or two would be enough.

Once in Monteverde, we agreed to zip-line at Selvatura Park, because it seemed less of an extreme-sports park than the other options.

The hummingbird park in Selvatura, Costa Rica.

Heather Markel

Selvatura also offered a hummingbird park where birds sit on your hands, which we all wanted to experience.

My initial relief faded when, upon arrival, I learned there were 15 cables instead of eight, and that the zip line was the old-fashioned kind where you hold the line with your hand to avoid spinning. As my fears grew, we bought our tickets and decided to go immediately so that we wouldn’t have time to change our minds. We were given the necessary equipment and suited up. Once the man who double-checked my gear was satisfied, he said, “Hope to see you later.”

The writer smiling before experiencing the zip line.

Heather Markel

With my legs shaking and my nausea growing, we made our way to the first cable with a small group and four guides. We received a quick training session. I stood at the first cast-off tower and looked down, reasoning that the ground was close enough that if I fell I’d only break all my bones, not die. Armed with that confidence, and hooked onto the cable, I slid down. I smiled for a photo, then braced for the second cable. The third cable was high enough that death was a possibility and, though I made it, I clenched the cable so tightly that I couldn’t lift my arm.

There was no way I could continue, and I told one of the guides so. He offered to accompany me. I didn’t know this was an option and eagerly nodded my head. (Note: If you go zip-lining, you can ask one of your guides to hold your hand the whole way!) My guide linked us together so that we comfortably faced one another and I didn’t need to hold the cable. He spoke to me the whole way, joking that it was his first time, too. This was the first cable I actually enjoyed. Then Andre showed up.

Andre was another of the guides. Attractive and adorable, he informed me that he would be my boyfriend for the rest of the cables. He traveled behind me on each cable and intertwined our limbs like some sort of zip-line kama sutra. I have no idea how we got into those poses. Between them and our conversations I was completely distracted from my fear!

By the 10th cable I felt relaxed and trusted Andre so completely that after he hooked me to the next cable and told me he’d be right behind me, I took off and continued talking to him. About halfway down, I wondered why he wasn’t responding, so I turned my head. That’s when I discovered that he had let me cast off without him! I was delighted to be alone because I realized that I was ready for the experience. I found myself screaming with delight at some points, like those I’d heard before me. The more relaxed I became, the more I was able to focus on the beautiful scenery instead of the cable and my fear of falling off.

The last cable was a kilometer long. I was glad to be with Andre, because it took quite a bit of time. Maggie and Lloyd were waiting for me at the finish line, and we gave each other high-fives.

The writer and her friends after zip-lining.

Heather Markel

For the rest of the day, I experienced an emotional high and felt like I had stared down a fear. For months afterward, in-flight turbulence didn’t bother me. But that adrenaline-junkie piece never kicked in. When I think back on the experience, I’m proud of myself for having the guts to try it out. Seeing the land from above while hanging from a big string is something I’ll always remember. Stepping so far outside my comfort zone was invigorating.

[jwplayer KHpwwFG6]

Though I’m glad I did it, I don’t feel the need to do it again. I didn’t enjoy the powerful nausea I started with, nor how weak I felt when my arms cramped up from over-clenching the cable. Feeling like my entire life depended on a tiny wheel staying attached to a long cable is not something I wish to repeat!

The writer zip-lining with her GoPro camera.

Heather Markel

Should you try it, I recommend attaching a GoPro to the top of your helmet to record the experience. Also be sure to research the type of zip line — older ones require you to wear a glove and hold the cable. Newer lines offer a harness to sit in and a bar to hold. You can also rent a Superman harness, which makes you feel like you’re flying.

Zip-lining is a once-in-a-lifetime experience, and it’s certainly something you won’t forget!

Planning a trip to Costa Rica? Here are 15 things you shouldn’t miss while you’re there.

]]>
Why I Travel Every Year For My Birthday https://www.travelawaits.com/2489381/birthday-travel/ Sat, 01 Feb 2020 21:22:13 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2489381/birthday-travel/ Even if it’s just a day trip to a neighboring town or a long weekend getaway, getting away on your birthday offers the perfect combination of a celebration and a break from your day-to-day routine.

]]>

You know that feeling of ambivalence that can set in as your birthday approaches? On one hand, you’re happy to be celebrating another year. But on the other is a feeling of angst about turning a year older.

I can relate. While I felt unmitigated joy in my birthdays as a child, I often had mixed emotions as my adult birthdays approached. Maybe because my birthday falls in February — surely the dreariest month of the year — the big day often came with a dose of melancholy.

About a decade ago, I decided to try a new tactic. I asked myself how I could bring back that feeling of childish delight in my birthday. For me, a lifelong lover of travel, the answer was obvious. What could be better than a birthday trip?

So, as a milestone birthday approached, I asked my sister to join me on a cruise to Cabo San Lucas, Mexico. She happily agreed. It worked like a charm. For months beforehand, I was planning and anticipating my big day rather than dreading it.

And when my actual birthday arrived, I was gazing at Cabo’s famous rock arch and eating fabulous food in a cruise-ship dining room. There were no more mixed emotions. It was pure joy.

Since then, I have made birthday travel an annual ritual. Sometimes it’s just a short road trip, and other times it’s a flight to a favorite city.

I’ve found so many things to love about birthday travel that I highly recommend it as a way to battle the getting-older blues. Here’s why.

Writer Cindy Barks and her sister at Red Rock State Park in Sedona

Cindy Barks

It’s All About Celebrating

For a respite from real life, nothing can beat travel. Work responsibilities fade into the background as you focus on the pleasures of the trip.

Over the past 10 years, I’ve taken birthday trips to San Francisco, Seattle, San Diego, Napa Valley, Santa Monica, Vancouver, Sedona, and Phoenix. Regardless of the distance, each trip has lifted my spirits.

From the moment I board the plane for a new city, I find it easy to go into celebration mode. With an inflight Irish coffee in hand, I literally fly away from my troubles.

Writer Cindy Barks leaning out her Napa balcony with a glass of wine

Cindy Barks

You Get To Do Things You Enjoy

Another perk of birthday travel is that it’s an excuse to indulge yourself. I recommend aligning your birthday-trip destination with your personal interests.

Several of my birthday excursions have focused on hiking, while others have been more about exploring beautiful city centers and attending cultural events. On one memorable weekend girls’ trip to Phoenix, my friends and I combined all of our interests and took in a scenic desert hike, an Oscar-nominated movie, a visit to a bookstore, and a trendy pizza/wine dinner.

Another year, when none of my friends or family members could make the trip, I traveled to San Francisco solo to attend an American Conservatory Theater stage production of one of my favorite books, A Thousand Splendid Suns. Afterward, I took an exhilarating nighttime ride on the city’s famed cable cars and had a hot toddy at the historic Buena Vista near Fisherman’s Wharf.

Once I decide on a destination, I search online for activities that are going on that week. Along with the San Francisco play, I have discovered a wonderful winter farmers market in Santa Monica and a fun piano bar entertainer at a hotel in Del Mar, California.

A birthday treat plate at the Fairmont Olympic Hotel in Seattle

Cindy Barks

There’s Cake

I love a good chocolate cake, and at a restaurant or hotel, it seems that all you have to do is mention it’s your birthday to be showered with chocolate love.

Over the years, I’ve had decadent desserts and bottles of wine left in my hotel rooms and been treated to restaurants’ specialty sweet treats. Usually, it is the result of a prompt from my travel companions, but sometimes I get caught up in the birthday spirit and blurt it out myself.

On a 2016 birthday trip to Seattle, I casually mentioned the reason for my trip to a server at a restaurant at the Fairmont Olympic Hotel. Before long, he had returned with a plateful of the hotel’s sweet specialties — all decorated with a swirl of chocolate script wishing me a happy birthday.

On my solo San Francisco trip, I ended up having dinner next to a woman who was celebrating her birthday that day as well, and we enjoyed complimentary desserts together.

So, I say don’t be shy. You never know what your celebration might yield.

You Get Best Wishes From Strangers

It also doesn’t hurt that unlikely strangers sometimes notice, and offer birthday wishes — like the stern customs official I encountered upon arrival in Vancouver.

After first questioning me about whether I was traveling alone, he looked at my passport and asked what had brought me all the way from Arizona. At that point, I decided to play what I have come to think of as “the birthday card.”

“It’s my birthday, and I’m on a weekend trip to celebrate it,” I told him.

Another quick peek at my passport, and the agent smiled, winked, wished me a happy birthday, and waved me on.

Writer Cindy Barks with her son and daughter in law in front of the Santa Monica Pier

Cindy Barks

You Get To Spend Time With The People You Love

While I enjoy my solo trips, I truly love traveling with my friends, sisters, and son and daughter-in-law. The beauty of planning a birthday trip is that your favorite people often agree to join you.

Over the years, my friends and I have traded off traveling on our respective birthdays. I’ve joined them to celebrate their birthdays in the fall, spring, and summer, and they have returned the favor to me in February.

I have also taken multiple birthday trips with my sister. In addition to our cruise to Mexico, we have explored Alcatraz together and taken a fun road trip to Red Rock State Park in Sedona.

It always takes me back to those days when we were kids together and couldn’t wait for our birthdays to arrive.

Continuing The Cycle

I also cherish the chance to celebrate my birthdays with my son and his wife. In recent years, they have joined me for long-weekend stays in Santa Monica and Vancouver, and I’ve visited them at their homes in Seattle and Austin.

I love that they’re always willing to indulge my long walks on the beach, and, in turn, I’m up for trying their foodie haunts for exotic seafood creations.

So, it is with gleeful anticipation that I’m looking ahead to joining them for my next birthday trip in Vancouver in February. I see some chilly seaside walks and sushi dinners in my immediate future!

Even if it’s just a day trip to a neighboring town or a long weekend getaway, getting away on your birthday offers the perfect combination of a celebration and a break from your day-to-day routine. I intend to continue my tradition indefinitely. Next year: Banff in the winter?

]]>
9 Reasons To Visit Portugal’s Stunning Benagil Caves https://www.travelawaits.com/2489280/benagil-caves-portugal/ Sat, 01 Feb 2020 20:00:57 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2489280/benagil-caves-portugal/ Here’s how and why to visit Portugal's Benagil Caves, from small-ship cruises to stand up paddle boarding.

]]>

Spectacular cave formations, crystal-like sandy beaches, and inviting water topped off with soul-warming Mediterranean sunshine give Benagil, Portugal, its well-deserved vacation notoriety. Benagil is a small fishing village on the Algarve coast of Portugal. While not on the Mediterranean Sea, as a next door neighbor, the Algarve is part of the Mediterranean vibe, sun-loving culture, and gorgeous landscape. A popular tourist destination for Europeans for years, it is now attracting beachgoers and adventure seekers from around the world.

The Algar de Benagil, or Benagil Caves, have transformed this tiny Portuguese fishing village into a popular tourist attraction. These grotto-like caves are referred to as Gruta de Benagil by the locals. Here are nine reasons to visit.

Benagil Caves in Portugal.

tagstiles.com – S.Gruene / Shutterstock

1. Experience Nature’s Wondrous Cave

Algar de Benagil is just on the left side of Praia de Benagil (the beach). The cave is small but iconically photogenic. There are two ways to view the cave, each providing a unique perspective. The main focal point is the “eye” located at the top of the cave.

If you look up through the eye from inside the cave, you will see the beautiful blue Mediterranean sky. This is the classic vantage point, where the water, beach, eye, and sunshine collide to produce a photo journal-worthy memory.

You can also climb the cliffs above the cave and peer down through the eye. You won’t get too close, though, as there is a fence around it. When you look down, you will see a beautiful sandy beach, rock walls, and lapping waves. There will be plenty of beachgoers and tourist boats floating by, too.

A boat tour of the Benagil Caves.

Subodh Agnihotri / Shutterstock

2. View The Caves By Boat

Boat tours are the most popular and easiest way to visit the Benagil Caves. With many options to choose from, you will surely find something to suit your pocketbook and preferences. Taruga Benagil Tours, for example, offers a selection of boat tours.

Most tours will include the surrounding caves along with Benagil Cave, so you will have ample opportunity to view the rock formations from the boat. You will not, on most tours, be able to get off the boat in the caves. If you want to walk on the Benagil Cave beach, be sure to check if this is an option before you book.

When you reach Benagil Cave, the smaller boats will queue up as only a few are allowed to enter the cave at a time due to its small size. Once it is your turn to enter the cave, you will have a few minutes to snap photos from the boat and then it will be time to exit. Larger boats may not fit inside the cave, so be sure your tour specifies an inside-cave viewing if that’s what you’re after.

Private and group boat tours are offered out of Benagil Beach and several other beaches in the area. The variety of boating excursions run from 30 minutes up to 3 hours. You should plan your booking ahead of time. During the offseason, October through April, the seas can be rough and the boats may not sail.

Benagil Caves in Portugal.

Nido Huebl / Shutterstock

3. Bathe In The Mediterranean Sunshine

The beautiful beach, Praia de Benagil, is surrounded by soaring cliffs that protect the beach from the wind and offer a spectacular backdrop. The golden sand is soft with no stones. The water temperature ranges from 59 degrees in February to 73 in August. The air temperature ranges between 50 degrees in February and 82 in August. The sun is strong, so make sure to pack your sunscreen, sunglasses, and a hat.

The water can be rough and have a strong current, so you need to be cautious when swimming. Wading and sunbathing are the name-of-the-game here.

A word of caution, sitting against the cliff backdrop may appear to be a great idea for shade and windbreak, however, falling rocks can be an issue.

Inside Benagil Cave in the Algarve region.

D.Bond / Shutterstock

4. Kayak Or SUP For An Up-Close Encounter

Kayaking to the caves provides you with more control over your visit. Try this Benagil Cave Kayak Tour from Viator, which offers small-group (maximum 20 people), early morning excursions to the cave, where you can dock your kayak and walk around. You will be allowed to spend about 30 minutes in the cave to walk, swim, and take photos without the midday crush of tourists.

If you desire complete autonomy during your Benagil Cave visit, rent a stand-up paddle (SUP) board. It is a great way to visit the caves and have the freedom to stay for as long as you wish. Keep in mind you will be navigating by the tour boats, which can create a choppy wake. You can rent boards on Benagil Beach.

Swimming to the caves is an option, albeit risky and not recommended. It is a short swim (about 10 minutes), but the current and tide are difficult to navigate and the water is filled with boats.

View from the top of Benagil Caves.

Benny Marty / Shutterstock

5. Experience Exquisite Photo Opportunities

If you can visit the cave early in the morning, the sun pours through the eye, creating a magical play on the rock formations. Professional and amateur photographers alike will be blown away by the beautiful cave.

Take a hike to the tops of the cliffs near the beach, and you will be rewarded with spectacular panoramic views of the Mediterranean.

Be sure to bring your camera waterproofing protection. The boat rides can be choppy and splash up water frequently.

Cliffs of the Benagil Caves in Portugal.

mec17 / Shutterstock

6. It’s An Adrenaline Rush For Adventure Seekers

If you need something to get your heart pumping, try rock jumping. Climb to varying heights along the cliffs adjacent to the beach, screw up your courage, and jump into the water below. What a rush! You will need to be a strong swimmer and agile hiker to attempt this adventure. You can, however, watch the rock jumpers and enjoy the experience vicariously, too.

Aerial view of the Algarve coast near Benagil Caves.

F8 studio / Shutterstock

7. The Area Is Easy To Drive

Praia de Benagil is about 15 minutes from Lagoa by car. The views from the road are everything you would expect them to be, with gorgeous panoramic views of the beaches, cliffs, and water at every turn.

Parking is free at Benagil Beach in the lot on top of the cliffs. You will have to walk down a steep hill to reach the beach if you park here. To park closer to the beach, you can try along the side of the road, but it is steep. You will need to take care, using the emergency brake and tire blocks if you have them. Parking, in general, is limited, so plan to arrive early in the morning or late in the afternoon.

Depending on where you are staying, there are alternative transportation options. There is a public bus from Lago to Praia do Carvalho. From there, you can take a taxi to Praia de Benagil or enjoy a 25-minute walk along the coastline.

8. Dine On Sumptuous Portuguese Seafood

There is a small snack shack on the beach and several restaurants a short walk up from the beach. These restaurants, famous for offering traditional, fresh-catch seafood, are also working to catch up digitally. All have Facebook pages, but don’t expect fully functioning websites. Most of the restaurants are closed for the month of December.

O Pescador Benagil overlooks Benagil Beach. It’s perched on a cliff and offers fresh seafood in the true Portuguese style. It is a perfect place for a special dinner.

Brisa do Mar treats diners to beautiful views of the sea. Here, you’ll be served traditional local favorites in a quaint and cozy space.

O Algar is a family-run restaurant that offers casual dining and exquisite seafood.

Views from a beautiful Airbnb in Portugal.

Airbnb

9. Stay The Night

Airbnb offers beautiful stays located between Benagil and Carvalho. The prices are reasonable and the views are killer.

The Benagil Caves are a bucket-list stop on your visit to the Algarve. This Mediterranean hot spot will fill your journey with nature’s awe-inspiring wonder.

Note that high tourist season runs between June and September, with July and August seeing the most visitors, so plan accordingly.

Vacationing in Portugal? Here’s why Madeira is Portugal’s best-kept secret, plus eating local in Portugal: the best food and drinks to try.

]]>
How To Spend 72 Enchanting Hours In The Scottish Highlands https://www.travelawaits.com/2487876/72-enchanting-hours-in-scottish-highlands/ Thu, 09 Jan 2020 19:37:15 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2487876/72-enchanting-hours-in-scottish-highlands/ A great grassy landscape full of sloping green peaks, sparkling lochs, and proud castles, all set against an azure sky, the Scottish Highlands defies the imagination.

]]>

A great grassy landscape full of sloping green peaks, sparkling lochs, and proud castles, all set against an azure sky, the Scottish Highlands defies the imagination. This heather-scented, hearty Scotland is what most people think of when they envision the country.

Although you could easily spend several weeks wandering the Scottish moors and acquainting yourself with their tiny towns and villages, it’s possible to check out the best of the Highlands within three days if you plan strategically. The key is to travel within a specific section.

This article focuses on the area between Loch Ness and the Isle of Skye, a complete journey of roughly 2.5 to 3 hours. This will give you enough leeway to relax and soak in the atmosphere while still enjoying the best that the Scottish Highlands has to offer.

Here’s how to spend 72 enchanting hours in the Scottish Highlands.

Loch Ness in the Scottish Highlands.

Alinute Silzeviciute / Shutterstock

Try To Spot Nessie

You can’t visit the Scottish Highlands without paying tribute to its most famous resident. Nessie is the notoriously bashful monster who occasionally makes an appearance gliding along the misty waters of Loch Ness. According to legend, Nessie is dark green or grey with a lanky body and a long neck. Visitors can try to spot the elusive Nessie on one of the lake’s many boat tours. Plan to spend between 1 and 4 hours on the lake.

Loch Ness is also home to one of the most important castles of medieval times: Urquhart Castle. Tour the great ruins and take in the beautiful view of Loch Ness and the Scottish Highlands beyond. Some areas of Urquhart Castle are wheelchair-friendly, but there are other places in the fort that could pose problems for those with mobility concerns.

Eilean Donan Castle in the Scottish Highlands.

lowsun / Shutterstock

Tour One Of The Most Iconic Castles In The Highlands

Eilean Donan Castle looks like it jumped right from the pages of a fairy tale. This island-bound structure is surrounded by interwoven lochs and set against the magnificent backdrop of the western Scottish Highlands.

Eilean Donan Castle also enjoys quite a bit of cinematic fame. It’s been used as a set for plenty of movies and television shows, including Highlander, and is one of the most-recognized castles in the world. Plan to spend a few hours exploring Eilean Donan Castle to truly appreciate it.

Unfortunately, those with mobility issues could find it difficult to navigate the uneven terrain or pass through some of the narrower passageways. Eilean Donan Castle offers a virtual tour of the grounds, however, and you can always explore the visitor center and flatter areas of the island and castle exterior.

Beautiful landscape of Glen Coe.

JeniFoto / Shutterstock

Hike In Glen Coe

It’s hard to believe that one of the loveliest places in the Scottish Highlands was the site of the infamous Glen Coe Massacre, where the MacDonald clan met a grisly fate.

Today, Glen Coe is a more peaceful place — a place where nature is celebrated. Glen Coe’s walking and hiking trails wind through some of the most spectacular spots in the northern Scottish Highlands. The trails vary in difficulty and length, but all of them require proper hiking boots.

Bring a lightweight rainproof coat and an extra pair of socks, as well as plenty of water, bug spray, and snacks. Most of the animals in the Scottish Highlands aren’t dangerous, but the terrain can be rough and slippery depending on the season. Bring a whistle along and let someone you trust know where you are going before you hit the trail.

Pitlochry Golf Course in the Scottish Highlands.

Wollertz / Shutterstock

Get A Round Of Golf In

Scotland is famous for its legendary golfing. The rich fields of grass and heather are absolutely optimal for putting 18 holes. No matter what your skill level, you’ll find a course that’s perfect for you. Explore the links yourself or sign up for one of Scotland’s golf tours. It’s a great way to weave together leisure and fitness on your vacation.

Most courses are relatively flat, but many of them require some gentle uphill walking. In order to fully enjoy the game, you’ll need to be moderately fit and able to stand for a certain amount of time.

Need to upgrade your clubs before such a trip? Check out TaylorMade’s latest deals!

The Clava Cairns in the Scottish Highlands.

Jaime Pharr / Shutterstock

Visit The Ancient Cairns

Many ancient people called the Scottish Highlands home, and memorials and burial sites are scattered all over the moors and valleys of the region. The Clava Cairns are thought to be at least 4,000 years old.

Open year-round, the ancient cemetery is a somber place with great religious significance. The cairns themselves are built to face the setting winter sun, which has led some experts to speculate that their positioning coincided with the winter solstice.

The Clava Cairns can be fully appreciated in about an hour, although you might want to budget a little more time for taking pictures. The terrain is slightly rocky and rough, although not completely impassable for those with mobility concerns.

Beautiful landscape in the Fairy Glen.

Valery Egorov / Shutterstock

Spend Some Time In The Fairy Glen

The United Kingdom has its fair share of fairy mythology, and Scotland is certainly no exception. The Isle of Skye in the northwestern part of the Scottish Highlands takes its celebration of sprites to the next level with Fairy Glen, a curious bit of landscape that seems more than a touch magical.

Fairy Glen consists of stout rock formations, crooked trees, and shallow caves where you can leave a coin tribute to the magical creatures. You’ll need a moderate level of fitness to be able to explore it enjoyably, and the paths can be muddy during certain parts of the year. Seeing the entire Fairy Glen takes roughly an hour.

Inverlochy Castle in the Scottish Highlands.

Celtic Castles

Pick A Historic Accommodation — Or Go Camping

When it comes to deciding where to lay your head in the Scottish Highlands, you’ve got plenty of options. Those craving a quaint bit of history should try an authentic bed and breakfast. If you want to be royalty for a night, why not rent out a room in a Celtic castle? It always pays to book early, especially for castle stays.

There are also plenty of camping options in the Scottish Highlands. The region is usually much cooler than the rest of the United Kingdom, even in the summer, so it’s always helpful to have winter gear on hand if you’re planning on pitching a tent on the moors.

Haggis, parsnips, and potatoes in Scotland.

Caroline Jane Anderson / Shutterstock

Sample Scotland’s Iconic Food And Beverages

Scotland’s iconic dish is haggis, and it’s unlikely that there’s any fare in the world more revered or reviled. Haggis is a bold dish consisting of organ meat, oatmeal, fat, and spices. It’s generally boiled and served with potatoes and parsnips. The Scots love their haggis so much that they’ve even engineered haggis-flavored potato chips, a delightfully salty and addictive snack.

A less controversial option is Cullen skin. This creamy fish soup is the ideal marriage of potatoes, leeks, and haddock. Eat it with a generous slice of bread for comfort food at its finest.

Scottish dessert options are equally hearty. Scones with clotted cream and jam are a popular snack, as is shortbread. Scottish shortbread is a buttery, decadent treat that pairs perfectly with tea or coffee. These snacks also make phenomenal souvenirs.

Of course, you should wash down all of this robust food with some fine Scotch whisky. This region of Scotland is dotted with distilleries, each one putting its own unique spin on single malt or blended whiskies. Generally, Scotch from the Highlands features notes of heather and dried fruit.

Scottish souvenirs of whiskey and tartan print.

Lukassek / Shutterstock

Go Shopping

Scotland’s finest whiskies are popular souvenirs, but there are stringent rules regarding exporting and importing spirits. If your bottle is greater than 3.4 ounces, you won’t be able to bring it in your carry-on. Stow fragile bottles of Scotch whisky in your checked luggage and make sure that they are firmly tucked in place. It’s a good idea to wrap bottles in towels, blankets, or even sweatshirts to prevent them from jostling around.

Scottish shortbread is another fabulous gift, and you can get it just about anywhere in the Highlands. Most shortbread cookies come in small, attractive tartan-print tins, making them excellent stocking stuffers or hostess gifts. Scottish shortbread is authentic, relatively inexpensive, and a true crowd-pleaser.

Tartan-print products like ties or scarves make fantastic gifts that are easy to pack. If you want to go the extra mile, you can always pick up a kilt. Scottish kilts have a long, proud history going back to the clans of yesteryear. Since each tartan pattern relates to a specific clan, it’s possible to find kilts, scarves, ties, or other printed products that reflect the lineage of people today. These sorts of gifts are excellent choices for friends and loved ones of Scottish descent.

Wool sweaters and scarves are other popular gifts from the Scottish Highlands. They are handmade, durable, and will be cherished for many years.

EyesTravelling / Shutterstock

The Highlands is a uniquely beautiful region of the United Kingdom full of lore, history, and culture. Treat yourself to three amazing days wandering the lovely and lonely moors, hills, and lochs. This enchanting country is nothing short of bucket-list-worthy!

Want more to add to your Scotland itinerary? Here are seven reasons to visit Fingal’s Cave, plus how to visit Hirta, the remote Scottish ghost island.

]]>
9 Underrated Thailand Destinations That Belong On Your Bucket List https://www.travelawaits.com/2487849/underrated-thailand-destinations-bucket-list/ Thu, 09 Jan 2020 18:37:15 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2487849/underrated-thailand-destinations-bucket-list/ While you certainly shouldn’t overlook Bangkok or Koh Samui, there are plenty of other Thai treasures to include on your bucket list.

]]>

When most people think of the Land of Smiles, they picture the balmy, sun-drenched beaches of Koh Samui or the bustling streets of Bangkok. While you certainly shouldn’t overlook the capital city or idyllic Koh Samui, there are plenty of other Thai treasures that shouldn’t be missed.

These off-the-beaten-path destinations showcase the best of splendid Siam, and each one is a bucket-list-worthy journey all on its own.

The train on the River Kwai Bridge in Kanchanaburi.

TAMVISUT / Shutterstock

1. Kanchanaburi

Kanchanaburi is a peaceful town with a tragic past. During World War II, POWs were forced to construct a railroad between Siam and neighboring Burma. The project, dubbed Death Railway, cost many POWs their lives as they grappled with excessive heat, tropical diseases, and fatigue. The Bridge on the River Kwai, a major motion picture from 1957, details their struggle. Today, you can pay your respects to the fallen and even ride a portion of Death Railway.

Kanchanaburi is now quite a different place, and its location on the River Kwai makes it a hub for fresh seafood and plenty of water-related sports.

It’s also home to one of the most whimsical places to stay in the kingdom: Banphasawan. This resort is made up of various fruit-shaped accommodations — it is certainly one of the most unique places in the world to lay your head!

Beautiful landscape in Pai, Thailand.

Viktoriya Krayn / Shutterstock

2. Pai

Pai is a dreamy little artistic town in northern Thailand. Just 3 hours from Chiang Mai by car, Pai is both accessible and just far enough off the tourist map for you to have an authentic experience.

Full of natural splendor and plenty of hiking, Pai is the ideal destination for those who want to lace up their boots and explore Thailand’s rugged north.

Shopping aficionados and bargain hunters will find their Eden on Pai’s Walking Street, where you can get authentic Thai souvenirs for exceptionally reasonable prices.

Pai is also one of the best places in the country to sample khao soi, an addictive combination of decadent coconut curry, egg noodles, and chicken. Khao soi is the definitive dish of the Thai north — it is often called “northern noodles” — and you can’t leave the kingdom without sampling some.

Khao Yai National Park in Thailand.

24Novembers / Shutterstock

3. Khao Yai National Park

Just 3 hours from Bangkok by train is one of Thailand’s natural gems. Khao Yai National Park is a massive park and UNESCO World Heritage site that is home to hundreds of different species, big and small.

The area is the ultimate wild getaway: a vast expanse of terrain just begging to be explored. Bicycles and motorbikes are available at the entrance of the park, but a common and safe way to get around inside is hitchhiking.

Most people camp inside of the park, and you can rent everything that you need to hunker down in the wilderness. If you decide to walk on the Thai wild side and spend the night under the stars, make sure that you clean up your campsite thoroughly. Monkeys frequent Khao Yai National Park and will gladly raid your camp if given the chance.

Khao Yai is also home to plenty of snakes, so wear thick socks and hiking boots. Although some refreshments are available within the park, it’s better to bring food and water with you, especially on long hikes.

Phra Chula Manee Pagoda in Nakhon Sawan.

Ekkachai / Shutterstock

4. Nakhon Sawan

Nakhon Sawan is a major city on the Ping River that’s often overlooked by tourists but popular with locals and visitors in the know.

This jewel of the Thai north is notable for its extraordinary food, specifically its elevation of the humble fish ball. Residents pluck fresh fish directly out of the Ping and pair carefully crafted fish balls with noodles and fragrant broth. The result is a deeply flavorful dish that is unique to this part of the country.

This city offers a much more authentic Thai experience and an entirely different geographical landscape. Visit the Nakhon Sawan Tower for one of the best sunsets that you’ll ever experience, or wander through some of the city’s ancient chedis.

Nakhon Ratchasima, or Korat, in Thailand.

BaLL LunLa / Shutterstock

5. Korat

The official name of this city is Nakhon Ratchasima, but everyone knows it as Korat, one of the most prominent cities in Isan. Most tourists haven’t even heard of Korat, but it’s a popular destination for expats and Thais who want to dip their toes in Isan culture while still having access to the modern amenities of a city.

Korat is roughly 5 hours away from Bangkok by train and boasts one of the most comprehensive museums of Thai art and archeology, the Maha Viravong National Museum.

Korat is also the birthplace of a special breed of cat. The sleek, silver Korat Cat is supposed to bring good luck and is one of the most revered animals in the city.

For more animal encounters, check out the world-class Korat Zoo. It’s a wonderful, family-friendly place to pass the afternoon.

The White Temple in Chiang Rai.

Pikoso.kz / Shutterstock

6. Chiang Rai

Most visitors to the Thai north make a beeline for Chiang Mai, and while this incredible city is well worth a visit, you shouldn’t miss its humble cousin Chiang Rai, about a 4-hour bus ride from Chiang Mai. Alternatively, you could hop on a domestic flight to the Mae Fah Luang Airport. Flying takes roughly 45 minutes.

Like Chiang Mai, Chiang Rai is wreathed in mountains, making it an ideal spot for those who love the great outdoors.

Chiang Rai’s biggest draw is Wat Rong Khun, known regionally as the White Temple. This ornate, alabaster temple is known for its otherworldly beauty and phenomenal design.

Chiang Rai is also noteworthy for its Night Bazaar, a celebration of sumptuous street foods and traditional Thai handicrafts.

Aerial view of Koh Larn, Thailand.

Lifestyle Travel Portrait / Shutterstock

7. Koh Larn

Skip the touristy destinations of Koh Samui and Phuket and get your dose of Vitamin Sea on Koh Larn, a lesser-known slice of paradise off the coast of Pattaya. This idyllic island has marvelous beaches, azure waters, and unparalleled views of the sunset.

What’s more, it hasn’t hit the tourist map yet. Unlike many of the beaches on the more popular Gulf islands, the pristine beaches of Koh Larn aren’t jammed with clubs or bars, making them the perfect spots for relaxation. Koh Larn’s Lareena Resort is a fabulous place to stay right on the shore.

While visiting Koh Larn, why not try your hand at some water sports? The clear coastal waters are optimal for snorkeling and sea walking.

Koh Larn is a quick hour-long ferry ride from Pattaya.

A beach in Rayong, Thailand.

KUNANEK SUPAKOSOL / Shutterstock

8. Rayong

For beachy bliss without the crowds, visit Rayong. This seaside town is where you can catch the ferry to neighboring Koh Samet, but savvy visitors will linger a little longer in Rayong itself. The city is a popular Thai vacation spot but hasn’t quite caught on with the tourists, so your visit to Rayong will be an authentic experience that you won’t forget anytime soon.

Rayong’s location on the Gulf of Thailand makes it an excellent spot to sample fresh seafood. On weekends, you can visit the Star Night Bazaar Market for incredible street food and great bargains on Thai handicrafts and souvenirs.

Rayong is the best of both worlds: a city in paradise that remains blissfully tourist-free. Visit it before the secret is out.

A waterfall in Erawan National Park, Thailand.

totojang1977 / Shutterstock

9. Erawan National Park

Erawan National Park is arguably one of the loveliest natural places in Thailand — and that means a lot when you consider the magnificence of the country as a whole. It’s roughly 5 hours from Bangkok by car, and you can go by yourself or with a tour.

Erawan National Park is known for its extraordinary seven-tiered waterfall and system of caves. There are plenty of trails crisscrossing the park, and you can easily find one that suits your fitness level. Some of the trails become muddy or impassable during the rainy season, however, so make the most of your trip by traveling during the dry season.

There are snakes and all sorts of insects in Erawan National Park, so wear thick socks and hiking boots, especially while caving. It’s also a good idea to bring plenty of water and sunblock with you on your Erawan National Park adventure.

The Land of Smiles is full of fantastic and awe-inspiring things to see and do. Everyone knows not to miss the hustle and bustle of Bangkok and the beautiful beaches of Phuket. Smarter travelers realize that it pays to set aside some time to travel off the beaten path. These destinations are unique, incredible, and certainly fitting for any bucket-list Thailand adventure.

Planning a trip to Thailand? Check out these eight things to know before you go, this guide to cultural etiquette in the country, and this list of the best things to see and do while you’re there.

]]>
7 Key Lessons I Learned While Trying To Climb A Volcano In Tanzania https://www.travelawaits.com/2487626/lessons-i-learned-climbing-a-volcano-in-tanzania/ Mon, 06 Jan 2020 13:54:59 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2487626/lessons-i-learned-climbing-a-volcano-in-tanzania/ Climbing a volcano in Tanzania isn’t for everyone. Here’s what this well-traveled adventurer learned when she attempted to take on Ol Doinyo Lengai.

]]>

Over the past 21 years, Regina (my wife) and I have been to more than 45 countries. We have a division of labor: She is the planner and keeper of details, and I am the dreamer of cockamamie ideas. Between the two of us, we manage to find a happy balance of adventures and off-the-beaten-track experiences.

Unfortunately, on our trip to Tanzania, we somehow managed to accentuate the worst of both our traits and go totally off the rails. And yes, it involved attempting to summit a volcano.

1. The Challenges Of Traveling As A Couple Are Real

I love the extremes: Antarctica, the Sahara Desert, sleeping in ice hotels. Regina was not surprised to hear that I thought it would be a grand adventure to climb the Ol Doinyo Lengai (Mountain of God) volcano in Tanzania. It’s an active volcano and a sacred mountain for the Maasai people. I wanted to go to the top and see the caldron and the sunrise view of the valley. Regina had her doubts about whether this was a good idea.

2. Preparing For The Climb Is Essential

Prior to the trip, I had asked our travel agent if I needed any special equipment, how hard the climb was, and other questions. I was told that the climb was easy and that I didn’t need any special equipment. This did not prove to be true.

3. Time To Climb Means Something Different For Everyone

After the seven-hour drive to Ol Doinyo Lengai, we visited the Lake Natron waterfall and then went to our tented camp. Regina decided that she did not want to do the climb. In retrospect, she made a wise decision.

If I was going to climb the volcano, I would be on my own with our guide.

At about 9 p.m., I set off with Julius, our Maasai guide. The first part of the climb was relatively easy, but I noticed that all of the other climbers were wearing headlamps and some had face coverings. That was my first clue that I was underprepared. The other climbers also all seemed to be at least a decade, if not two, younger than me.

4. Steeper And Steeper (And Humbler And Humbler)

After the first hour or so, the climb became more rocky. Then it became steeper. We were literally climbing up the rocks — on hands and knees. The rocks were covered in volcanic ash. It was very slippery. I breathed it in. Ash was in my hair and covered my clothes. I climbed in sneakers, not hiking shoes, and my feet kept slipping. Julius, on the other hand, had no problems climbing in his sandals, which were made of used tire treads:

Sandals made of used tire treads.

Sue Davies / TravelForLifeNow.com

5. Then Slower And Slower

It was the middle of the night and dark, and it seemed like every single person doing the climb had already passed me. My progress was very slow and I became concerned. If I slipped and broke my leg, the nearest hospital was seven hours away.

And, what goes up, must come down. In other words, I would have to climb down these same rocks in the morning. It would be light out, but I would still be slipping and sliding. And even more fatigued.

6. Sleeping On The Side Of A Mountain Is Not For Everyone

Julius asked me if I wanted to stop climbing. I said yes and assumed that we would begin to descend. He said that we would have to wait until daybreak to go down. My heart sank. Then I thought about it. I realized that it would be quite dangerous to try to descend in the dark. Julius curled up and promptly went to sleep. I tried to sleep, too.

7. Daybreak’s Arrival Can Be A Welcome Relief

It was cold and I was freezing. Julius loaned me his wrap and went back to sleep. I didn’t sleep much as I waited for daybreak. It seemed like it would never come, but it did. And then we slip-slided down the mountain, carefully. Since we were only partway up, we weren’t crowded by other climbers. I was relieved to get off the ash-covered rocks and then to the bottom of the mountain and back to camp.

I was never so happy to return to Regina, a hot shower, and breakfast.

View from the writer's climb up the volcano.

Sue Davies / TravelForLifeNow.com

The Lessons Of Ol Doinyo Lengai

Ol Doinyo Lengai taught me some important lessons, including the importance of researching and being prepared for adventures. Relying only on my travel agent’s information, even though he was based in Tanzania, was not a good idea.

Regina and I also learned how to make sure that we are on the same page when traveling — to find adventures that work for both of us.

Ol Doinyo Lengai is a sacred mountain and an active volcano. It erupts about once every decade. Those are two reasons that I wouldn’t even attempt the climb again. Today, I’d choose to respect this sacred site, as well as the power of nature.

No need to climb a volcano: Here’s why a Tanzania safari should be at the top of your bucket list, plus what I learned after a volcano erupted during a trip to Ecuador.

]]>
8 Reasons To Visit The Apostle Islands In The Winter https://www.travelawaits.com/2487702/apostle-islands/ Sat, 04 Jan 2020 19:09:05 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2487702/apostle-islands/ The Apostle Islands National Lakeshore makes a great destination for a winter vacation, and whether you’re hoping to spend your days exploring or relaxing, you’ll find plenty of options.

]]>

Wisconsin’s Apostle Islands are a nature lover’s paradise, and nearly 184,000 people visit the area each year. Tourists tend to visit in the spring and summer, when the waters of Lake Superior warm to swimmable temperatures.

That’s all well and good, but if you’re looking for a gorgeous destination for a winter trip, the Apostle Islands certainly qualify, provided that you know where you’re going (and you’re willing to dress in plenty of layers).

Here are a few reasons to put this gorgeous natural area at the top of your winter to-do list.

The ice caves at the Apostle Islands.

Bryan Neuswanger / Shutterstock

1. You Can Only See The Ice Caves In Winter

The ice caves are the Apostle Islands’ most breathtaking landmarks, though they’re not exactly easy to access (nor are they always accessible). Visitors must walk over the ice of Lake Superior to visit the caves, which requires… well, ice. That means that you’ll need sustained periods of wintery weather to make the trip.

The Apostle Islands National Lakeshore staff regularly evaluates ice thickness, and visitors can only traverse the ice after several weeks of below-freezing temperatures. Major weather events can also compromise the stability of the ice, so prior to your trip, check this page to determine whether or not the ice caves are open. We can’t stress that enough — most Apostle Islands travelers head here for the ice caves, but the conditions need to be absolutely perfect for the ice to be traversable

If the weather cooperates, the mainland ice caves are enchanting. They’re located on the western end of the Mainland Unit in northern Bayfield County. Set your GPS to 90500 Meyers Road and prepare for a lengthy 1.1-mile walk in each direction. Consider bringing ski poles and heavy-duty winter boots along with heat packs, warm drinks, and other essentials.

While there are no authorized tours, visitors can explore the caves on their own during low-risk conditions. Be sure to carry cash, since there’s a small fee (currently $5 per person per day) to visit the ice caves.

A frozen waterfall in the Apostle Islands.

Alize Tran Photo / Flickr

2. You Can Photograph Frozen Waterfalls

During your approach to the ice caves, you’ll also get the opportunity to see frozen waterfalls lining the cliffs of the area. Bring your camera and make sure you know how to photograph in bright conditions. Most modern cameras (and smartphones) have a “snow” setting, but you can also set your camera’s aperture and shutter speed manually to ensure the best possible shot.

If you’re not a photography buff, the aperture setting controls the depth of the field, while the shutter speed controls the duration of the exposure. When shooting snowy landscapes, you’ll generally want a small aperture setting and a long shutter speed, but play around with the options in bright lighting to get a sense of how your camera works.

While the frozen waterfalls and icicles are beautiful to behold, resist the urge to stand near them. Icicles can come crashing down without warning, potentially causing injury, so you’re better off staying near the established cave paths.

3. You’ll Love Spending Time At The Nearby Ski Hills

Mount Ashwabay is a family-friendly recreation area with affordable day rates, well-kept slopes, and fantastic views of Lake Superior. Here, you’ll find 12 alpine runs over 65 acres, perfect for downhill skiing, snowboarding, snowshoeing, and other winter activities. There’s even a dedicated tubing hill, so if you’re traveling with family, this is a must-visit destination.

As with the ice caves, weather affects the available activities, so check the website when planning your trip. With that said, most of the trails and mountains remain accessible throughout the winter, even during short periods of unseasonably warm weather.

Views along the lakeshore in winter.

Vince In Wisco / Flickr

4. Experienced Hikers Can See Incredible Views On The Lakeshore Trail

The Lakeshore Trail is a serious undertaking, since it has a number of steep slopes and stream crossings. It extends for about 4.5 miles, but if you’re up for the challenge, it offers some of the best views of the lake during the winter.

The trail starts in the Meyers Road parking lot, so you can add it to your itinerary when visiting the ice caves (or in place of the ice caves, if the weather isn’t cooperating with your travel plans). As with the ice caves, you’ll want to dress in layers and bring a backpack with food, extra clothing, and other essentials.

5. Nearby Bayfield County Has Excellent Nordic Trails

For gentler trails, head to Bayfield County, where you’ll find an assortment of Nordic trails perfectly suited for snowshoeing and cross-country skiing. The Drummond Ski Trail system is ideal for beginners, though Nordic trails are always somewhat intense. If you’re not much of a skier, several businesses in Bayfield offer snowmobile rentals, including Adventure North Rentals.

Some of Bayfield County’s trails are free to the public, but others have modest access fees. As with pretty much every other winter activity on this list, weather can affect accessibility, but Bayfield County operates a trail website that makes research easy.

Apostle Islands National Lakeshore.
Bryan Neuswanger / Shutterstock.com

6. The Lighthouses Are Beautiful In Snowy Weather

While the Apostle Islands’ famous lighthouses are beautiful at any time of year, you’ll see them in a whole new light (pardon the pun) in the winter. Key stops include the Old Michigan Island Lighthouse, built in 1856 and retired in 1929, and Sand Island Lighthouse, built in 1881 and still in service.

In total, the Apostle Islands are home to eight historic lighthouses (nine if you count Old LaPointe Lighthouse, which is now in ruins, but still viewable), so if you spend a substantial amount of time exploring the area, you’ll inevitably encounter a few. Guided tours of the lighthouses are not available during the winter, but the structures are still quite picturesque.

7. You Can Spend A Romantic Weekend In A Cozy Lodge

Sure, summer resorts are fine, but we’ll just say it: Lodge vacations are underrated. Cozy up with family and friends at one of the many wonderful lodges near the Apostle Islands, and you’ll understand the appeal.

Great accommodations in the area include the Old Rittenhouse Inn, a historic bed and breakfast with 20 guest rooms in two striking Victorian homes. The inn has a gourmet restaurant and frequently hosts wine tastings. Be sure to check the website if you’re traveling around Valentine’s Day, since the Old Rittenhouse offers special packages for romantic getaways. If you’re traveling with a larger group, their Mystery Dinner Weekends (scheduled upon request for groups of 8 to 14 guests) also deserve some consideration.

Another option is The Lightkeeper’s Lodge, a small but luxurious hotel on Madeline Island. Amenities include gas fireplaces, jacuzzi tubs, private decks, and nautically themed artwork to help you appreciate the culture of the Apostle Islands.

Lodging is typically less expensive in the winter, but you’ll still want to plan your trip as early as you can; when winter conditions make the ice caves accessible, lodge rooms tend to fill up quickly.

8. You Can Enjoy Quiet Comfort On Madeline Island

You’ll travel to the Apostle Islands to enjoy the natural beauty, but that doesn’t mean that you’ll spend your entire trip in total isolation. Madeline Island, the largest of the islands, has a wonderful (and slightly weird) local culture with plenty of great restaurants, bars, and other points of interest.

Stop by The Beach Club, a pub-style restaurant known for its whitefish cakes and fish tacos. During the winter, the dining hours vary, but the restaurant is open seven days a week. To ensure a spot, give them a call when scheduling your trip.

You might also grab a cup of coffee at Mission Hill Coffee House, which features a full deli, a large wine selection, and an adjoining gift shop. This little shop has a little bit of everything, and it’s a nice place to relax with friends and enjoy some conversation. This is also one of the few spots on Madeline Island with public Wi-Fi, so most travelers will find themselves heading to Mission Hill at least once.

Wherever you go, you won’t have to fight crowds. Winter isn’t a peak season for tourism on Madeline Island, so you’ll be able to enjoy the welcoming atmosphere without feeling rushed.

Tourists exploring the Apostle Islands.

mattckaiser / Shutterstock

The Apostle Islands make a great destination for a winter vacation, and whether you’re hoping to spend your days exploring or relaxing, you’ll find plenty of options. Plan your trip as early as you can, bring plenty of warm clothes, and prepare for a remarkable experience — there’s no place like the Apostle Islands, and the colder the weather, the more you’ll want to extend your stay.

]]>
9 Things To Know Before Booking A Long Safari https://www.travelawaits.com/2485938/tips-for-booking-a-long-safari/ Fri, 03 Jan 2020 18:28:03 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2485938/tips-for-booking-a-long-safari/ These safari tips will help you decide what African destination and trip duration are right for you.

]]>

I experienced the magic of my first African safari this year. It was long: three weeks to be exact. We drove from Cape Town, South Africa, to Johannesburg via Namibia, Botswana, and Zimbabwe. Before going, I thought a safari was a jeep ride to see animals in the wild. It turns out those are called game drives, and are only one part of the safari adventure. I absolutely loved my experience; however, it’s worth knowing a few things before you book yours, especially if it’ll be for two weeks or more.

A safari truck in Africa.

Heather Markel

1. You’ll Do a Lot of Driving And Have A Lot of Early Starts

I hadn’t thought about how big Africa is. The drive from Cape Town to Victoria Falls is over 3,500 miles. This meant we drove all day, most days. In order to arrive at our destinations with daylight, we often had 6 a.m. starts. You can sleep during the long drives; however, roads are usually not paved. This means that the further back in the truck you sit, the more you’ll have “the African massage” — a euphemism for the very bumpy ride. However, there’s usually nothing to do at night, so you’ll happily drift off to sleep by 9 or 10 p.m., making the early rises easier.

A wild lion in Africa.

Heather Markel

2. Safaris Aren’t Great For The Diet (Or The Body)

The real challenge of a safari is that with all the driving, you’ll be sitting most of the day. By the end of three weeks, the arthritis in my knee got so bad I had trouble walking. You’ll be instructed to buy lots of water to stay hydrated, especially in hotter countries, like Namibia. The challenge is, rest stops are only every few hours, and there are no toilets on the safari vehicles. If you request a non-scheduled stop, it will be by the side of the road and nature will be your bathroom.

You’ll also be encouraged to buy snacks for the long drives. Unfortunately, there are lots of enticing things to eat that aren’t good for the waistline. After sitting and snacking for three weeks, my pants became visibly tighter. If healthy or specific snacks like protein bars are important to you, you might consider bringing some from home to cut down on junk food.

Wild rhinos in Africa.

Heather Markel

3. It Goes Quickly And Covers A Lot Of Ground

I thought a longer safari meant slower travel. Instead, it meant more ground covered. Even a three-week safari went extremely fast because we stopped in so many places. Most safaris are made for the traveler with limited time who wants to see as much as they can in short periods.

Even though my travel agent gave me an itinerary, during the safari, I found it hard to remember where we had been just a few days before. I suggest keeping a journal each day with any specific details you want to recall. Or, print your itinerary with spaces between each location so you can write notes about each place. Photos are also hard to recall if you don’t tag them quickly. Was that gorgeous sunset in Namibia or Botswana? Did I see that huge elephant in Chobe or Etosha? Taking notes is essential for remembering details later.

A safari tour crossing sand dunes in Africa.

Heather Markel

4. Be Honest About Your Travel Preferences

Depending on your budget and travel style, there are many ways to do a safari. Though the driving is always included, the lodging varies.

There are camping safaris, known as “overland” tours and accommodated tours, during which you’ll sleep in a lodge or hotel room. The more expensive the tour, the more luxurious your room. I did a budget accommodated tour. I found the lodges wonderful. They weren’t the Ritz Carlton, but they usually offered a good night’s rest and a decent shower and had mosquito nets.

The camping version is different than glamping (you’ll want to ask your tour company which version it offers). Overland camping safaris typically involve using “bush toilets” (a polite way to say you’ll be digging holes) or shared outdoor toilets. Glamping will offer you a bed in a tent and the possibility of a toilet, though it could be outdoors. You should ask whether or not you need to bring your own camping gear.

The type of tour you book will impact your food, which can range from budget to gourmet. On a budget tour, you’ll have some meals on your own account, meaning you have to buy some of them in a supermarket or at a restaurant. No matter which option you choose, expect the crew to be excellent at handling food allergies and dietary restrictions when they cook your meals.

Wild zebras in Africa.

Heather Markel

5. Single Supplements Could Kill Your Budget

If you’re traveling solo, single supplements (the cost associated with participating solo on a tour that generally assumes the participation of couples) can be as high as one-third of the safari price. If you meet a fellow solo traveler and get along, you could share a room and get some of your money back. If you do more than one safari with the same company, you should be eligible for a discount. Always ask.

Wild elephants in Africa.

Heather Markel

6. Don’t Overpack

This is not the time to bring your entire wardrobe with you. Your safari truck has cubby holes for your bags or a small luggage vehicle at the back. There are strict size limits because your bag won’t fit if it’s too large. If your safari is full, there won’t be room on a seat for it. Soft duffel bags are better than structured suitcases with wheels unless they’re carry-on size. Another thing to consider is that every night you’ll have to take your luggage off the truck to access clothes and toiletries, and every morning, you’ll have to put your bag back on the bus. I ended up putting my daily essentials into a tote so I could leave my larger bag in its cubby hole. Some lodges have laundry facilities, so it’s best to wash clothes and wear them again rather than packing something different to wear each day.

A wild leopard in Africa.

Heather Markel

7. You Might Not Get Along With Everyone

Longer safaris mean a substantial amount of time with strangers. While that can be great if everyone in your group gets along, it’s not so fun if you don’t. During a long ride, when days can be tiring and everyone needs to stretch, personality conflicts may happen. Consider that you’re likely to have people of different ages and several different nationalities on the safari. Having compassion is a must.

Acacia trees in Africa.

Heather Markel

8. Choose Your Route According To The Experience You Want

Africa is huge. Depending on your available time and budget, you’ll need to choose what you’d most like to see. If you plan to start in South Africa, for example, there are different safaris available out of Cape Town than there are out of Johannesburg. You may want to choose the countries you’ll visit by types of animals you’re likely to see, the countries that’ll be visited, or even by malaria risk. Many tours also feature a visit to a local tribe, which, in my opinion, was one of the most fascinating activities we participated in.

A wild giraffe in Africa.

Heather Markel

9. Animal Sightings Are Not Guaranteed

The greatest thing about the wildlife in Africa is that its in the wild, not a zoo. That means the animals are free to roam anywhere they please, whenever they want, and it won’t always be in front of your safari truck. I was outrageously lucky to see all the wildlife I did. Our tour guide told us he had been to Etosha in Namibia the week before, and they saw only one lion and a few elephants, whereas we saw almost every animal possible. If your goal is to see all of “The Big 5,” your best bet is to go to one of the national parks, like Kruger in South Africa, spend a week there, and do a game drive every day to increase your chances.

Long safaris are one of the most amazing life experiences you can have. I highly recommend doing multiple! If you know what you expect to see and do, and the type of travel you want to have, you’ll create memories you’ll cherish for the rest of your life.

Want more on safaris? Here’s why a Tanzania safari should be at the top of your bucket list, plus what happened when one of our writers finally went gorilla trekking in Uganda (and why it was worth the wait).

]]>
Beyond Chichen Itza: Maya Ruins In The Yucatan Worth Visiting https://www.travelawaits.com/2486230/beyond-chichen-yucatan-itza-mayan-ruins/ Wed, 01 Jan 2020 21:34:28 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2486230/beyond-chichen-yucatan-itza-mayan-ruins/ Maya ruins on the Yucatan in Mexico go way beyond Chichen Itza.

]]>

Everyone who visits or has plans to visit the Maya Riviera in the Yucatan knows about Chichen Itza. Being a World Heritage Site and home to the Pyramid of Kukulcan, one of the New Seven Wonders of the World, this is no surprise.

Dominating the center of the site, the Pyramid of Kukulcan alone is worth the visit. Four identical stairways lead to the top, with the number of steps adding up to the number of days in a solar year (364+1 step leading to the temple on top).

The Pyramid of Kukulcan in Chichen Itza.

Jeff Fromm

Serpents, representations of the Maya God Kukulcan, adorn the stairways, and during the spring and fall equinoxes, the shadow of the great serpent seems to descend the stairs during sunset.

The famous pyramid is just the tip of the iceberg at this site. Chichen Itza is also home to the largest ball court in Mesoamerica, an ancient observatory, and a few other structures, including the Temple of the Warriors and the Mercado, that are worth visiting.

But because of all this, it is also one of the most visited and most crowded Maya archaeological sites. To protect it, you can’t get too close to any of the structures.

The good news is, the peninsula features many more Maya sites, where you can touch and even climb pyramids. Those who would rather not fight the crowds in Chichen Itza or want to explore structures they can get close to have plenty of alternatives. The following sites are just a few of them.

Nohoch Mul in Coba.

Emese Fromm

Coba

One of the largest and best-known Maya sites on the Yucatan Peninsula, the ruins of Coba in the state of Quintana Roo get plenty of visitors, but never feel as crowded as Chichen Itza. Part of the reason is the size and setting of the ruins.

Spreading over 30 square miles in a dense jungle off the main tourist road, the site can accommodate large numbers of visitors without feeling overcrowded. The ancient city is not so much one site, but a large group of multiple clusters of buildings centered around the main pyramid, Nohoch Mul.

Thousands visit the site to climb its famous pyramid at the end of a long trail through the jungle, but those who get there early enough can still be alone on its top, overlooking the rest of the site and the jungle canopy that covers most of it. The stairs are eroded, so climbing it is a bit dangerous, and strenuous (it has 130 steps) — so not for everyone — but a rope in the center helps, and with plenty of stops for rest, most people can handle it.

Xaibe, another Mayan structure in Coba.

Linsey Stevens

Other groups of structures in the archeological zone include the Coba Group, which features a pyramid called La Iglesia and a ballcourt; the Conjuncto Las Pinturas, which features a small pyramid with vivid paint still visible inside the temple from a certain angle (climbing this pyramid is not allowed); and the Macanxoc Group, with some of the most elaborate stelae (Maya writing and images on large stone slabs) of the Maya world.

While the trails between the structures are long, those who can’t walk that far or prefer to get there faster can rent bicycles or hire a “Maya taxi,” bicycles (operated by Maya locals) with two seats on the front for site visitors.

The Pyramid of the Magician in Uxmal.

Emese Fromm

Uxmal

A UNESCO Heritage Site, Uxmal is one of the largest Maya sites in the state of Yucatan. Its main pyramid, the Pyramid of the Magician, dominates the site. According to legend, a dwarf magician, hatched from an egg, built it in one night. It is a great story, but in fact, the pyramid seen today was built on top of an older one, which was on top of an even older one, going back to five distinctive structures layered on top of each other. The result is one of the most impressive pyramids on the Yucatan. As spectacular as it is though, it is not the only building Uxmal is worth visiting for.

Built in the distinctive Puuc style, the city comprises ornate buildings adorned with carvings of serpents, elaborate latticework, and masks of the Maya rain god Chak. Two of the best examples that really stand out are the Palace of the Governors and the Nunnery Quadrangle. Both feature Chak masks, serpents, elaborate latticework, and columns.

The Mayan ruins at Uxmal.

Vadim Petrakov / Shutterstock

Though the Pyramid of the Magician is closed to climbing, visitors need not leave without getting on top of a large pyramid. The Great Pyramid has a good reconstructed stairway that makes climbing relatively easy and offers a panoramic view of the site from its top.

Though Uxmal is on the tourist track and gets crowded occasionally, it’s large enough to give any visitor a chance to be alone with the ruins.

The Mayan ruins at Ek Balam.

Anton_Ivanov / Shutterstock

Ek Balam

A compact site, Ek Balam is the spectacular home to the largest (though not tallest) Maya structure in Yucatan: its Acropolis. Excavations here started in 1997, so it is a relatively new-to-visitors site and features some of the most ornate motifs and statues found on the peninsula to date. The Acropolis adorned by these statues is open to climbing, allowing visitors to get close to them. The stairway is safe and sturdy and allows visitors to rest along the climb, admiring the statues and bas-reliefs. The highlight of the structure is halfway up the stairs, where a monster-like figure — the black jaguar that gave the site its name — guards the entrance to the Underworld. Its walls are decorated with some of the most impressive statues and carvings.

The Mayan ruins at Ek Balam.

Jeff Fromm

Stopping here is always a great respite from the Yucatecan sun, too, as you’ll be protected by a thatched roof. Those who make it to the top are rewarded for their efforts by a great panoramic view of the site and the surrounding jungle.

Other structures at the site include three palaces, a ball court, and the ancient entrance gate. Walking through the ruins is an easy stroll, and most of the path is shaded by mature trees.

Mayan pyramid at Muyil.

Emese Fromm

Muyil

Though in ancient times Muyil, also known as Chunyaxche, was one of the most densely populated towns on the coast of the Yucatan Peninsula, it is a smaller site, hidden in the jungle. Since it sits in the northwest boundaries of the Si’an Ka’an Biosphere Reserve, visiting the archaeological site also includes walking through a dense, protected jungle. The site’s largest reconstructed structure is the Castillo. Standing at 57 feet tall, it is the highest building on the coast. Though reconstructed (in 1998), the stairway is still not safe, so it is closed to climbing, but it is spectacular. On the east side of the pyramid, a replica of an original bas-relief sculpture of herons is visible close to the top. A few other structures, including smaller pyramids and a cave, are also worth a stop. The path through it all is well-maintained gravel and is flat, making it a pleasant, easy stroll for visitors, regardless of fitness level.

The nature reserve near Muyil.

Gino Caballero / Shutterstock

Don’t leave the archaeological site without a walk through the Si’an Ka’an Reserve, though. A path starting behind the Castillo leads to a small wooden hut, where for a modest fee you can enter the preserve and walk out to the lagoon. This trail, on a raised boardwalk, might be the highlight of your visit. Surrounded by dense jungle, walking above freshwater boiled up from cenotes, if you are quiet, you’ll likely encounter wildlife.

The pyramid at Mayapan.

Jeff Fromm

Mayapan

One of the last great Maya capitals before the Spanish arrived on the peninsula, Mayapan is like a smaller copy of Chichen Itza. In fact, its main building is an almost identical replica of the Pyramid of Kukulcan. Other than its size, the main difference is that visitors can climb this one and get a great view of the whole site.

Speaking of getting close to the structures, the Temple of the Painted Niches is open to walk through and you can enjoy the still-vivid colors of its murals, similar to those found in the central parts of Mexico. In fact, the murals are the only elements that differ from Chichen Itza. The Observatories, cylindrical buildings that are replicas of the Observatory of Chichen Itza, had the same astronomical use: tracking the planets. Carvings inside the Main Observatory show the tracking of the positions of Venus.

The Mayan ruins at Mayapan.

DroneHero29 / Shutterstock

The ceremonial center on the west edge of the site comprises the most important structures, including the residences of the noble class, and administrative, religious, and government buildings. Temples, shrines, and altars are some other highlights of the site.

Though a relatively large site, Mayapan is easy to walk through, and the structures are not too high to climb. Off the tourist track, few people know about it and even fewer visit it, so chances are you will only encounter a handful of others, or might even find yourself alone with the ancient stones.

Jaguar Heads at the Chichen Itza ruins.

John_Walker / Shutterstock

Tips For A Pleasant Maya Ruin Visit

When visiting any of the Maya ruins on the Yucatan Peninsula, make sure you have sun protection, sunscreen, and a hat, and wear lightweight clothes and comfortable walking shoes. Bug spray also goes a long way, especially in the wet season (winter months in the Northern Hemisphere). Don’t forget a water bottle.

To visit most of the above-mentioned sites, it is best to rent a car and drive to them, though public transportation is available for them, and some are part of tours from Tulum or Cancun. When driving on the peninsula, watch out for topez, or speed bumps, one on each end of any town or village. Just about everyone on the peninsula speaks English, especially the younger generation, but it might still be nice to understand and speak a few words of Spanish (or even Maya). Above all, bring your sense of adventure, and remember to have fun.

Also, why Maya and not Mayan? Scholars only use the adjective Mayan when referring to the family of Mayan languages (over 20 are still spoken), but simply use Maya for everything else, even as an adjective, including Maya civilization, Maya archaeology, and Maya ruins.

Still want to see the most famous ruins on the Yucatan? Here are seven tips for visiting Chichen Itza.

]]>
What To Know About Mudlarking On The River Thames https://www.travelawaits.com/2486354/what-to-know-about-mudlarking-river-thames/ Tue, 31 Dec 2019 15:41:26 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2486354/what-to-know-about-mudlarking-river-thames/ You could get hurt, drown, or catch mysterious diseases, but mudlarking on the River Thames is an unparalleled opportunity for London treasure hunters, experienced and amateur alike.

]]>

If looking for treasures along the River Thames in London sounds like fun, you may be a mudlark.

Mudlarking is the romantic name for scavenging on the riverbank (also called the foreshore) when the tide is out. At a show-and-tell in London, I saw some mudlarks’ finds: Roman relics, Tudor treasures, and Georgian junk. I really wanted to try it.

Mudlarking is popular and it looks easy, but there are some things you need to know.

objects found while mudlarking on the River Thames
M G Photography / Shutterstock.com

1. You Need A License, Even For Looking

There are rules for mudlarking in London. Even “just looking” requires a license.

The Port of London Authority (PLA) website has detailed information including maps and an online license application form. Application processing takes at least four weeks. Licenses cost £35 for one day or £80 for multiple days.

A Standard License lets you look and take items, but you may not dig deeper than 7.5 centimeters — or just under 3 inches — in the ground. And try to gently scrape, not aggressively dig. Replace the disturbed soil and leave no trace. This helps preserve the food chain and the health of all the river creatures.

A Mudlark License gives more privileges, but it’s only available to those with a multi-year record of responsible hunting.

To remove any mudlarking finds over 50 years old from the country, you need an export license. The PLA website has information about this, too.

2. There Are Lots Of Places You Can’t Go

Two big concerns when it comes to mudlarking are protecting the foreshore’s natural and archaeological resources and keeping mudlarkers safe.

As a tourist, you’ll probably go mudlarking in central London. From Lambeth Bridge to Tower Bridge, the Standard License lets you search most of the foreshore. On the north side, there’s no digging or disturbing the surface. And there are a few exclusion zones on both sides of the river.

The Foreshore Map — Middle District shows this stretch in detail.

3. You Can Get Hurt, Drown, Or Catch Mysterious Diseases

The area restrictions protect the archaeology and biology of the river. You must take these seriously to protect yourself from the numerous safety hazards.

You could be cut off from your exit and swept away by the tide. You might slip on the rocks, fall into the water, and be run over by a speedboat or a garbage barge. You might puncture your foot with a nail. The PLA warns that you could catch Weil’s Disease, spread by rats’ urine in the water.

Why the PLA emphasizes Weil’s Disease when you could catch just about anything from the Thames’ sewers, I don’t know, but their overall advice makes sense: Wear gloves and suitable footwear, and don’t go alone. Tell someone where you’re going and when you’ll be back. Bring your phone.

Wash your hands a lot.

Always know the tide times and have a clear escape route.

4. The Original Mudlarks Weren’t Doing It For Fun

Many 19th-century mudlarks were poor, desperate children. They made their miserable livings selling pieces of coal, bits of rope, and anything else they could find.

Two hundred years on, the mud is still dirty, the water is still cold, and the extraordinary treasures are still few and unpredictable, but mudlarking has become amateur archaeology.

mudlarking area on River Thames
John R Martin / Shutterstock.com

5. You Have A Chance To Find Something Spectacular

There’s an intriguing community of modern mudlarks who write books, make videos, and display their finds on websites and social media with hashtags like #mudlark and #londonmudlarking.

The anaerobic Thames mud is a great preservative. That’s why mudlarks find so much: pottery and glass, jewelry, buttons, pins, nails, bones, and all kinds of garbage (literally) of the ages.

While it would be fantastic to locate a Roman coin or a mediaeval pilgrim’s badge, I hoped for a clay pipe. They aren’t rare. Starting in the 1500s, pipes were used and tossed away like cigarette butts. If I found a clay pipe and then accidentally lost or broke it, that wouldn’t change the course of history. I’d rather find a pipe than a royal crown.

Jill's finds while mudlarking on the River Thames.

Jill Browne

6. The Trick Is To Slow Down

One fine August day, I finally walked down the stairs to water level. The falling tide revealed a good 10 paces of shore for me to poke around on safely.

I stared at the mud and things appeared, starting with a little white speck on the grey pebbles near my foot.

I still can’t believe it was so easy to find that first bit of pipe stem. The hole was barely big enough to draw a thread through, but it was unmistakably a piece of a clay pipe. Victory! The next fragment was bigger, clearly from a different pipe and maybe even from a different century.

As my eyes adjusted to searching, I saw how rich this small patch of ground was.

Here’s the key to success: Use the same gaze as you would for Where’s Waldo or a challenging jigsaw puzzle. Look slowly, and let the objects emerge from the background.

In 40 minutes I had pipe stems, pottery, an oyster shell, and a metal spike with a square rivet sticking out. There was a possible cup handle resembling a stem with leaves, like a museum piece from the 1700s.

7. There Are Rules About Reporting Your Finds

If you find something valuable or archaeologically interesting, you have to report it. Be sure to note the location and depth.

Reporting isn’t very practical for visitors, though. You have to make an appointment with the Portable Antiquities Scheme Finds Liaison Officer at the Museum of London by calling 020 7814 5733. Then you’ll take your items to the appointment for assessment. You might be asked to leave them behind and collect them another day.

Frankly, tourists might be better to think of mudlarking as a catch-and-release activity. If you aren’t willing to make a report, consider taking photos, making notes, and leaving the items in place. If there is an experienced mudlark nearby, you could ask their opinion, but they may be busy with their own quest. The hours between the tides are precious.

8. There May Be An Easier Way

Because of the licensing rules, export controls, and reporting procedures, mudlarking by the book can sound a bit daunting for tourists. The most crucial thing is to get that Standard License, so be sure to send away for it in lots of time.

Then, if you have a license, you can take a mudlarking tour with a guide.

Even with no license, you may take a public tour with the Thames Discovery Programme. Their website is rich in information about the foreshore and its archaeology. Check their calendar online, as the tours are not offered very often.

My own bit of mudlarking was gratifying. I touched history. I walked where those poor Victorian mudlarks had walked. Unlike them, though, I didn’t have to peddle my finds to survive. The next day, I gave everything back to the river.

Want more off-the-beaten-path fun in London? Consider “Exploring Street Art In London: 8 Things To Know.”

]]>
Where To See A Solar Eclipse In 2020 https://www.travelawaits.com/2486521/where-to-see-solar-eclipse/ Fri, 27 Dec 2019 13:31:30 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2486521/where-to-see-solar-eclipse/ Here are some places where you can see a solar eclipse in 2020, along with tips for making the most of the experience.

]]>

On August 21, 2017, the United States experienced its first total coast-to-coast solar eclipse in 99 years. It was an astounding several minutes, and those of us lucky to see it in person will remember it for the rest of our lives.

Well, most of us, anyway. On August 16 of that year, astronomer Neil deGrasse Tyson rained on our collective parade by noting that total solar eclipses occur somewhere on Earth every two years or so.

“So just calm yourself when people tell you they’re rare,” he wrote.

That immediately prompted a backlash on social media, since people were rightfully excited about seeing the totality — we didn’t need anyone wrecking our enthusiasm. However, Tyson was right; eclipses are rare, but they’re significantly less rare if you’re willing to travel to see them.

With that in mind, we’ve put together a list of places to see a solar eclipse (total or otherwise) in 2020, along with tips for making the most of the experience. Hey, if you’re looking for an excuse to take a vacation, this is as good of a reason as any, right?

Annular Solar Eclipse On June 21, 2020

On June 21, 2020, an annular eclipse will be clearly visible over parts of Africa, the Middle East, and Southeast Asia at 3:45 Universal Time.

An annular solar eclipse differs from a total eclipse in one key way: The moon is significantly farther away from Earth, so the sun is still able to emit direct light. It creates a ring in the sky — annulus is a mathematical term for a ring, by the way — but you don’t get the same weird twilight glow that you’d experience in totality. Instead, you get a “ring of fire” in the sky, which you can’t view directly without eye protection.

In short, a total eclipse is… well, much, much cooler, and we’ll discuss your options for seeing one in a moment. Still, an annular eclipse provokes deep questions about life and the universe, and frankly, the idea of traveling in June is appealing.

The Best Place To See It: Lalibela, Ethiopia

Lalibela is one of Ethiopia’s most popular tourist destinations, and it’s in a prime position to enjoy the annular eclipse. If you’re looking to experience true awe, you can’t do much better.

The town is known for its stone churches, built in the 12th and 13th centuries in an attempt to recreate the city of Jerusalem. Take a guided tour, and you can see these holy buildings in person. You’ll also see the eclipse, which will last less than a minute. Plan carefully, and it’ll be a minute you’ll remember for the rest of your life.

Another Place To See It: Muscat, Oman

The capital of Oman is one of the oldest cities in the Middle East. Numerous natural wonders surround the city, including the Bimmah Sinkhole, which is full of flawless turquoise saltwater, and Pebble Beach, a coastal area covered in perfectly round pebbles. To explore Oman’s culture, you’ll want to stop by the Sultan Qaboos Grand Mosque, a breathtakingly beautiful site with the world’s second-largest chandelier.

While Oman is on the coast, it’s also in an arid region, so you’ll have a high chance of clear skies for the eclipse. Be sure to book a reservation at a coastal restaurant, since the city is known for its incredible seafood.

Total Solar Eclipse On December 14, 2020

If you’re traveling solely to see an eclipse, you’ll definitely want to take your vacation time around December 14, when South America will get several minutes of totality.

This total eclipse will start around 16:13:30 Universal Time, shrouding the region in otherworldly light. Pick your destination carefully, and you can enjoy this breathtaking celestial event.

The Best Place To See It: Southern Chile

The eclipse will occur right around noon, and if you head to Chile, you’ll have no shortage of destinations to choose from. Our pick is fairly obvious: The mysterious statues of Easter Island should look appropriately majestic in the dim light of totality.

If that doesn’t sound thrilling enough, consider heading to the Villarrica Volcano, one of South America’s most active volcanoes. You’ll need to keep your distance from the actual peak for obvious reasons, but the prospect of seeing a total eclipse while watching a volcano erupt seems irresistible.

Another Place To See It: Western Argentina

Really, this one’s a toss-up between Argentina and Chile. We love the idea of seeing the totality from Easter Island, but Iguazu Falls might offer even more incredible views.

If you’re not familiar with this natural wonder, Iguazu Falls consists of 275 individual waterfalls on the border of Argentina and Brazil (the landmark’s name means “big water” in the Tupi or Guarani language, which seems appropriate). You can access the falls from either Argentina or Brazil.

The eclipse will hit a relatively wide region of South America, so you’ve got plenty of options. Research a few spots in Argentina and Chile and see if one seems especially appealing. NASA’s website has a map of the area of totality, which can help you develop a suitable set of options for your trip.

Tips For Witnessing A Solar Eclipse

Watch The Weather (And Be Ready To Travel)

Eclipses don’t last long; during the December 2020 eclipse, totality will last for slightly over 2 minutes, and that’s assuming perfectly clear weather. A few stray clouds could ruin the experience, even during totality, since the sun needs to be visible in the first place (obvious, we know).

As such, you should be prepared to alter your plans on short notice. Watch the weather closely in the weeks leading up to your trip and try to keep your itinerary open.

Think About Eclipse Photography Before The Big Day

If you’re hoping to get great photographs of the eclipse, bring a decent camera (no offense to your iPhone, but you’re probably not getting professional-quality photos with it). A larger focal length will give you a larger image of the sun, but if you’re serious about your craft, consider reading Nikon’s guide to eclipse photography.

Remember to focus on your own experience before worrying about your photographs. A solar eclipse is a rare event, and you don’t want to spend it worrying about apertures and focal lengths unless you’re a professional photographer.

Make Sure You’re Well Equipped For The Eclipse

Regardless of the type of eclipse, you need to find appropriate eyewear. Looking directly at the sun can permanently damage your eyes, and standard sunglasses don’t provide sufficient protection. Look for eclipse glasses explicitly designed for the task, and discard any glasses that are scratched, torn, or otherwise damaged.

As the moon moves across the sun, points of light will shine from the moon’s edges. These are called Baily’s beads, and during a total eclipse, you can remove your eye protection when the beads disappear. You’ll need to put your eyewear back on when you see the sun’s ring start to brighten.

Visit NASA’s website to learn more, especially if you’re thinking about removing your eyewear during totality.

If You’re Thinking Of Traveling For The Eclipse, Go For It

Is it silly to travel halfway across the world for a few minutes of obscured sunlight? We don’t think so, especially given that the destinations in question have plenty to offer adventurous travelers.

While solar eclipses may be relatively common according to Neil deGrasse Tyson, they’re astounding phenomena for the people who experience them, and they’re even more breathtaking when you’re on holiday.

Of course, you could just wait a few years — the United States will see another continent-wide total solar eclipse on April 8, 2024 — but where’s the fun in that? With appropriate eyewear and a couple of plane tickets, you, too, can be an eclipse-chaser — and collect some amazing memories in the process.

]]>
The Best Things To See And Do In Lake Placid https://www.travelawaits.com/2487064/things-to-do-in-lake-placid/ Mon, 23 Dec 2019 15:27:30 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2487064/things-to-do-in-lake-placid/ There’s plenty to do in Lake Placid, New York, whether or not you're into winter sports. The area makes for an incredible weekend getaway.

]]>

Lake Placid, New York, is a tiny town (about 3,000 people live there) with a massive reputation. The town hosted the 1932 and 1980 Winter Olympics and is home to a world-class training center. Locals like to boast that at least one resident of the town qualifies for the Olympics each time the event is held.

The area is famous for its natural beauty and winter sports opportunities. Even at the recreational level, however, I’m still too much of a wimp to tackle downhill skiing, speed skating, or bobsledding (though I tip my hat to those who do). I need to enjoy winter — and all seasons — at my own pace!

Thankfully, there’s plenty to do in Lake Placid even if you’re not into extreme winter sports. The area makes for an incredible weekend getaway. Here’s what I recommend.

Snowshoeing.
Nadezda Murmakova / Shutterstock.com

Give Snowshoeing A Try

I have a confession to make. I was terrified to try snowshoeing for the first time. Let’s just say that I’m not especially graceful at the best of times, let alone on snow.

But Lake Placid is the perfect place to give snowshoeing a go. There are trails for every level of confidence and ability. No matter how much of a beginner you are, you’ll still be relaxed enough to enjoy the great outdoors. I am ridiculously lacking in confidence for most athletic ventures, but even I found snowshoeing to be fun and, if not entirely easy, very intuitive.

If you’re heading to Lake Placid for the first time, here are some trails to check out (and most double as pretty hiking trails in the summer).

High Falls Gorge

In nearby Wilmington, New York, High Falls Gorge has family-friendly and beginner trails plus an impressive waterfall that’s even more striking when it’s frozen.

Little Crow To Big Crow

Little Crow to Big Crow is great for those with intermediate experience looking to up their fitness level. This route is 3.2 miles round trip.

Allen Mountain

More physically demanding, and not for novices, Allen Mountain is a challenging 18-mile round trip.

Get Your Thrills At The Lake Placid Toboggan Chute

Lake Placid isn’t your average winter town, and this isn’t your average sledding hill.

For decades, the Lake Placid Toboggan Chute has offered thrilling toboggan rides from the top of a converted ski-jump trestle dating to the 1932 Winter Olympics. Today, the steps and rails are more comfortable to climb thanks to a recent renovation. I believe its actual height is about 30 feet, but let’s just call it super high!

Riders pile onto an old-fashioned wooden toboggan and head down an icy chute onto the frozen surface of Mirror Lake. Depending on weather conditions, some toboggans travel more than 1,000 feet across the surface of the lake.

Note that the opening and closing dates of this activity vary based on weather conditions.

Dog sled rides at Lake Placid.

Lake Placid

Cuddle With Some Sled Dogs

Going on a dogsled ride is exhilarating, yet remarkably not scary for timid travelers. That’s because the happy, playful dogs are in charge, and they know the paths and routes inside out. All you have to do is sit back and enjoy the ride! The speed and turns were occasionally a bit nerve-racking, but my comfort level remained firmly intact, since I was still on solid ground.

There are multiple dogsled tour operators in Lake Placid, and all adventures include cuddles with the sweet pups who pull the sled. Thankfully, this is one winter activity that has a bit of flexibility — a huge amount of snow and sub-zero temperatures aren’t necessary to make it happen.

Go For A Sleigh Ride

Look out, dogs — there’s another sled in town! Or sleigh, rather. There’s nothing so nice as being bundled up on the back of a sleigh, heading out for a gentle ride over the snow-covered trails, before finishing up with some hot chocolate.

Country Dreams Farm offers beautifully scenic sleigh rides through the snow that are cozy and snug, ideal for both couples and families. If you can, time your ride for dusk to enjoy the changing colors of the sky and snow.

During the summer months, Country Dreams offers a petting zoo and farm visits for children, and in the fall, you can enjoy a pumpkin patch and corn maze.

Theresa Lauria / Shutterstock.com

Go Wild At The Wild Center

Technically, The Wild Center isn’t in Lake Placid, but it’s worth the 40-minute drive to nearby Tupper Lake, New York.

The Wild Center, which I was fortunate enough to visit for the first time during a press trip several years ago, is an indoor and outdoor experience that brings visitors closer to nature in unexpected ways. Imagine playing in a giant spiderweb made of ropes or exploring a treehouse that’s also an eagle’s nest. The Wild Walk is a walking platform at the level of the treetops, and there are ample hiking trails on the ground as well. Words don’t do it justice — you absolutely need to experience this for yourself.

Note that hours and activities are limited in winter. I’d recommend this as an activity for late spring, summer, or early fall.

Saranac Lake Winter Carnival.
Fred Mueller / Shutterstock.com

Enjoy The Saranac Lake Winter Carnival

If you’re going to take part in a winter carnival, make it the one that’s been operating since 1897! Starting the first weekend in February, the Saranac Lake Winter Carnival is a 10-day festival that includes arts events, concerts, public skating, curling, a fun run, and more. There are also plenty of opportunities to grab great food. It’s just a few minutes from Lake Placid and is one of the most popular winter activities in the region.

Eating In Lake Placid

The Lake Placid food scene is cozy and highly social. You can expect large portions of American comfort food and a focus on local beer.

To enjoy local produce, visit the Lake Placid Farmers Market, which runs on Wednesdays from mid-June through mid-October.

Here are some of my favorite places to eat in the area.

Dancing Bears Restaurant

A snug, sociable space, Dancing Bears Restaurant is heavy on comfort food and offers dishes like burgers and fries, roast turkey with apple cider gravy, and fresh local trout. I still remember the brownie-style mug cake topped with ice cream and whipped cream fondly.

Lake Placid Pub & Brewery

Lake Placid Pub & Brewery is another lively destination that’s perfect for beers and bragging with friends after a day of outdoor adventure. The menu offers classic pub grub (the deep-fried pickles are a popular choice) and in-house brews, including porter stouts, IPAs, and English-style ales.

The Breakfast Club, Etc.

There’s nothing like an all-day breakfast spot, and The Breakfast Club, Etc. does a mighty fine job serving up eggs Benedict variations, waffles, French toast, different incarnations of potatoes, and — best of all — Bloody Marys, complete with homemade mixers. My choice — a skillet with apples, sausage, and Brie — was a delicious combination that sent me over the moon.

The Cabin Grill

Located in the Hotel North Woods, the Cabin Grill is another great Lake Placid breakfast option. There’s a good selection of yogurt- and granola-based choices, bacon and egg platters, and omelets. There are several tempting vegetarian options, too.

You can also pick up your local New York maple syrup from the staff. The Cornell Maple Program operates out of Lake Placid and is part of Cornell University’s cooperative extension program that focuses on community development, making this maple syrup sweet in more ways than one.

Shopping In Lake Placid

Main Street is positively packed with souvenir shops, and you can easily find Olympic-themed knickknacks, cute home decor items, and outdoor gear there.

Keep an eye out for a copy of A Lady in the Lake by George Christian Ortloff. It’s a compelling account of Lake Placid’s most famous mystery.

Here are some of the area’s best shopping stops.

The Adirondack Popcorn Co.

Offering the most delicious popcorn I’ve ever tried, The Adirondack Popcorn Co. is the perfect place to indulge all your savory and sweet cravings. My personal favorite is Moose Crunch, which combines popcorn, chocolate, peanut butter, nuts, and pretzels.

Saratoga Olive Oil

I fell head over heels in love with this delicious shop, which allows generous samples and tastings of dozens of different olive oils and balsamic vinegars. Persian lime, blood orange, harissa, and black peppercorn are just some of the olive oil flavors, while the vinegar selections include apricot, black cherry, cinnamon pear, and lavender.

Where’d You Get That Hat?

One of the more unique shops in Lake Placid, Where’d You Get That Hat? is a must-visit spot for headgear connoisseurs, along with anyone who enjoys spending time outdoors and is always searching for the right kind of hat. It’s fun, funky, and a bit of a local institution — chances are more than a few people will recommend that you visit.

]]>
10 Fantastic Things To Do Outdoors In Mobile, Alabama https://www.travelawaits.com/2486710/things-to-do-outdoors-mobile-alabama/ Mon, 16 Dec 2019 21:19:29 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2486710/things-to-do-outdoors-mobile-alabama/ Mobile, Alabama, is home to gators, military history, and more. Get outdoors and enjoy with these fantastic activities!

]]>

Outdoor adventures in Mobile, Alabama, naturally focus on the Gulf Coast and water activities (kayak with alligators, anyone?). You can explore the Tensaw Delta, Mobile Bay, and the Mobile River by fishing boat, eco tour, kayak, and more. Or, step off the water for a bit to visit a marshland sanctuary, explore the Alabama Bird Trail, or even see what life was like for soldiers in the 1800s.

I visited Mobile previously on a press tour. It was an eco-tour that took us around the area to see up close the diverse ecosystems both on land and water. Since Alabama is one of the most biologically diverse states in the U.S., we discovered a multitude of plants and animals in the area’s wetlands and woodlands. It’s a perfect destination to get outdoors and explore a variety of nature-centric activities.

1. Take A Delta Eco Boat Tour

Experience the diversity of the ecosystem in Mobile on a delta safari tour with Wild Native Tours. You’ll travel aboard an enclosed seasonal vessel with padded seats, a PA system, and restrooms for a 90-minute tour. Mobile is home to the most diverse ecosystem in the U.S., the fourth largest estuary in North America, and the 11th busiest port in the nation. You’ll travel from the bustling port, through Mobile Bay, and into the Mobile Tensaw Delta. You’ll see local wildlife like alligators, birds, and dolphins, naval vessels, cargo ships, plus historical landmarks like the USS Alabama. You’ll be entertained along the way with funny and interesting stories about the sights you see.

2. Watch For Dolphins On A Gulf Coast Cruise

Search for dolphins on a cruise departing from Orange Beach during which you’ll view the Alabama coastline while watching for Atlantic bottlenose dolphins. Plus, if time allows, the crew will pull up a crab pot to see if there’s a daily catch — a big favorite with children. And if the dolphins are feeling playful, you may catch them surfing in the boat wake!

According to one Viator reviewer, “The sunset cruise was so beautiful. We saw lots of dolphins and they even put on a little show when the captain created some wakes! They will allow you to bring a small cooler so we got to enjoy some wine and cheese while watching the sunset. I would highly recommend for adults and kids!”

Sunset on the delta.

Jill Dutton / USAbyRail.blog

3. Kayak The Bartram Canoe Trail

Start with a tour of the 5 Rivers Delta Center, a $10 million facility located where the Mobile, Spanish, Tensaw, Apalachee, and Blakely rivers flow into Mobile Bay. Experience the exhibit hall, learning center, walking trails, and campsites — four of which are floating platforms — and gift shop before putting into the water for a guided kayaking tour. This facility serves as a gateway to more than 250,000 acres of waterways, woods, and wetlands. Follow the Bartram Canoe Trail and be prepared to view alligators in their natural habitat.

4. Try Mountain Biking At Chickasabogue Park

The Chickasabogue Park offers 12 loop trails for a total of 14 bikeable miles. There are challenging single-track paths for experienced bikers plus easier trails for beginners. It’s an interesting journey across boardwalks that carry you over wetlands and bogs, intertwined loops, and swales if you’d like to do some mudding. To keep the trails from wearing down over time, the park alternates days you can ride certain trails.

Rootsrated, a platform for finding the best, hand-picked outdoor activities, says many riders call this the best set of trails in the Mobile area. The trails are rated intermediate but have options for beginners that allow everyone to “get their feet wet in the sport,” and technical challenges for experienced bikers. “The paths are root strewn with a few rocks, some sandy patches, some hills to climb, and plenty of swales so you can do a little mudding. There are also several boardwalks over wetlands and bogs to make the trips even more interesting.”

Birds in Mobile, Alabama.

Jill Dutton / USAbyRail.blog

5. Bird Watching

If birding is your interest, you’ll want to explore the Coastal Alabama Birding Trails on nearby Dauphin Island. If you go for spring viewing, know that Dauphin Island was named one of the top four locations in North America for viewing spring migrations. At the Audubon Bird Sanctuary, you can hike a three-mile trail system that includes maritime forest, marshes, and dunes with a lake, a swamp, and a beach. Located on 137 acres, the sanctuary is the largest segment of protected forest on the island and “the first landfall for neo-tropical migrant birds after their long flight across the Gulf from Central and South America each spring.”

The Audubon Bird Sanctuary was recognized by the National Audubon Society as being globally important for bird migrations. On a visit to the sanctuary, you can enjoy hiking, photographing the wildlife (we saw turtles and a small alligator from the dock of one lake along the trail), bird watching, and the various colors of each season.

6. Explore Fort Gaines

While you’re on Dauphin Island, stop by Fort Gaines to see how soldiers lived in the 1800s. This 19th-century brick seacoast fort houses a working blacksmith shop with live demonstrations, the Officer’s Quarters, and costumed interpreters who put on exhibitions like the firing of the actual cannons used in the Battle of Mobile Bay. You can see a video I shot of the firing of the cannon here.

The USS Alabama in Mobile.

GTD7 / Shutterstock

7. Explore The USS Alabama

Take a self-guided walking tour of the historic battleship USS Alabama, the submarine USS Drum, tanks, artillery, and the aircraft pavilion. Step back in time as you see this 100-acre battleship park up close.

The mission of the USS Alabama Battleship Commission when created in 1963 was to “establish, operate, and maintain a state memorial park to honor the Alabamians who participated so valiantly in all armed conflicts of the United States … and, as a permanent public memorial to educate the public on the contributions and sacrifices of the veterans of all branches of the United States Armed Services in all conflicts.”

8. Visit An Alligator Sanctuary

At Alligator Alley, you’ll find a swamp sanctuary, home to more than 200 American alligators and other wildlife. Walk along the elevated boardwalk to view the alligators close up. About halfway through, you’ll come upon Captain Crunch, a 13-foot, 2,982-pound alligator said to have the world’s strongest bite. View the alligators in all manner of poses, with gators from hatchlings to mature adults relaxing, sunbathing, courting, and nesting. During the tour you may also see turtles, ospreys, owls, and bullfrogs.

The alligator farm was opened by Wes Moore in 2004. Moore rescues the alligators, bringing them from unsafe areas to the farm, which is designed to give them a natural environment. The alligators are considered “nuisance animals” because they’ve lost their natural fear of humans, making them dangerous. If an alligator is more than 4 feet in length and determined dangerous to humans or their property, they must be removed. Alligator Alley becomes their new home and the safe educational walking tour is an excellent opportunity to view these massive creatures.

Downtown Mobile, Alabama.

Fotoluminate LLC / Shutterstock

9. Walk Around Downtown

In addition to the busy port, downtown Mobile is a creative hub with art galleries, shops, restaurants, and bars best explored on foot. Evenings and weekends are filled with festivals, open-air markets, live concerts, and special events. Home to America’s original Mardi Gras, you can experience the oldest organized Carnival celebration in the U.S. here. Find everything there is to know, see, and do in downtown Mobile at the Downtown Mobile Alliance.

While you’re downtown, explore Mobile’s award-winning food scene with Gulf Coast dishes like gumbo, pralines, and oysters, plus hear stories about more than 300 years of Mobile history covering everything from Bienville to Hank Aaron to the Moon Pie on a food tour.

10. Tour A Maritime Museum

Although only part of this tour is actually outdoors, for anyone interested in the maritime history of the area, a visit to GulfQuest National Maritime Museum of the Gulf of Mexico shouldn’t be missed. The mission of the museum is “to inspire people of all ages and backgrounds to understand and appreciate the Gulf Coast and its rich maritime heritage through exhibits, programs, and activities.”

With 90 interactive exhibits including theaters, simulators, and displays, it will be a day-long visit. If you don’t have an entire day to spend at the museum, don’t miss the GulfQuest Theater with its 16-minute film on the rich maritime history and culture of the Gulf of Mexico and Mobile Bay from past to present. The Take the Helm pilot simulator is another popular exhibit where visitors can try navigating a variety of vessels around the Port of Mobile, Mobile Bay, and the Tombigbee River in a simulator identical to those used to train professional boat pilots.

Want to get out on the water in Alabama? Here are eight reasons to visit Alabama’s Gulf Shores.

]]>
Zion National Park: Best Places To Stay https://www.travelawaits.com/2486662/zion-national-park-lodging/ Sun, 15 Dec 2019 21:48:17 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2486662/zion-national-park-lodging/ Looking for Zion National Park lodging? These are your best options, from someone who’s spent plenty of time in and around the park.

]]>

Zion National Park in Utah is a beautiful destination, filled with stunning scenery everywhere you look. Zion means “peace and refuge,” and many travelers feel it is a mystical place, perfect for self-reflection.

Others experience Zion as an outdoor enthusiast’s paradise because the hiking and climbing opportunities are unparalleled in their variety. Make your way to Zion in any season, though I prefer the shoulder seasons for temperate and fair weather. Fall is by far the most popular time to visit due to cooler temperatures.

There are many options for lodging during your visit. There are places in the park as well as a host of hotels, vacation homes, bed and breakfasts, and RV sites outside the park. There are even some free sites for the intrepid to use. Come along and consider where you can stay.

Zion Lodge in Zion National Park.
Patrizio Martorana / Shutterstock.com

Have A Tranquil Insider Experience

The ultimate insider experience is a stay at Zion Lodge in Zion National Park. It was rated Guest Favorite for 2019 by Hotels.com and has 4.5 stars on TripAdvisor. Location is everything for this hotel since you are in the park, on the shuttle route, and have access to everything in the park 24/7, including the night sky. There is an onsite restaurant serving three meals a day. The park shuttle does not run in the winter, but there is free parking and the park drive is open to cars.

National park lodges are a coveted reservation and Zion is no exception. Make your plans early. You have your choice of a nicely appointed hotel room or your own cabin! There is one small inconvenience of staying at Zion Lodge — no high-speed Wi-Fi (despite what the hotel room description says) and spotty cell service. Cameras work, and as soon as you get to town you can upload and download. I’ll trade Wi-Fi for the spectacular 360-degree views that will make you forget about the rest of the world.

Stay In Town Where The Action Is

There is no shortage of accommodations just outside the main South Entrance of the park in the town of Springdale. It is an artists’ community that also caters to tourists. There are shops, galleries, and a wide variety of local restaurants. Utah Highway 9 is the main drag, and most of the hotels, from the Holiday Inn to upscale local motels, are situated on it. Every hotel has access to a stop for the Springdale free shuttle, which will deposit you at the pedestrian entrance to Zion. Most of the hotels have free parking. Public parking in Springdale will cost about $20 a day. The park has very limited parking for visitors that fills up early in the morning. Let’s look at some interesting options of where to make your base camp.

Surround Yourself With Views

Canyon Vista Lodge is a little-known gem (with 5 stars on TripAdvisor) that’s located at the far end of the Springdale strip. It is a bed and breakfast that is an extension of Zion National Park, but isn’t technically inside its perimeter. The lodge is on the Springdale shuttle route but seems secluded. The Virgin River runs behind the sprawling property and back patio. Needless to say, this place has views of the park that never end. There are four different suites to book with rustic four-poster and sleigh beds along with modern amenities. Breakfast is served with a unique opportunity: You order from one of the town restaurants and the Lodge delivers it to you exactly when you want it — and this is included in the price of your room. Room service with a view!

Watch The Watchman

One of the most picturesque hotels in the Zion area is the Bumbleberry Inn. Rooms on one side have balconies and patios with an unobstructed view of The Watchman, a spectacular peak inside the park. You’ll get to see it in all its different light permutations. Don’t have a room with a view? That’s no problem. The hotel property is very large and has outdoor seating areas where you can enjoy views like a boss. This hotel has Wi-Fi, an outdoor pool, a restaurant serving fresh, homemade bumbleberry pie, and a theater for live entertainment. The hotel is family friendly and convenient to everything in the middle of the Springdale strip. Though it is not directly on the strip, there is easy access to the Springdale shuttle.

The Novel House Inn near Zion National Park.

The Novel House / eviivo.com

Indulge Your Inner Author

The Novel House Inn is a quaint, 10-room inn that situates itself in the “European tradition.” It has a 5-star rating on TripAdvisor and 4.8 on Google Maps. It’s off the main drag, but you can access the Springdale shuttle nearby. Each of its rooms is decorated with antique furniture and a theme based on a particular novelist. Very novel. Of course there is a library on site and plenty of chairs inside and out for reading. Reading may not be easy given the stunning views of Zion Canyon from anywhere on the two-acre property, though. The inn has vouchers for breakfast at nearby restaurants.

Explore Zion From Your RV

You can stay inside the park at the South Campground (117 sites, no hook ups) or the Watchman Campground (190 sites, water and electric). Both these campgrounds fill up during the summer and fall and reservations are a must. Like staying in the Zion Lodge, you are in the middle of everything the park has to offer 24/7, including Night Sky programs hosted by the Park Rangers.

The writer at an RV resort in Zion National Park.

Robyne Stevenson

Live Luxuriously In Your House On Wheels

The Zion River RV Resort is a very nice place to stay. It is the most upscale RV campground I’ve been to, and I loved every inch of this place, from its riverfront campsites and the luxurious laundry/shower building to the fabulous camp store/office/TV room where Sunday football is treated as a celebration. The sites are concrete pads, and there is beautiful landscaping throughout as well as a pool. This spot is located 12 miles from Springdale. If you want restaurants and shopping, you go to Springdale. Given it is one of only two commercial campgrounds near the park, it fills up very quickly. Get a reservation early; it is worth it.

Rough It On Red Rock Land

There are many locations near the town of Virgin (14 miles from Springdale) that are designated Bureau of Land Management (BLM) camping sites. You can stay for 14 days maximum for free. This is true boondocking and no reservations are taken. Find a spot and set up your campsite. I stayed for a week and met van campers, tent campers, and of course fellow RVers. A BLM ranger came through at least once a day to take attendance. Highway 9 was a half-mile away and the Virgin River runs nearby, though below ground level. The ground is red rock clay and the mesas are some of the best views you’ll ever see, especially at sunset. The roads to get to the camping spots are a little rough, but take it slow and you’ll arrive to a magical experience.

The landscape of Zion National Park.

Robyne Stevenson

Staying Farther Out Is A Tradeoff

You can find more accommodations in Hurricane and on toward St. George that might be cheaper, but the farther you go from the park, the longer it takes to get there. Keep in mind that parking is not easy to find in the park or cheap in Springdale. Hurricane is 24 miles to the park entrance, so add gas and time to your travel plans as well. I highly recommend staying no farther than Virgin (14 miles a way) to keep commuting to a minimum. There is a Fairfield Inn in Virgin.

If you do decide to stay between Hurricane and St. George, you will find plenty of chain hotels like LaQuinta, Best Western, and Quality Inn. Some of these chain hotels are also located in Springdale.

Once you’ve decided where to stay, review our guide to getting the most out of a visit to Zion National Park.

]]>
How To Visit Crater Lake National Park In Oregon https://www.travelawaits.com/2486644/how-to-visit-crater-lake-oregon/ Sat, 14 Dec 2019 20:04:31 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2486644/how-to-visit-crater-lake-oregon/ Crater lake National Park’s otherworldly beauty earns it a place on your bucket-list.

]]>

Known as one of Oregon’s seven wonders, Crater Lake’s crystal clear, snow-fed waters will make you gasp in awe.

You’ll never forget the sight of driving out from the pine tree-lined road to the first views of the glistening blue caldera in front of you. At 1,943 feet, Crater Lake is the deepest lake in the United States, and the ninth deepest in the world. Although photographers can try to capture its beauty, Crater Lake is one of those places that truly has to be seen in person to be believed.

Where Is Crater Lake National Park?

Situated in southern Oregon, Crater Lake is part of the Cascade Range, which runs from Northern California to British Columbia. As part of the Pacific Ocean’s Ring of Fire, the Cascade Range includes 13 volcanoes such as Mount Shasta, Mount Rainer, and Mount Hood. It also includes Mount Mazama, which erupted about 7,700 years ago and left behind a giant caldera. Over time, this crater was filled with rain and snow to create what we now know as Crater Lake. It’s also why the lake is so vibrantly blue.

Located inland, Crater Lake is about a four-hour drive from the ocean, a four-hour drive from Portland, and just 60 miles from the California border. The closest cities to Crater Lake are Ashland, Medford, and Klamath Falls.

Sign at the entrance of Crater Lake.

Christopher Boswell / Shutterstock

How To Get To Crater Lake

Crater Lake sits about seven miles from the turn off of Highway 62. To appreciate the deepest lake in the United States fully, make sure to drive to the Rim Village Visitor Center to see the stunning view.

Getting To Crater Lake By Car

Driving is probably the most convenient and low-cost way to visit Crater Lake. A car will allow flexibility of movement around the park and fewer time restrictions.

About two hours from the California border, Crater Lake National Park can be accessed year-round via Highway 62. The entrance from the main highway to Park Headquarters is open daily, however, the last three miles to Rim Village can be closed in the winter during heavy snow.

If you’re traveling from Medford, you can take Highway 62 all the way to the West Entrance. If you’re traveling from Klamath Falls, drive on Highway 97 before merging onto Highway 62 for the park’s South Entrance. From the north, you can enter via Highway 138 and the North Entrance to Crater Lake, however, if it’s closed due to snow, continue driving to the West or South Entrance via Highway 62.

Getting To Crater Lake By Train And Bus

As of 2016, if you’re traveling from Los Angeles, California, or Seattle, Washington, you can take the Amtrak Train line to the Klamath Falls stop. From Klamath Falls, a shuttle will pick you up and take you to Crater Lake National Park.

From California, the #14 train arrives at 8:30 a.m. — just in time for the shuttle transfer to the park at 9 a.m. You’ll have time to explore the park before boarding the 3 p.m. shuttle back to Klamath Falls.

If you’re traveling from Seattle or Portland, the #11 train arrives in Klamath Falls at 10:30 p.m., where you can stay overnight before boarding the 9 a.m. shuttle to Crater Lake National Park. This option also has a return shuttle back to Klamath Falls at 3 p.m.

The perk of this transportation option is that your $40 round-trip ticket already includes your park entrance fee. However, it’s important to note that this option is only available between July 1 and September 8.

Winter time at Crater Lake.

Matthew Connolly / Shutterstock

When Is The Best Time To Visit Crater Lake?

Sitting almost 7,000 feet above sea level, Crater Lake is known to be one of the snowiest places in the United States — an average of 43 feet of snow fall around Crater Lake each year. Due to this, Crater Lake skips over most of traditional spring as there can be snow on the ground until June!

These conditions cause the park to close the North Entrance Road and Rim Drive during the winter. It doesn’t mean you can’t visit, but that you’ll have to access Crater Lake via Highway 62 through the South or West entrances. These closures don’t affect Rim Village unless there is very heavy snowfall, in which case the road may be closed for a few hours or days to clear it.

The snowy months also mean accommodations inside the park, such as campgrounds and lodges, are closed. That said, there are places to stay outside the park. For snowshoeing or cross-country skiing, however, this is the best time to visit. Rangers even offer free two-hour guided snowshoe walks that last about two hours on weekends and some holidays.

Although it depends on your activity preferences, many people choose to visit from July through September. During these three months, all the roads will have opened, snow will have melted, and more than 90 miles of Crater Lake trails can be hiked.

Crater Lake National Park in Oregon.

Jeffrey B. Banke / Shutterstock

What Is There To Do At Crater Lake?

Although it may seem that Crater Lake doesn’t offer much to do beyond taking in the view from the road, you may be surprised! During the winter, snowshoeing, sledding, backcountry camping, and other winter activities are the main draws. However, some may argue that there are more things to do during the summer months, including hiking, swimming, fishing, and driving around the lake. Here are some options.

Complete The Rim Drive

The 33-mile drive around the rim is one of the most beautiful aspects of visiting Crater Lake, as you’ll be able to see the lake from all angles. The Rim Drive is open from July to October and has many turnouts and outlooks for optimal enjoyment of the view. Take about two to three hours to fully enjoy the trip. The most popular places to stop include Cloudcap Overlook, Pinnacles Overlook, and Vidae Falls for cliff-side pine trees, rock formations, and a spring-fed waterfall, respectively. When the roads close for the winter, the Rim Drive becomes a scenic place to walk, play, and ski.

If you don’t want to drive yourself and want to fully focus on taking in the scenery, take a Crater Lake Trolley Tour. The ranger-led tour takes about two hours, stops at five outlooks, and leaves from Rim Village daily.

Hike The Trails

One of the best ways to experience Crater Lake National Park is taking a stroll through some of the 90 miles of hiking trails available. As one of the most beautiful natural landscapes in Oregon, it can be enjoyed by hikers of all levels. From short and easy to long and strenuous, Crater Lake has a trail for every kind of experience.

For a quick hike with a lot of reward, choose to hike Castle Crest. The 20-minute half-mile hike takes you through a meadow that’s filled with wildflowers in July. For a slightly longer trek with plenty of lake views, choose the moderate Discovery Point trail which takes you to the place of the first documented Crater Lake discovery — way back in 1853. For longer hikes (~3 hours) that will work up a sweat and reward with panoramic views of Crater Lake, choose either Garfield Peak Trail or Mount Scott.

The Phantom Ship in Crater Lake.

e’walker / Shutterstock

View The Phantom Ship

One of the most unique features of Crater Lake is a small island that looks like a sailing ship that rises from its water. However, the ship-island likes to play games, and during different weather conditions, it can completely disappear from view, hence its name: Phantom Ship. The best place to view the island is from the short Sun Notch loop trail. In about 30-minutes, you’ll be able to walk to and from the rim to see if you can catch a glimpse of the elusive “ship.”

Go Stargazing

Clear and crisp evenings are some of the most beautiful at Crater Lake National Park. The absence of light pollution in addition to the clean air on top of the mountain provides the perfect conditions to watch the night sky. Whether you decide to visit during an astronomical event like a meteor shower or just want to get away from city lights, Discovery Point and Watchmen’s Overlook are great places to watch the moonrise, sunrise, and sunset. If you go in the evening, you can stay for the night sky.

Take A Cruise

While most of the previous activities are around the lake, it’s also possible to get up close to the water. That’s right, you can take a boat cruise around Crater Lake. The two-hour ranger-led tour takes visitors around the entire lake while explaining all the lake’s marvels. The other tour available shuttles people to and from Wizard Island (about one hour each way) and allows visitors to swim, fish, and hike there for about three hours.

The dock rests at the end of Cleetwood Cove Trail, which is the only access to Crater Lake’s shore and can be tough to hike. Heading down to the shore takes about 45 minutes along sandy switchbacks that drop 700 feet. This means the way back is quite steep — equivalent to climbing 65 flights of stairs. The trail is just over two miles round-trip and should be approached with caution, mobility, and overall health in mind.

Other Things To Know

Since Crater Lake is part of the National Park Service, an entrance fee applies. If you don’t already have an annual National Parks Pass, your Crater Lake trip is a great time to get a National Park Senior pass. Otherwise, it costs $25 to enter between May 22 and October 1 and $15 to enter between November 1 and May 21. The fee includes seven days of access to the park.

Going to Oregon? Here’s how to visit Multnomah Falls, plus why Thor’s Well on the Oregon coast appears to be draining the Pacific Ocean.

]]>
7 Fast Facts About Wales’s Stunning Snowdonia National Park https://www.travelawaits.com/2486623/snowdonia-national-park-facts/ Sat, 14 Dec 2019 14:18:28 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2486623/snowdonia-national-park-facts/ Wales's Snowdonia National Park is one of the world’s most unique natural spaces. Forged by glaciers, mined by Romans, and currently the heart of Welsh agriculture, Snowdonia is a special place.

]]>

Enchanting Snowdonia is the pride of Wales: 823 square miles of pristine vistas, and craggy valleys carved by glaciers long ago.

Fairy Glen Gorge in Snowdonia.
orxy / Shutterstock

Snowdonia is famous for its phenomenal hiking and trekking, as well as its multitude of fluffy white residents. Sheep dot the Welsh landscape and add a pastoral air to Snowdonia, reminding visitors that they are indeed in another world altogether.

Sheep in Snowdonia, Wales.
Lilly Trott / Shutterstock

No trip to Wales would be complete without visiting this massive national park. Before you lace up your hiking boots and head out into the wonderful Welsh wilderness, there are a few things that you should know about majestic Snowdonia.

The valley of Cwm Idwal in Snowdonia.
DJTaylor / Shutterstock

Glaciers Carved Its Distinctive Valleys

Snowdonia’s valleys, or corries, are the remnants of long-ago glacial activity. As the massive glaciers passed through Wales, they carved out Snowdonia’s most famous valleys, including Cwm Idwal and Cwm Clyd. It’s speculated that the icy behemoths slowly crawled over Snowdonia 18,000 years ago, leaving their telltale traces in the valleys and peaks of the park.

The town of Beddgelert in Snowdonia.
Adrian Baker / Shutterstock

It’s The Final Resting Place Of A Famously Loyal Pup

Snowdonia is home to several small villages, including Beddgelert, which is named after a fiercely loyal canine companion who lost his life in a tragic misunderstanding. The legend of Gelert is the story of Prince Llywelyn the Great’s trusty hunting dog. While the prince was away, Gelert slew a wolf to save the prince’s child. The prince mistook the wolf’s blood for his infant’s and killed Gelert. When the misunderstanding came to light, Gelert was honored for his bravery and remains one of Wales’s favorite sons to this day.

Dinorwig Quarry in Snowdonia.
Helen Hotson / Shutterstock

Its Resources Have Been Valued Since Roman Times

Snowdonia is rich in copper, gold, and slate. Its bountiful hills have been mined for riches since Roman times. You can still visit some of the restored mines today and learn about Snowdonia’s remarkable history in the Welsh economy. Today, Snowdonia is primarily an agricultural district and tourist destination.

It Boasts The Highest Peak In Wales

Snowdonia’s Yr Wyddfa peak is the highest in Wales. At 3,560 feet, Yr Wyddfa’s summit offers a spectacular panoramic view of Snowdonia. It’s a popular place to visit, and you can take the scenic train ride up or tackle Snowdon’s peak on foot. Reaching the summit takes 6 to 8 hours, and the climb can be strenuous. There are six ways to summit Yr Wyddfa, and if you take up the challenge, it’s advisable to bring your own food and plenty of water.

Mountains in Snowdonia during winter.
Valdis Skudre / Shutterstock

It Contains Nine Mountain Ranges

Considering Snowdonia’s sheer size, it’s no surprise that this Welsh park has plenty of jaw-dropping natural features. One of the most impressive is its many mountains. No less than nine mountain ranges crisscross Snowdonia. Snowdon’s Yr Wyddfa is the tallest, but Cadair Idris and Tryfan are certainly not to be missed. Snowdonia’s plethora of peaks are part of what makes it an adventurer’s paradise.

Castell y Gwynt in Snowdonia.
travellight / Shutterstock

Its Trails Trace The Paths Of Dragons

Wales is a land steeped in mythology, and one of the most famous tales comes from Snowdonia. The Dinas Emrys Trail leads to a famous place where two ancient dragons are said to have sparred for control. According to lore, the red and white dragons emerged from below the surface and battled epically. The red dragon won and has been slumbering deep below Snowdonia for centuries. Today, you can hike the moderately difficult Dinas Emrys Trail to walk in the footsteps of these two mythological dragons.

Fields and mountains in Snowdonia.
JazzLove / Shutterstock

26,000 People Call It Home

Unlike many national parks, Snowdonia has a thriving population: About 26,000 people live in the many small towns in the park. The vast majority of the residents speak Welsh, and the vast majority of them are involved in the agricultural sector. Wander through Snowdonia, and you’re bound to come across farm animals and fields of crops, as well as the pleasant country folk who call the park home.

A waterfall in Snowdonia.
Willy Barton / Shutterstock

Snowdonia is one of the world’s most unique natural spaces. Forged by glaciers, mined by Romans, and currently the heart of Welsh agriculture, Snowdonia is a special place. Next time you’re in England or Wales, put this beautiful Welsh gem on your bucket list.

]]>
Meet The 12 Apostles, The Highlight Of Australia’s Gorgeous Coastal Road Trip https://www.travelawaits.com/2486579/12-apostles-great-ocean-road-australia/ Fri, 13 Dec 2019 17:40:49 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2486579/12-apostles-great-ocean-road-australia/ Here’s everything you need to know about the 12 Apostles, other nearby landmarks, and the history of the Great Ocean Road, Australia’s most popular highway.

]]>

The Great Ocean Road winds across the southern coast of Australia, taking travelers on a beautiful adventure. For many tourists, the highlight is the 12 Apostles, a set of limestone stacks that protrude majestically from the clear blue waters of the Southern Ocean.

Visiting these natural landmarks isn’t too difficult — if you don’t mind spending some serious time in the car, you can plan a single-day trip from Melbourne — but to truly appreciate the Great Ocean Road, you’ll need to budget a few days.

Here’s everything you need to know about the 12 Apostles, other nearby landmarks, and the history of Australia’s most popular highway.

The Great Ocean Road in Australia.

Yunsun_Kim / Shutterstock

Millions Of People Drive The Great Ocean Road Every Year

The Great Ocean Road runs about 150 miles from Torquay to Allansford, traversing some of the most beautiful terrain anywhere on the planet. Visitors pass by cliffs, beaches, and even rainforests.

Given the drive’s scenic charm, it should come as no surprise that the Great Ocean Road is well traveled. Millions of people drive the road every year, including more than 245,000 international tourists.

The entrance to Australia's Great Ocean Road.

Mo Wu / Shutterstock

The Road Is A War Memorial

While Australia toyed with the idea of a southern coastal road in the late 1880s, construction didn’t begin until 1918, when Geelong mayor Howard Hitchcock gathered money to build the road as a permanent memorial to Australia’s World War I servicemen.

Many of the servicemen who’d served in the Great War worked on the road, using shovels, picks, and other basic tools to painstakingly carve out the route over the next several decades. The Great Ocean Road officially opened to the public in November 1932.

The 12 Apostles in Australia.

superjoseph / Shutterstock

There Aren’t Actually 12 Apostles

The 12 Apostles are the Great Ocean Road’s most famous landmarks, but the name is something of a misnomer. Initially, they were simply called the Pinnacles, or the Sow and Piglets (Muttonbird Island was the Sow, while the limestone stacks made up the Piglets). At some point, they were called the Apostles, which became the 12 Apostles to better reflect their Biblical namesake.

However, there are only eight stacks in the officially recognized formation. At one point, there were nine stacks, but one was lost to erosion.

The 12 Apostles in Australia.

Neale Cousland / Shutterstock

The Apostles Are Constantly Changing

Every year, harsh storms batter Australia’s southern coast, further eroding the limestone structures by about 2 centimeters annually. Eventually, the erosion will send the Apostles tumbling into the sea, and new limestone pillars will gradually form from the same geological process over thousands of years.

For travelers, that’s a good reason to move a Great Ocean Road drive to the top of your bucket list: At any given time, any of the pillars could disappear forever.

The Grotto in Australia.

Damian Pankowiec / Shutterstock

Other Natural Wonders Await Near The 12 Apostles

The 12 Apostles are breathtaking, but they’re not the only attractions on the route. Travel a few miles west of Port Campbell to see the Grotto, an incredible geological archway that frames gorgeous views of the sea.

The Loch Ard Gorge is also nearby. The gorge gets its name from the ship Loch Ard, which ran aground on the site, killing 52 of its passengers; memorials on the site tell the story of the lost passengers and crew.

A wild koala at Kennett River.

Nicole Patience / Shutterstock

You Can See Local Wildlife In Nearby Kennett River

Kennett River is a small town located between Lorne and Apollo Bay. It has a wonderful beach, but the local wildlife is the real draw.

Take a quick stop here, and you’ll see koalas, kookaburras, parrots, and various other native Australian creatures. The koalas are comfortable around humans, though you should try to plan your visit for the late afternoon when they’re at their most active.

The 12 Apostles in Australia.

Filip Fuxa / Shutterstock

Plan On Spending At Least A Day On The Great Ocean Road

Driving the road from Melbourne to Apollo Bay takes roughly 3 hours nonstop, but you’ll be stopping fairly regularly. Most travelers plan on spending at least two days on this trip, though it’s doable in a day if you design your itinerary carefully.

If you decide to make the trip in two days, consider overnighting in Port Campbell, a quaint seaside village about half an hour from the 12 Apostles. Apollo Bay, another coastal town alongside the Great Otway National Park, is another great place to spend a night or two.

The Great Ocean Road is a delight for true adventurers, and you could easily spend weeks on the route without seeing everything. If you emphasize the “tour” in “tourist,” you’ll certainly want to make this trip a part of your itinerary.

]]>
Exploring New Zealand’s Incredible Waitomo Glowworm Caves https://www.travelawaits.com/2486547/waitomo-glowworm-caves-new-zealand/ Thu, 12 Dec 2019 16:06:04 +0000 https://www.travelawaits.com/2486547/waitomo-glowworm-caves-new-zealand/ Located about 137 miles south of Auckland, New Zealand, the Waitomo Glowworm Caves are unlike any other place on Earth.

]]>

Located about 137 miles south of Auckland, New Zealand, the Waitomo Glowworm Caves are unlike any other place on Earth. That’s not an exaggeration — to see anything like this, you’ll need to head to New Zealand’s North Island.

Thick limestone structures jut out at odd angles while travelers drift through the calm, quiet waters on small boats. Look up, and the true majesty of Waitomo becomes apparent: The ceiling is adorned with hundreds of glowworms, which seem to shine like stars in an alien sky.

Needless to say, it’s a worthwhile experience. Here’s everything you need to know about the Waitomo Caves and the insects that have made them a must-see attraction.

Close up of glowworms in the Waitomo Caves.

Marcel Strelow / Shutterstock

Yes, The Glowworms Really Light Up

Their scientific name is Arachnocampa luminosa (Latin for “glowing spider-worm”), and they’re the larvae of the fungus gnat (we’ll admit that “glowworm” sounds quite a bit nicer than “fungus gnat larvae”).

They create a bluish-green light to attract small flying insects, which get caught in the worms’ sticky web-like threads. The worms pull in the threads to get their meal, but when they catch insects that are too large for them to eat, they cut them loose.

The gnat maintains its luminescence throughout the other stages of its life cycle, but the larvae glow the brightest. They need an appropriately dark, damp environment in order to catch their prey, so they tend to congregate in underground caves.

Inside the Waitomo Caves in New Zealand.

2il org / Shutterstock

Locals Have Known About The Cave For Over A Century

The first modern visitors to Waitomo Cave were Maori chief Tane Tinorau and English surveyor Fred Mace, who explored the underground on a small raft in 1887. Overcome by the sight of the glowworms, they regularly returned to the cave over the next several weeks to enjoy the ethereal light.

Later, Tinorau found a land entrance and began giving tours of Waitomo. Waitomo, by the way, is a Maori word that roughly translates to “stream that flows into the hole in the ground.” Some of Tinorau’s descendants still give tours, so modern tourists have a link to the cave’s early history.

Stalagmites and stalactites in the Waitomo Caves.

Fotos593 / Shutterstock

The Cave Has Incredible Stalagmites And Stalactites

While the glowworms are the undeniable draw, Waitomo has plenty of other attractions for adventurous tourists.

It’s home to a number of cave formations that formed over millions of years, including massive stalactites (which hang from the ceiling) and stalagmites (which seem to grow from the ground). Even without the glowworms, the formations are stunning, regardless of whether you have a general interest in geology.

The entrance to the Waitomo Caves.

Susana Luzir / Shutterstock

The Only Way To See The Glowworms Is Via Boat

The entire boat journey through the glowworm cave only takes a few minutes, though the total Waitomo Cave tour is closer to an hour. The good news is that the tours are appropriate for travelers of all ages, and most parts of the cave will be accessible every day.

A notable exception is the Pipe Organ, the cave’s largest formation. During high-traffic periods, carbon monoxide can build up on this level, so public access to the Pipe Organ may be restricted on some days.

Inside the Waitomo Caves in New Zealand.

Guy Cowdry / Shutterstock

A Few Practical Preparations Will Make For An Incredible Trip

If you add this trip to your itinerary, make sure to prepare for chilly temperatures and slippery surfaces. Wear a light jacket and comfortable clothing, including decent walking shoes.

Children are admitted on the tours, though travelers are asked to remain silent when visiting the Glowworm Grotto; children can become unsettled in caves, and you should keep that in mind when planning your trip.

Glowworms at Waitomo Caves in New Zealand.

Shaun Jeffers / Shutterstock

Unfortunately, You Can’t Bring Your Camera

Photography and videography are not permitted inside the caves, since unnatural light could negatively affect the glowworms. However, your guide will take photos, which you can purchase after the tour.

So, is this just a trick to get tourists to overpay? Probably not, since other nearby caves allow photos. The glowworms are quite responsive, and if they’re disturbed by light or noise, they suddenly stop glowing, shrouding the caves in darkness. Obviously, they can’t attract prey without light, and tours run for 8 hours per day, so the photo ban makes sense.

The Waitomo Glowworm Caves visitor center.

Kyle Carmon / Shutterstock

To Visit, You’ll Need To Plan In Advance

Scheduling a tour of the Waitomo Caves isn’t exactly difficult, but you should book in advance to ensure a spot. You can do so on TripAdvisor or on the Discover Waitomo website. Tours typically leave every half hour, sometimes more frequently during peak seasons.

New Zealand has no shortage of natural wonders, but the Waitomo Glowworm Caves rank as one of the country’s most breathtaking destinations. With a bit of prepwork, you can enjoy this illuminating experience for yourself.

Planning a trip to Auckland? Here’s how to get around while you’re there.

]]>